MONROE COUNTY Project Manual CR 905 BIKE LANE …dnhiggins.com/docs/Specifications - CR 905 Bike Lanes.pdf1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Owner through

MONROE COUNTY Project Manual

CR 905 BIKE LANE CONSTRUCTION PROJECT

BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS

Mayor George Neugent, District 2 Mayor Pro Tem Heather Carruthers, District 3

Danny Kolhage, District 1 David Rice, District 4

Sylvia Murphy, District 5

COUNTY ADMINISTRATOR Roman Gastesi, Jr

CLERK OF THE CIRCUIT COURT DIRECTOR OF PUBLIC WORKS Amy Heavilin & ENGINEERING

Kevin Wilson

September 2013

Prepared By: Monroe County Engineering Services Department

Monroe County, FL

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00001-1

SECTION 00001 TABLE OF CONTENTS

CR 905 BIKE LANES Monroe County, Florida

________________________________________________________________________ 1. BIDDING DOCUMENTS Section 00030 Notice of Calling for Bids Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders Section 00110 Bid Proposal Section 00163 Pre-Bid Substitutions Section 00300 Scope of Work Section 00350 Milestone Schedule 2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Section 00500 Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor 3. CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT Section 00750 General Conditions Section 00850 Public Construction Bond Section 00900 General Insurance Requirements for Contractors & Subcontractors Section 01000 Special Conditions

Attachment A: Geotechnical Report Attachment B: USACE Environmental Resources Permit # SAJ-2012-

03326 (NPR-IF) SFWMD No Notice General Permit USFWS Coordination letter

4. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01025 Measurements and Payment Section 01027 Applications for Payment Section 01200 Pre-Construction Meeting Section 01301 Submittals Section 01385 Daily Construction Reports Section 01395 Requests for Information Section 01630 Post-Bid Substitutions 5. REF: FDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE

CONSTRUCTION 2013 Section 0101 Mobilization Section 0102 Maintenance of Traffic

Section 0104 Prevention, Control, and Abatement of Erosion and Water Pollution

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 TABLE OF CONTENTS 00001-2

Section 0110 Clearing and Grubbing Section 0120 Excavation and Embankment Section 0125 Excavation for Structures and Pipe 5. REF: FDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE

CONSTRUCTION 2013 (Cont’d) Section 0285 Optional Base Course

Section 0334 Superpave Asphalt Concrete Section 0339 Miscellaneous Asphalt Pavement

Section 0520 Concrete Gutter Curb Elements and Traffic Separators Section 0536 Guardrail Section 0550 Fencing Section 0570 Performance Turf, Sod Section 0700 Highway Signing Section 0710 Painted Pavement Markings Section 0711 Thermoplastic Traffic Stripes and Markings 6. PROJECT DRAWINGS

EAC Consulting, Inc. for the CR 905 Bike Lanes signed and sealed 4/29/13.

~~~~~~~~~~ END OF SECTION 00001

Bidding Documents

Section 00030 Notice of Calling for Bids Section 00100 Instructions to Bidders

Section 00110 Bid Proposals Section 00163 Pre-Bid Substitutions Section 00300 Scope of Work Section 00350 Milestone Schedule

NOTICE OF REQUEST FOR COMPETITIVE SOLICITATIONS

NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that on November 21, 2013 at 3:00 P.M. the Monroe County Purchasing Office will receive and open sealed responses for the following:

CR 905 BIKE LANES CONSTRUCTION PROJECT MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA

Requirements for submission and the selection criteria may be requested from DemandStar by Onvia at www.demandstar.com OR www.monroecountybids.com or call toll-free at 1-800-711-1712. The Public Record is available at the Monroe County Purchasing Office located at The Gato Building, 1100 Simonton Street, Room 2-213, Key West, Florida. All Responses must be sealed and must be submitted to the Monroe County Purchasing Office. Publication dates Citizen (Fr) 10/18/13 Keynoter (Sa) 10/19/13 Reporter (Fr) 10/18/13

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00100-1

SECTION 00100

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

ARTICLE I

DEFINITIONS 1.1 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders, which are defined in the General Conditions, shall have

the same meanings or definitions as assigned to them in the General Conditions. 1.2 Bidding Documents include the Instructions to Bidders, Bid Proposal, Pre-Bid Substitutions, Scope of

Work and Milestone Schedule, other sample bidding and contract forms and the proposed Contract Documents including any addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids. The Contract Documents proposed for the Work consist of the Standard Form of Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Public Construction Bond, Supplementary Insurance Documents, Special Conditions, General Requirements, Technical Specifications, Drawings, and all Bid Documents.

1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Owner through the Director of Engineering

Services prior to the receipt of Bids which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications, or corrections.

1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein,

submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described

in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids.

1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the

amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted.

1.7 An Owner Option Bid (or Option) is an amount stated in the Bid, which can be exercised by the

Owner through the Director of Engineering Services, for the corresponding change in the work as described in the Bidding Documents. This Owner Option can be exercised at any time during the contract duration.

1.8 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services

as described in the Bidding Documents or in the proposed Contract Documents. Unit prices shall apply to add and deduct change orders and shall include all overhead and profit.

1.9 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid. 1.10 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials or labor for a portion of

the Work. 1.11 The term 'provide' means 'furnish and install'. Wherever 'provide' or 'furnish and install' are used, this

shall mean the complete purchase and installation, per the specified or implied requirements. 1.12 The term 'perform' refers only to installation and requires full compliance with the specified or implied

requirements.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


ARTICLE II COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

2.1 Bidders shall obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents as designated in the Notice of Calling for

Bids. No bids will be accepted from bidders who have not obtained complete sets of the Bidding Documents as designated in the Notice of Calling for Bids.

2.2.1 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids. Neither the Owner, his

agents, nor the Director of Engineering Services assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.

2.3 Scope of work is described in Section 00300; and specifications are to be found in the Technical

section. The Work is shown on the construction drawings.

ARTICLE III EXAMINATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS AND SITE

3.1 Before Submitting a Bid:

A. Each Bidder shall thoroughly examine all the Bidding Documents. B. Each Bidder shall visit the site to familiarize himself with local conditions that may in any

manner affect the cost, progress, or performance of the Work. 3.2 The lands, upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-ways for access thereto and other lands

designated for use by the Contractors in performing the Work are identified in the General Requirements or shown on the Drawings.

3.3 Each Bidder shall study and carefully correlate his observations with the Bidding Documents. 3.4 The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by the Bidder that he has

complied with every requirement of Article 3 and that the Bidding Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance of the Work.

ARTICLE IV

INTERPRETATION AND CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4.1 Bidders and Sub-bidders shall promptly notify the Director of Engineering Services of any ambiguity,

inconsistency or error, which they may discover upon examination of the Bidding Documents, or of the site and local conditions.

4.2 Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall

submit their questions in writing to the Director of Engineering Services no later than seven (7) calendar days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Written questions should be mailed to Judy Clarke, P.E., Director of Engineering Services, Monroe County Engineering Department, 1100 Simonton Street, Key West, Florida 33040 or faxed to (305) 295-4321. Any interpretation, correction or change of the Bidding Documents will be accomplished by Addenda mailed or delivered to all parties recorded as having received plans. Copies of Addenda will also be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. Interpretations, corrections, or changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding and Bidders shall

CR 905 Bike Lanes


not rely upon such interpretations and changes. Oral and other interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect.

ARTICLE V

BIDDING PROCEDURE 5.1 FORM AND STYLE OF BIDS

A. The Bid Proposal shall be submitted on the forms included in Section 00110 of these Bidding Documents with the exception of the Bid Bond, which may be submitted in alternate forms as described in Section 5.3 - B of these Instructions to Bidders. Each of the forms in Section 00110 must be properly filled out, executed, and submitted as the Bid Proposal. 1. Bidders shall photocopy documents included in the Bid Package as being required for

submission of Bids. 2. A person or affiliate who has been placed on the convicted vendor list following a

conviction for public entity crime may not submit a bid on a contract to provide any goods or services to a public entity, may not submit a bid on a contract with a public entity for the construction or repair of a public building or public work, may not submit bids on leases of real property to public entity, may not be awarded or perform work as contractor, supplier, subcontractor, or consultant under a contract with any public entity, and may not transact business with any public entity in excess of the threshold amount provided in Section 287.017, for CATEGORY TWO for a period of 36 months from the date of being placed on the convicted vendor list.

3. All forms contained in Section 00110 - Bid Proposal must be fully completed and

submitted as part of the Bid Proposal. 4. The Bidder is required to submit a copy of the appropriate Contractor’s license and

proof that he is properly licensed to conduct business in Monroe County as part of the Bid Proposal.

5. A person or affiliate who has been debarred or suspended by the Federal government

or is otherwise excluded or ineligible from participation in Federal assistance program under Executive Order 12549 may not submit a bid on a contract to provide any goods or services to a public entity, may not submit a bid on a contract with a public entity for the construction or repair of a public building or public work, may not be awarded or work as a contractor, supplier, subcontractor, or consultant under a contract with any public entity.

B. All blanks on the Bid Form shall be filled in with ink or by typewriter. C. Where so indicated on the Bid Form, sums shall be expressed in both words and figures, and

in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words shall govern. D. All Bidders must submit copies of their Contractor's license with their Bid.

E. In order to determine if persons or entities submitting responses to competitive solicitations

are responsible, all responses to competitive solicitations for contracts to be awarded under

this section must contain, at a minimum, the following information:

CR 905 Bike Lanes


(1) A list of the person's or entity's shareholders with five percent or more of the stock or,

if a general partnership, a list of the general partners; or, if a limited liability company,

a list of its members; or, if a solely owned proprietorship, names(s) of owner(s);

(2)

A list of the officers and directors of the entity;

(3)

The number of years the person or entity has been operating and, if different, the

number of years it has been providing the services, goods, or construction services

called for in the bid specifications (include a list of similar projects);

(4)

The number of years the person or entity has operated under its present name and any

prior names;

(5)

Answers to the following questions regarding claims and suits:

a.

Has the person, principals, entity, or any entity previously owned, operated or

directed by any of its officers, major shareholders or directors, ever failed to

complete work or provide the goods for which it has contracted? If yes,

provide details;

b.

Are there any judgments, claims, arbitration proceeding or suits pending or

outstanding against the person, principal of the entity, or entity, or any entity

previously owned, operated or directed by any of its officers, directors, or

general partners? If yes, provide details;

c.

Has the person, principal of the entity, entity, or any entity previously owned,

operated or directed by any of its officers, major shareholders or directors,

within the last five years, been a party to any lawsuit, arbitration, or mediation

with regard to a contract for services, goods or construction services similar to

those requested in the specifications with private or public entities? If yes,

provide details;

d.

Has the person, principal of the entity, or any entity previously owned,

operated or directed by any of its officers, owners, partners, major

shareholders or directors, ever initiated litigation against the county or been

sued by the county in connection with a contract to provide services, goods or

construction services? If yes, provide details;

e.

Whether, within the last five years, the owner, an officer, general partner,

principal, controlling shareholder or major creditor of the person or entity was

an officer, director, general partner, principal, controlling shareholder or

CR 905 Bike Lanes


major creditor of any other entity that failed to perform services or furnish

goods similar to those sought in the request for competitive solicitation;

f.

Customer references (minimum of three), including name, current address and

current telephone number;

g.

Credit references (minimum of three), including name, current address and

current telephone number;

h.

Financial statements for the prior three years for the responding entity or for

any entity that is a subsidiary to the responding entity; and

i.

Any financial information requested by the county department involved in the

competitive solicitation, related to the financial qualifications, technical

competence, the ability to satisfactorily perform within the contract time

constraints, or other information the department deems necessary to enable

the department and board of county commissioners to determine if the person

responding is responsible.

6. Customer references;

7. Credit references;

8. List Subcontractors, and

9. A printout from the “Detail by Entity Name” screen from the bidder’s listing in www.sunbiz.org and a most recent copy of the bidder’s annual report.

10. A copy of the Contractor’s Annual Report that is submitted to the Florida Secretary of State.

F. Any interlineations, alteration, or erasure must be initialed by the signer of the Bid.

G. All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change". Failure to comply shall constitute a non-responsive bid.

H. All requested Allowances shall be bid. Failure to comply shall constitute a non-responsive

bid. I. All requested Owner Options shall be bid. Failure to comply shall constitute a non-responsive

bid. 5.2 ADDENDA

A. Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting his Bid that he has received all Addenda issued, and he shall acknowledge their receipt in his Bid.

B. No Addenda will be issued later than seven (7) calendar days prior to the date for receipt of

Bids except for an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


C. Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose.

5.3 BID SECURITY

A. Any Bid in excess of Two Hundred Thousand dollars ($200,000) shall be accompanied by a Bid Security made payable to Monroe County, in the amount of five percent of the Bidder's maximum Bid price. No Bid Security is required on Bids of Two Hundred Thousand dollars ($200,000) or less.

B. Each Bid shall be accompanied by a Bid Security made payable to Monroe County, in the

amount of five (5) percent of the Bidder’s maximum Bid price. The Bid Security shall be in the form of a certified check, cashiers check or a Bid Bond issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the form in Section 00110. If a Bid Bond is submitted as Bid Security, the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the Bond a certified and current copy of his power of attorney.

C. The bid surety constitutes a pledge by the Bidder that he will enter into a Contract with the

Owner on the terms stated in his Bid and will furnish the required Public Construction Bond, as described in the General and Supplementary Conditions of this contract. The Bid Security of the successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has entered into a Contract with the Owner and furnished the required Public Construction Bond, whereupon it will be returned. If the successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Contract and furnish the required Bond, the Owner may annul the Notice of Award and the amount of the bid security of that Bidder shall be forfeited to the Owner not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages. A Public Construction Bond is not required on construction contracts of Two Hundred Thousand Dollars ($200,000) or less.

D. The bid security of any Bidder whom the Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of

receiving the award may be retained by the Owner until either (a) the Contract has been executed and the required Bond has been furnished, or (b) the ninety-first (91st) day after the Bid opening, or (c) all Bids have been rejected. The bid security of the other Bidders will be returned within fourteen (14) days of the Bid opening.

5.4 SCHEDULING, MANPOWER REQUIREMENTS, PERMITS AND LICENSES

A. The overall schedule for construction is shown in the Bidding Documents "Milestone Schedule." B. The Contractor will be required to provide adequate manpower and equipment in order to

meet the requirements of the Schedule. C. All required permits have been filed by Monroe County and will be made available to the awarded

Contractor for signature. All permit fees will be waived. 5.5 SUBMISSION OF BIDS

A. Bids shall be submitted to Monroe County at the designated location not later than the time and date for receipt of Bids indicated in the Notice of Calling for Bids, or any extension thereof made by Addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened.

B. Two (2) signed originals and two (2) copies of all bids are to be submitted. Place the bid

security in its own separate envelope, marking on the outside 'Bid Security', and place all other

CR 905 Bike Lanes


bidding documents in another envelope, marking on the outside 'Bid Documents'. Both envelopes are to be inserted in one larger envelope. If the Bid is hand-delivered, the envelope shall be filled out as follows: 1. In the upper left-hand corner, place the Bidder's name and address. 2. In the center of the envelope, put the following: Monroe County Purchasing Department 1100 Simonton Street, Room 2-213 Key West, FL 33040 3. In the lower left hand corner, put the following:

Bid for: CR 905 Bike Lane Construction Project To be opened: November 21, 2013, at 3:00 P.M. If the Bid is sent by mail or courier, the sealed envelope as identified above shall be

enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof and sent to the address above.

C. The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for

receipt of Bids. D. Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, faxed and e-mail Bids are invalid and will not receive

consideration. 5.6 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS

A. A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn, or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, except as provided in Paragraph 5.7 Right to Claim Error in Bid, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting his Bid.

B. Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, any Bid submitted may be modified

by notice in writing to Monroe County Purchasing Department at the place designated for receipt of Bids. The modified bid shall contain all information required in the original bid and shall be labeled “Modified Bid- CR 905 Bike Lanes” and sent as allowed in the original Bid.

C. Bids maybe withdrawn in writing only and must be received prior to the time of opening.

Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders.

D. Bid Security shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as modified or resubmitted. E. No conditional, modified, or qualified bids will be accepted. Bidders are to comply with the

instructions on the bid forms, and not make any changes to them. 5.7 RIGHT TO CLAIM ERROR IN BID

A. Each Bidder's original work papers, documents, and materials used in preparation of the bid shall be enclosed in an envelope and marked clearly as to contents, must be received by Monroe County Purchasing Department no later than 24 hours after the time and date for

CR 905 Bike Lanes


receipt of Bids, or any extension thereof made by Addendum. Bidders who fail to submit their original work papers, documents, and materials used in the preparation of the Bid, as provided herein, waive all rights to claim error in the Bid.

ARTICLE VI

CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6.1 OPENING OF BIDS

A. The properly identified Bids received on time will be opened at the Monroe County Purchasing Department.

B. Any Bid not received by the Purchasing Department on or before the deadline for receipt of

bids designated in the Notice of Calling for Bids will be returned unopened. 6.2 BIDS TO REMAIN OPEN

A. All Bids shall remain open for ninety days after the date designated for receipt of Bids. B. The Owner may, at his sole discretion, release any Bid Proposal and return the Bid Security

before the ninety days has elapsed. 6.3 AWARD OF CONTRACT

A. The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids or any part of a Bid, to waive the right to disregard all nonconforming, non-responsive or conditional Bids.

B. In evaluating Bids, the Owner shall consider the qualifications of the bidders, whether or not

the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, and alternates and unit prices if requested in the Bid Forms.

C. The Owner may consider the qualifications and experience of subcontractors and/or other

entities (including those who are to furnish materials, or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each of the principal portions of the Work as identified in the Bid. Operating costs, maintenance considerations, performance data and guarantees of materials and equipment may also be considered.

D. The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination and to

determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and the Alternates accepted. E. The Owner may conduct such investigations as he deems necessary to assist in the evaluation

of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of the Bidders, proposed subcontractors, and other persons or organizations to do the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the Owner's satisfaction within the prescribed time.

F. The Owner reserves the right to reject the Bid of any Bidder who does not pass any such

evaluation to its satisfaction. G. If the Contract is awarded, it will be awarded to the Bidder whose evaluation by the Owner

shows him to be the lowest responsible conforming Bidder and has indicated to the Owner that the award will be in the best interests of the County.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


H. If the Contract is to be awarded, the Director of Engineering Services will issue the Notice of Award to the successful Bidder within ninety days after the date of receipt of bids. The Owner reserves the right to return all Bids, not make any awards, or cancel the Project.

I. The Owner is tax exempt and reserves the right to purchase directly various construction

materials and equipment that may be a part of the Contract. If the Owner elects to make a particular purchase, the Director of Engineering Services will act as a purchasing agent for the Owner. The Owner will, via a Purchase Contract, purchase the materials and equipment, and the Contractor shall assist the Director of Engineering Services in the preparation of these Purchase Contracts, including providing to the Owner appropriate tax credits.

6.4 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT

A. The Notice of Award to the successful Bidder will be accompanied by four (4) counterpart originals. The Contractor shall sign and deliver all four (4) copies of the Contract Agreement to the Director of Engineering Services, with all other Contract Documents attached, including an original Insurance Certificate, and the Public Construction Bond within ten (10) days after receipt of Notice of Award. The Director of Engineering Services will return one fully executed copy of the Contract Agreement to the Contractor with all other Contract Documents attached within three weeks thereafter. In no event shall the Bidder’s failure to provide insurance extend the contract time.

B. In the event that the Contractor does not comply with Article 6.4-A as stated above, the Owner

may cancel the Award of Contract and select the next responsive bidder or reject all bids.

ARTICLE VII SPECIAL LEGAL REQUIREMENTS

7.1 Each Bidder, before submitting his Bid, shall familiarize himself with all Federal, State, and local

laws, ordinances, rules and regulations that may apply to the Work or that may in any manner affect the cost, progress, or performance of the Work.

7.2 A person or affiliate who has been placed on the convicted vendor list following a conviction for public entity crime may not submit a bid on a contract to provide any goods or service to a public entity, may not submit on a contract with a public entity for the construction or repair of a public building work, may not submit bids on leases of real property to public building or perform work as a contractor, supplier, subcontractor, or consultant under a contract with any public entity, and may not transact business with any public entity in excess of the threshold amount provided in Section 287.017 of the Florida Statutes, for Category Two for a period of 36 months from date of being place on the conviction list. By submitting a bid for this project, bidder states that he is in conformance and is not in violation of section 287.017 of the Florida Statues.

7.3 A person or affiliate who has been debarred or suspended by the Federal government or is otherwise excluded or ineligible from participation in Federal assistance program under Executive Order 12549 may not submit a bid on a contract to provide any goods or services to a public entity, may not submit a bid on a contract with a public entity for the construction or repair of a public building or public work, may not be awarded or work as a contractor, supplier, subcontractor, or consultant under a contract with any public entity.

~~~~~~~~~~ End of Section 00100

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 BID PROPOSAL 00110-1

SECTION 00110

BID PROPOSAL The Bid Proposal shall be submitted on the forms included in this section of the Bidding Documents as previously instructed herein. Item Description 1. Bid Form 2. Non-Collusion Affidavit 3. Lobbying and Conflict of Interest Clause 4. Drug-Free Workplace Form 5. Bid Bond 6. Insurance Agents Statement and Bidder’s Statement 7. Local Preference Form 8. Contractor’s License Current Copy to Be Submitted with Bid Subcontractor Licenses to Be Submitted Prior to Award of Notice to Proceed 9. Subcontractor’s Listing 10. Additional Information as requested in 5.1E of Specification Section 00100. Bidder must also provide all information requested in Section 00100 Instruction to Bidders in addition to forms included in this Section.

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 BID PROPOSAL 00110-2

1. AWARD OF CONTRACT

A. The County reserves the right to award separate contracts for the services based on geographic area or other, and to waive any informality in any response, or to re-advertise for all or part of the work contemplated.

B. The County also reserves the right to reject the response of a Respondent who

has previously failed to perform properly or to complete contracts of a similar nature on time.

C. The recommendation of staff shall be presented to the Board of County Commissioners of

Monroe County, Florida, for final selection and award of contract. 2. EXECUTION OF CONTRACT

The Respondent with whom a contract is negotiated shall be required to return to the County four (4) executed counterparts of the prescribed Agreement together with the required certificates of insurance payment and performance bond.

3. PREPARATION OF RESPONSES

Signature of the Respondent: The Respondent must sign the response forms in the space provided for the signature. If the Respondent is an individual, the words “doing business as ____________”, or” Sole Owner” must appear beneath such signature. In the case of a partnership, the signature of at least one of the partners must follow the firm name and the words “Member of the Firm” should be written beneath such signature. If the Respondent is a corporation, the title of the officer signing the Response on behalf of the corporation must be stated along with the Corporation Seal Stamp and evidence of his authority to sign the Response must be submitted. The Respondent shall state in the response the name and address of each person having an interest in the submitting entity.

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 BID PROPOSAL 00110-3

BID FORM BID TO: MONROE COUNTY BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS C/O PURCHASING DEPARTMENT 1100 SIMONTON STREET, ROOM 2-213 KEY WEST, FLORIDA 33040 BID FROM: ________________________________________ ________________________________________ ________________________________________ The undersigned, having carefully examined the Work and reference Drawings, Specifications, Proposal, and Addenda thereto and other Bid Documents for the construction of:

CR 905 Bike Lanes

Monroe County, Florida

and having carefully examined the site where the Work is to be performed, having become familiar with all local conditions including labor affecting the cost thereof, and having familiarized himself with material availability, Federal, State, and Local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations affecting performance of the Work, does hereby propose to furnish all labor, mechanics, superintendents, tools, material, equipment, transportation services, and all incidentals necessary to perform and complete said Work and work incidental hereto, in a workman-like manner, in conformance with said Drawings, Specifications, and other Contract Documents including Addenda issued thereto. The undersigned further certifies that he has personally inspected the actual location of where the Work is to be performed, together with the local sources of supply and that he understands the conditions under which the Work is to be performed. The successful bidder shall assume the risk of any and all costs and delays arising from the existence of any subsurface or other latent physical condition which could be reasonably anticipated by reference to documentary information provided and made available, and from inspection and examination of the site. The undersigned shall perform the work at the Unit Price Indicated on the following Bid Form. Further, it is understood that the Bid Form Quantities are estimated for evaluation purposes only and that the final contract price will be determined from the actual quantities measured for payment in accordance with the Contract Documents.

Dollars. (Total Base Bid - words) __$_______________________________________________________________________ (Total Base Bid- numbers) Dollars. (Total Alternate Bid - words)

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 BID PROPOSAL 00110-4

__$_______________________________________________________________________ (Total Alternate Bid- numbers) __________________________________________________________________________ Signature Date I acknowledge receipt of Addenda No. (s) ________________. I have included the Bid Proposal which entails the Proposal Form____, the Non-Collusion Affidavit____, the Lobbying and Conflict of Interest Clause____, the Drug-Free Workplace Form ____, the Bid Bond____, the Bidder’s Insurance Statement____, Local Preference Form_____. Also include a copy of valid licenses____. Additional Information. (The above is intended as a courtesy review checklist of the required bid items. However, it does not imply that these are the only items needed. There may be additional requirements not listed here that are listed in other sections of the Project Manual. It is the Contactors responsibility to provide all required bid items.) Mailing Address: _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ _______________________________________________ Phone Number: _______________________________________________ Date: ___________________ Signed: ________________________________ ________________________________ (Name) ________________________________ (Title) Witness: _______________________________ (Seal)

Project: CR 905 Bike LanesLocation: Monroe County, FloridaContractor:Date:

Item Line Total

No. Qty. Unit Description Written Price Unit Price Price

101-1 1 LS Mobilization

102-1 1 LS Maintenance of Traffic

104-10-3 113,035 LF Sediment Barrier

104-11 1,240 LF Floating Turbidity Barrier

110-1-1 1 LS Clearing and Grubbing

110-4 1,717 SY Removal of Existing Concrete Pavement

120-1 28,091 CY Regular Excavation

120-6 20,051 CY Embankment

285-704 72,074 SY Optional Base, Base Group 04

285-701 821 SY Optional Base, Base Group 01

334-1-13A 8,325 TN Superpave Asphaltic Concrete, SP-12.5

334-1-13B 47 TN Superpave Asphaltic Concrete, SP-9.5

339-1 56 TN Miscellaneous Asphalt Pavement

520-3 106 LF Valley Gutter-Concrete

536-1-1 893 LF Guardrail-Roadway

536-1-5 25 LF Guardrail-Roadway. Thrie Beam

536-73 911 LF Guardrail Removal

536-85-24 4 EA Guardrail End Anchorage Assembly-Parallel

550-10110 11517 LF Fencing, Type A, 0.0'-5.0' Standard

570-1-2 82289 SY Preformance Turf, Sod

700-20-11 108 AS Single Post Sign, F&I, Less than 12 SF

700-20-40 16 AS Single Post Sign, Relocate

700-20-60 5 AS Single Post Sign, Remove

710-11160 99 EA Painted Pavement Markings Standard White Message

710-11170 99 EA Painted Pavement Markings Standard White Arrows711-11111 21.3 NM Thermoplastic Standard White Solid 6"711-11131 0.06 GM Thermoplastic Standard White Skip 6"

BID TOTAL:

Contractor's Signature:

Monroe County (Base) Bid Form

7/17/13 BID

PR

OP

OS

AL

00110-5

Garden Cove Drive to Clubhouse Road

Project: CR 905 Bike LanesLocation: Monroe County, FloridaContractor:Date:

Item Line Total

No. Qty. Unit Description Written Price Unit Price Price

101-1 1 LS Mobilization

102-1 1 LS Maintenance of Traffic

104-10-3 95,824 LF Sediment Barrier

104-11 1,240 LF Floating Turbidity Barrier

110-1-1 1 LS Clearing and Grubbing

110-4 1,640 SY Removal of Existing Concrete Pavement

120-1 22,359 CY Regular Excavation

120-6 15,562 CY Embankment

285-704 62,500 SY Optional Base, Base Group 04

285-701 746 SY Optional Base, Base Group 01

334-1-13A 6,875 TN Superpave Asphaltic Concrete, SP-12.5

334-1-13B 41 TN Superpave Asphaltic Concrete, SP-9.5

339-1 56 TN Miscellaneous Asphalt Pavement

520-3 106 LF Valley Gutter-Concrete

536-1-1 893 LF Guardrail-Roadway

536-1-5 25 LF Guardrail-Roadway. Thrie Beam

536-73 911 LF Guardrail Removal

536-85-24 4 EA Guardrail End Anchorage Assembly-Parallel

550-10130 2920 LF Fencing, Type A, 0.0-5.0 Standard

570-1-2 70132 SY Preformance Turf, Sod

700-20-11 88 AS Single Post Sign, F&I, Less than 12 SF

700-20-40 9 AS Single Post Sign, Relocate

700-20-60 0 AS Single Post Sign, Remove

710-11160 85 EA Painted Pavement Markings Standard White Message

710-11170 85 EA Painted Pavement Markings Standard White Arrows711-11111 18 NM Thermoplastic Standard White Solid 6"711-11131 0.06 GM Thermoplastic Standard White Skip 6"

BID TOTAL:

Contractor's Signature:

Monroe County (Alternate) Bid Form

7/17/13 BID

PR

OP

OS

AL

00110-6

Garden Cove Drive to Card Sound Road Intersection

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 BID PROPOSAL 00110-7

NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT ________________________________________________________________________ I, ___________________________ of the city of __________________ according to law on my oath, and under penalty of perjury, depose and say that;

1. I am __________________________________________________ of the firm of __________________________________ , the bidder making the Proposal for the project described in the notice for calling for bids for:

CR 905 Bike Lanes

Monroe County, Florida

and that I executed the said proposal with full authority to do so; 2.) the prices in this bid have been arrived at independently without collusion, consultation,

communication or agreement for the purpose of restricting competition, as to any matter relating to such process with any other bidder or with any competitor;

3.) unless otherwise required by law, the prices which have been quoted in this bid have not been

knowingly disclosed by the bidder and will not knowingly be disclosed by the bidder and will not be knowingly disclosed by the bidder prior to bid opening, directly or indirectly, to any other bidder or to any competitor; and

4.) no attempt has been made or will be made by the bidder to induce any other person,

partnership or corporation to submit, or not to submit, a bid for the purpose of restricting competition;

5.) the statements contained in this affidavit are true and correct, and made with full knowledge

that Monroe County relies upon the truth of the statements contained in this affidavit in awarding contracts for said project.

_________________________________ _________________________ (Signature of Bidder) (Date) STATE OF: ________________________ COUNTY OF: ______________________ PERSONALLY APPEARED BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, (name of individual signing) who, after first being sworn by me, affixed his/her signature in the space provided above on this day of , 2012. _______________________________________ NOTARY PUBLIC My commission expires: _____________________

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 BID PROPOSAL 00110-8

LOBBYING AND CONFLICT OF INTEREST CLAUSE SWORN STATEMENT UNDER ORDINANCE NO. 010-1990

MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA _________________________________________________________________________ " ________________________________________________________________________ "

(Company) "... warrants that it has not employed, retained or otherwise had act on its behalf any former County officer or employee subject to the prohibition of Section 2 of Ordinance No. 010-1990 or any County officer or employee in violation of Section 3 of Ordinance No. 010-1990. For breach or violation of this provision the County may, in its discretion, terminate this contract without liability and may also, in its discretion, deduct from the contract or purchase price, or otherwise recover, the full amount of any fee, commission, percentage, gift, or consideration paid to the former County officer or employee". ______________________________ ______________ (Signature) (Date) STATE OF ____________________________ COUNTY OF __________________________ PERSONALLY APPEARED BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, __________________________ who, after first being sworn by me, affixed his/her Signature ____________________________ in the space provided (Name of individual signing) Above on this ________ day of __________________, 20 ______.

_______________________________ NOTARY PUBLIC My commission expires:

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 BID PROPOSAL 00110-9

DRUG-FREE WORKPLACE FORM

____________________________________________________________________________ The undersigned Contractor in accordance with Fl. Statute 287.087 hereby certifies that:

_______________________________________________________________________ (Name of Business)

1. Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing,

possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition.

2. Inform such employees about the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of

maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations.

3. Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a

copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). 4. In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on

the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employees will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of Chapter 893 (Florida Statutes) or of any controlled substance law of the United States or any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction.

5. Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or

rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, or any employee who is so convicted.

6. Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this

section. As a person authorized to sign the statement, I certify that this firm complies fully with the above requirements. ____________________________ Bidder's Signature ____________________________ Date

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 BID PROPOSAL 00110-10

SECTION 00110 Bid Bond

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we

(Here insert full name and address or legal title of Contractor)

as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and

(Here insert full name and address or legal title of Surety)

a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto

(Here insert full name and address or legal title of Owner)

as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of Dollars ($ ), for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for

(Here insert full name. address and description of project)

NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall-enter a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this day of , 20 . (Witness) (Principal) (Seal) (Title) (Witness) (Surety) (Seal) (Title)

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 BID PROPOSAL 00110-11

Bidder’s Insurance Statement

The Insurance requirements are set forth in Section 00900 of the project manual as follows: Insurance Requirement Limits Worker’s Compensation Statutory Limits Employer’s Liability WC3 $1,000,000/$1,000,000/$1,000,000 WCUSLH Same as Employers Liability WCJA Same as Employers Liability General Liability GL4 $5,000,000 Combined Single Limit GLXCU *Required Endorsement Underground, Explosion and Collapse (XCU) Vehicle Liability VL3 $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit

I understand the insurance that will be mandatory if awarded the contract and will comply in full with all these requirements.

All insurers shall have an A.M. Best rating of VI or better and shall be licensed to do business in the state of Florida.

_______________________________ ___________________________________________ Name of Business Signature Date

LOCAL PREFERENCE FORM

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 BID PROPOSAL 00110-12

A. Vendors claiming a local preference according to Ordinance 023-2009 must complete this form. Name of Bidder/Responder______________________________ Date:_______________ 1. Does the vendor have a valid receipt for the business tax paid to the Monroe County Tax Collector dated at least one year prior to the notice or request for bid or proposal? __________ (Please furnish copy. ) 2. Does the vendor have a physical business address located within Monroe County from which the vendor operates or performs business on a day to day basis that is a substantial component of the goods or services being offered to Monroe County?_______________ List Address: ____________________________________________________________ Telephone Number:_______________________________________________________ B. Does the vendor/prime contractor intend to subcontract 50% or more of the goods, services or construction to local businesses meeting the criteria above as to licensing and location? ____________ If yes, please provide: 1. Copy of Receipt of the business tax paid to the Monroe County Tax Collector by the subcontractor dated at least one year prior to the notice or request for bid or proposal. 2. Subcontractor Address within Monroe County from which the subcontractor operates: __________________________________________ Tel. Number _____________________ _________________________________________ Print Name:______________________ Signature and Title of Authorized Signatory for Bidder/Responder STATE OF ____________________ COUNTY OF ___________________ On this _____ day of ______, 20_____, before me, the undersigned notary public, personally appeared __________________________, known to me to be the person whose name is subscribed above or who produced ______________________as identification, and acknowledged that he/she is the person who executed the above Local Preference Form for the purposes therein contained. _______________________________________ Notary Public _______________________________________ Print Name My commission expires:_________________ Seal

~~~~~~~~~~ END OF SECTION 00110

CR905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 PRE-BID SUBSTITUTIONS 00163-1

SECTION 00163

PRE-BID SUBSTITUTIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DOCUMENT INCLUDES: Pre-Bid Substitutions 1.2 BIDDER'S OPTIONS

A. For products specified only by reference standard, select product meeting that standard, by any

manufacturer. B. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, select one of products

and manufacturers named which complies with the Technical Specifications. C. For Products specified by naming several products or manufacturers and stating "or

equivalent", "or equal", or "or Architect/Engineer approved equivalent", or similar wording, submit a request as for substitutions, for any product or manufacturer which is not specifically named for review and approval by the Director of Engineering Services.

D. For products specified by naming only one product / manufacturer, there is no option and no

substitution will be allowed. 1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Base Bid shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1. Substitutions for products may be made during the bidding by submitting completed substitution request form and substantiating product data/literature a minimum of ten calendar days prior to the Bid Date to the Director of Engineering Services.

2. The Director of Engineering Services will consider requests utilizing this section from

the Bidder for substitution of products in place of those specified. 3. Those submitted 10 calendar days prior to Bid Date shall be included in an addendum

if acceptable. 4. Substitution requests may be submitted utilizing a facsimile machine (FAX) if

substitution request forms and substantiating data are submitted.

B. Submit separate request for each substitution. Support each request with:

1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents: a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address. b. Manufacturer's literature, identifying:

1. Product description.

CR905 Bike Lanes


2. Reference standards. 3. Performance and test data.

c. Samples, as applicable. d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used and

date of each installation.

2. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified, listing significant variations.

3. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 4. All effects of substitution on separate contracts. 5. List of changes required in other work or products. 6. Designation of required license fees or royalties. 7. Designation of availability of maintenance services, sources of replacement materials.

C. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when:

1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents. 2. In the judgment of the Owner or Director of Engineering Services, the substitution

does not include adequate information necessary for a complete evaluation.

D. The Director of Engineering Services will determine the acceptability of any proposed substitution.

1.4 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATION

A. In making formal request for substitution the Bidder represents that:

1. He has investigated proposed product and has determined that it is equivalent to, or superior in all respects to that specified.

2. He will provide same warranties or bonds for substitution as for product specified. 3. He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into the Work, and will make

such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. 4. He waives claims for additional costs caused by substitution which may subsequently

become apparent. 5. Cost data is complete and includes related costs under his Contract, but not:

a. Costs under separate contracts. b. Director of Engineering Services’ costs for redesign or revision of Contract

Documents.

CR905 Bike Lanes


6. Cost data need not be submitted, if request is for inclusion in an addendum. 1.5 DIRECTOR OF ENGINEERING SERVICES'S DUTIES

A. Review requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness. B. Issue an addendum to identify accepted substitutions. C. Substitution requests that are not approved will be returned to the party submitting the request.

1.6 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

A. The form is attached to this Section. B. Substitutions will be considered only when the attached form is completed and included with

the submittal with all required back-up data.

CR905 Bike Lanes


SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM TO: Director of Engineering Services Monroe County Engineering Department 1100 Simonton Street Key West, Florida 33040 Ph: (305) 294-3429 FAX: (305) 295-4321 We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above project: DRAWING NO. DRAWING NAME SPEC. SEC. ________________ ________________ _______________ SPEC. NAME PARAGRAPH SPECIFIED ITEM ________________ ________________ _______________ Proposed Substitution: Attach complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. Submit with request necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality and performance to that which is specified. Clearly mark manufacturer's literature to indicate equality in performance. The undersigned certifies that the function, appearance and quality are of equal performance and assumes liability for equal performance, equal design and compatibility with adjacent materials. Submitted By: Signature Title Firm Address City / State / Zip Code Telephone Date Signature shall be by person having authority to legally bind his firm to the above terms. Failure to provide legally binding signature will result in retraction of approval. For use by the Engineer: ____Approved ____Apvd as noted ____Not Apvd ____Rec'd too late ____ insufficient data received

By

Date

CR905 Bike Lanes


Fill in Blanks Below: A. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings? Yes ____ No ____ if yes, clearly indicate changes: B. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs

caused by the requested substitution? Yes ____ No ____ if no, fully explain: C. What effect does substitution have on other Contracts or other trades? D. What effect does substitution have on construction schedule? E. Manufacturer's warranties of the proposed and specified items are: ____ Same ____ Different. Explain: F. Reason for Request: G. Itemized comparison of specified item(s) with the proposed substitution; list significant variations: H. Designation of maintenance services and sources: (Attach additional sheets if required).

~~~~~~~~~~ END OF SECTION 00163

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 SCOPE OF WORK 00300-1

SECTION 00300

SCOPE OF WORK 1.0 GENERAL SCOPE 1.1 The Scope of Work shall include, but not be limited to, all work shown and listed in the Project

Drawings and Project Manual. The Contractor is required to provide a complete job as contemplated by the drawings and specifications, which are a part of this bid package.

1.2 The Scope of Work consists of constructing 8 foot shoulders with 5 foot bike lanes on each side

of CR 905 from Garden Cove Drive to Card Sound Road and then constructing 6 foot shoulders with 4 foot bike lanes from Card Sound Road to Club House Road in Key Largo. The Alternative scope of work limits the work zone from Garden Cove Drive to Card Sound Road. The work includes excavation, removal of existing concrete pavement, utilities adjustments, gutter installation, guardrail removal and installation, roadway signage, fence installation, roadway striping and other related construction as shown on the Drawings and included in the Technical Specifications.

1.3 Provide all labor, supervision, materials, supplies, equipment, tools, construction equipment,

transportation, proper execution and completion of all Work as specified on the Drawings and referenced Technical Specifications included in this Bid Package.

~~~~~~~~~~ END OF SECTION 00300

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 MILESTONE SCHEDULE 00350-1

SECTION 00350

MILESTONE SCHEDULE This section contains the project milestone schedule. The Contractor is required to study the applicable parts, or milestones, in order to determine his proposed scheduling for the project. The Contractor is to note the following special items.

a. Bid due Date .....................................……November 21, 2013 b. Award Date (Anticipated) .................……January 15, 2014 c. Pre-Con Meeting (Anticipated)…………..January 27, 2014 d. Construction Start (Anticipated) ........…….January 31, 2014

e. Final Completion (Anticipated)………………..October 31, 2014 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Conditions under Which Liquidated Damages are Imposed—the time or times stipulated in the contract for completion of the work of the contract or of specified phases of the contract shall be the calendar date or dates listed in the milestone schedule. Liquidated damages will be based on the Substantial Completion Date for all work, modified by all approved extensions in time as set forth by the Construction Manager’s signature of approval on the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The liquidated damages table below shall be utilized to determine the amount of liquidated damages. FIRST SECOND 31ST DAY & CONTRACT AMOUNT 15 DAYS 15 DAYS THEREAFTER Under 50,000.00 $50.00/Day $100.00/Day $250.00/Day $50,000.00-99,999.00 100.00/Day 200.00/Day 750.00/Day $100,000.00-499,999.00 200.00/Day 500.00/Day 2,000.00/Day $500,000.00 and Up 500.00/Day 1,000.00/Day 3,500.00/Day The Contractor’s recovery of damages and sole remedy for any delay caused by the Owner shall be an extension of time on the Contract.

~~~~~~~~~~ END OF SECTION 00350

Contract Documents

Section 00500 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR(9_2011) 00500- 1

Section 00500

Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor

Where the basis of payment is a STIPULATED SUM

AGREEMENT Made as of the th day of in the year of Two Thousand and Thirteen. BETWEEN the Owner: Monroe County Board of County Commissioners (“BOCC”) 1100 Simonton Street

Key West, Florida 33040 (“Owner”)

And the Contractor:

(“Contractor”) For the following Project: CR 905 Bike Lanes Key Largo

Monroe County, Florida (“Project”) Oversight for Owner: Monroe County Engineering Services Department 1100 Simonton Street, Rm 216 Key West, Florida 33040 Engineer: EAC Consulting, Inc. 815 NW 57th Avenue, Suite 402 Miami, Florida 33126 The Owner and Contractor agree as set forth below.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


ARTICLE 1

The Contract Documents

The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Insurance Requirements and Documents, Milestone Schedule, Bid Documents and Contractor’s Bid, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement. These form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral.

ARTICLE 2

The Work of this Contract

The Contractor shall execute the entire Work described in the Contract Documents, except to the extent specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others, or as follows: Scope of Work is as specified in the Contract Documents, and shown on the Drawings and in the specifications. The contract constitutes the entire and exclusive agreement between the Owner and the Contractor with reference to the CR 905 Bike Lanes Project.

ARTICLE 3

Date of Commencement and Substantial Completion 3.1 The date of commencement is the date from which the Contract Time of Paragraph 3.2 is measured, and shall be the date of this Agreement, as first written above, unless a different date is stated below or provision is made for the date to be fixed in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner as stated in Section 00350, milestone schedule. Unless the date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed issued by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the Owner, in writing not less than five days before commencing the Work. The date of commencement shall be the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued to the Contractor. 3.2 The Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work not later than 280 Days after the Date of Commencement, subject to adjustments of the Contract Time as provided by the Contract Document. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Liquidated damages will be based on the Substantial Completion Date for all work, modified by all approved extension in time as set forth by the Owner’s signature of approval on the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The liquidated damages table below shall be utilized to determine the amount of liquidated damages.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


FIRST SECOND 31st DAY & CONTRACT AMOUNT 15 DAYS 15 DAYS THEREAFTER Under 50,000.00 $50.00/DAY $100.00/DAY $250.00/DAY $50,000.00-$99,999.00 100.00/DAY 200.00/DAY 750.00/DAY $100,000.00-499,999.00 200.00/DAY 500.00/DAY 2,000.00/DAY $500,000.0 and Up 500.00/DAY 1,000.00/DAY 3,500.00/DAY The Contractor’s recovery of damages and sole remedy for any delay caused by the Owner shall be an extension of time on the Contract.

Balance of Page Intentionally Left Blank

CR 905 Bike Lanes


ARTICLE 4

Contract Sum

4.1 The owner shall pay the Contractor in current funds for the Contractor’s performance of the Contract, for CR 905 Bike Lanes Project the Contract Sum of DOLLARS, ($.00), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 The Contract Sum is based upon the following alternates, if any, which are described in

the Contract Documents and are hereby accepted by the Owner: None 4.3 Unit prices, if any, are as follows: As specified in Section 00110.

ARTICLE 5

Progress Payments

5.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted by the Contractor to the Owner, and upon Project Applications and Certificates for Payment, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 5.2 The period covered by each Application for payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month. 5.3 County shall pay pursuant to the Local Government Prompt Payment Act 218.70. 5.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based upon the Schedule of Values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Schedule of Values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work and be prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Owner may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Owner, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. 5.5 Applications for Payment shall indicate the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. 5.6 Subject to the provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: 5.6.1 Take that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work as determined by multiplying the percentage completion of each portion of the Work by the share of the total Contract Sum allocated to that portion of the Work in the Schedule of Values, less retainage of Ten percent (10%). Pending final determination of cost to the Owner of changes in the Work, amounts not in dispute may be included in applications for Payment. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Owner. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change the

CR 905 Bike Lanes


allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change. 5.6.2 Add that portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction (or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing), less retainage of Ten percent (10%): 5.6.3 Subtract the aggregate of previous payments made by the Owner; and 5.6.4 Subtract amounts, if any, for which the Owner has withheld or nullified a Certificate for Payment as provided in Paragraph 9.5 of the General conditions. 5.7 The progress payment amount determined in accordance with Paragraph 5.6 shall be further modified under the following circumstances: 5.7.1 Add, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, a sum sufficient to increase the total payments to Ninety percent (90%) of the Contract Sum, less such amounts as the Owner recommends and determines for incomplete Work and unsettled claims; and 5.7.2 Add, if final completion of the Work is thereafter materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, any additional amounts payable in accordance with Subparagraph 9.10.3 of the General Conditions. 5.8 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows: None

ARTICLE 6

Final Payment

Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when (1) the Contract has been fully performed by the Contractor except for the Contractor’s responsibility to correct nonconforming Work as provided in Subparagraph 12.2.2 of the General Conditions and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which necessarily survive final payment: and (2) a final Project Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Project Manager: such final payment shall be made by the Owner not more than 20 days after the issuance of the final Project Certificate for Payment.

ARTICLE 7

Miscellaneous Provisions 7.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of the General Conditions or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. 7.2 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest pursuant to the Local Government Prompt Payment Act 218.735

CR 905 Bike Lanes


7.3 Temporary facilities and services:

None. 7.4 Monroe County’s performance and obligation to pay under this contract is contingent upon an annual appropriation by the Board of County Commissioners. 7.5 Public Entities Crimes By signing this Agreement, Contractor represents that the execution of this Agreement will not violate the Public Entities Crime Act (Section 287.133, Florida Statutes). Violation of this section shall result in termination of this Agreement and recovery of all monies paid hereto, and may result in debarment from County’s competitive procurement activities.

In addition to the foregoing, Contractor further represents that there has been no determination, based on an audit, that it or any subcontractor has committed an act defined by Section 287.133, Florida Statutes, as a “public entity crime” and that it has not been formally charged with committing an act defined as a “public entity crime” regardless of the amount of money involved or whether Contractor has been placed on the convicted vendor list.

Contractor will promptly notify the County if it or any subcontractor is formally charged

with an act defined as a “public entity crime” or has been placed on the convicted vendor list. A person or affiliate who has been placed on the convicted vendor list following a conviction for public entity crime may not submit a bid on a contract to provide any goods or services to a public entity, may not submit a bid on a contract with a public entity for the construction or repair of a public building or public work, may not submit bids on leases of real property to public entity, may not be awarded or perform work as contractor, supplier, subcontractor, or consultant under a contract with any public entity, and may not transact business with any public entity in excess of the threshold amount provided in Section 287.017, for CATEGORY TWO for a period of 36 months from the date of being placed on the convicted vendor list. 7.6 The following items are part of this contract:

a) Maintenance of Records: Contractor shall maintain all books, records, and documents directly pertinent to performance under this Agreement in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles consistently applied. Each party to this Agreement or their authorized representatives, or the Federal Emergency Management Agency or its designee, shall have reasonable and timely access to such records of each other party to this Agreement for public records purposes during the term of the Agreement and for four years following the termination of this Agreement. If an auditor employed by the County or Clerk determines that monies paid to Contractor pursuant to this Agreement were spent for purposes not authorized by this Agreement, the Contractor shall repay the monies together with interest calculated pursuant to Sec. 55.03; FS, running from the date the monies were paid to Contractor.

b) Governing Law, Venue, Interpretation, Costs, and Fees: This Agreement shall

be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of Florida applicable to contracts made and to be performed entirely in the State.

In the event that any cause of action or administrative proceeding is instituted for

the enforcement or interpretation of this Agreement, the County and Contractor agree that venue

CR 905 Bike Lanes


shall lie in the appropriate court or before the appropriate administrative body in Monroe County, Florida. This Agreement shall not be subject to arbitration.

c) Severability: If any term, covenant, condition or provision of this Agreement (or the application thereof to any circumstance or person) shall be declared invalid or unenforceable to any extent by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remaining terms, covenants, conditions and provisions of this Agreement, shall not be affected thereby; and each remaining term, covenant, condition and provision of this Agreement shall be valid and shall be enforceable to the fullest extent permitted by law unless the enforcement of the remaining terms, covenants, conditions and provisions of this Agreement would prevent the accomplishment of the original intent of this Agreement. The County and Contractor agree to reform the Agreement to replace any stricken provision with a valid provision that comes as close as possible to the intent of the stricken provision.

d) Attorney’s Fees and Costs: The County and Contractor agree that in the event

any cause of action or administrative proceeding is initiated or defended by any party relative to the enforcement or interpretation of this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to reasonable attorney’s fees and court costs, as an award against the non-prevailing party, and shall include attorney’s fees and courts costs in appellate proceedings. Mediation proceedings initiated and conducted pursuant to this Agreement shall be in accordance with the Florida Rules of Civil Procedure and usual and customary procedures required by the circuit court of Monroe County.

e) Binding Effect: The terms, covenants, conditions, and provisions of this

Agreement shall bind and inure to the benefit of the County and Contractor and their respective legal representatives, successors, and assigns.

f) Authority: Each party represents and warrants to the other that the execution,

delivery and performance of this Agreement have been duly authorized by all necessary County and corporate action, as required by law.

g) Claims for Federal or State Aid: Contractor and County agree that each shall

be, and is, empowered to apply for, seek, and obtain federal and state funds to further the purpose of this Agreement; provided that all applications, requests, grant proposals, and funding solicitations shall be approved by each party prior to submission.

h) Nondiscrimination: County and Contractor agree that there will be no

discrimination against any person, and it is expressly understood that upon a determination by a court of competent jurisdiction that discrimination has occurred, this Agreement automatically terminates without any further action on the part of any party, effective the date of the court order. County or Contractor agree to comply with all Federal and Florida statutes, and all local ordinances, as applicable, relating to nondiscrimination. These include but are not limited to: 1) Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 (PL 88-352) which prohibits discrimination on the basis of race, color or national origin; 2) Title IX of the Education Amendment of 1972, as amended (20 USC ss.1681-1683, and 1685-1686), which prohibits discrimination on the basis of sex; 3) Section 504 of the Rehabilitation Act of 1973, as amended (20 USC s. 794), which prohibits discrimination on the basis of handicaps; 4) The Age Discrimination Act of 1975, as amended (42 USC ss. 6101-6107) which prohibits discrimination on the basis of age; 5) The Drug Abuse Office and Treatment Act of 1972 (PL 92-255), as amended, relating to nondiscrimination on the basis of drug abuse; 6) The Comprehensive Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism Prevention,

CR 905 Bike Lanes


Treatment and Rehabilitation Act of 1970 (PL 91-616), as amended, relating to nondiscrimination on the basis of alcohol abuse or alcoholism; 7) The Public Health Service Act of 1912, ss. 523 and 527 (42 USC ss. 690dd-3 and 290ee-3), as amended, relating to confidentiality of alcohol and drug abuse patent records; 8) Title VIII of the Civil Rights Act of 1968 (42 USC s. et seq.), as amended, relating to nondiscrimination in the sale, rental or financing of housing; 9) The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (42 USC s. 1201 Note), as maybe amended from time to time, relating to nondiscrimination on the basis of disability; 10) Monroe County Code Chapter 13, Article VI, which prohibits discrimination on the basis of race, color, sex, religion, national origin, ancestry, sexual orientation, gender identity or expression, familial status or age; 11) Any other nondiscrimination provisions in any Federal or state statutes which may apply to the parties to, or the subject matter of, this Agreement.

i) Covenant of No Interest: County and Contractor covenant that neither presently has any interest, and shall not acquire any interest, which would conflict in any manner or degree with its performance under this Agreement, and that only interest of each is to perform and receive benefits as recited in this Agreement.

j) Code of Ethics: County agrees that officers and employees of the County recognize and will be required to comply with the standards of conduct for public officers and employees as delineated in Section 112.313, Florida Statutes, regarding, but not limited to, solicitation or acceptance of gifts; doing business with one’s agency; unauthorized compensation; misuse of public position, conflicting employment or contractual relationship; and disclosure or use of certain information. k) No Solicitation/Payment: The County and Contractor warrant that, in respect to itself, it has neither employed nor retained any company or person, other than a bona fide employee working solely for it, to solicit or secure this Agreement and that it has not paid or agreed to pay any person, company, corporation, individual, or firm, other than a bona fide employee working solely for it, any fee, commission, percentage, gift, or other consideration contingent upon or resulting from the award or making of this Agreement. For the breach or violation of the provision, the Contractor agrees that the County shall have the right to terminate this Agreement without liability and, at its discretion, to offset from monies owed, or otherwise recover, the full amount of such fee, commission, percentage, gift, or consideration.

l) Public Access: The County and Contractor shall allow and permit reasonable access to, and inspection of, all documents, papers, letters or other materials in its possession or under its control subject to the provisions of Chapter 119, Florida Statutes, and made or received by the County and Contractor in conjunction with this Agreement; and the County shall have the right to unilaterally cancel this Agreement upon violation of this provision by Contractor. m) Non-Waiver of Immunity: Notwithstanding the provisions of Sec. 768.28, Florida Statutes, the participation of the County and the Contractor in this Agreement and the acquisition of any commercial liability insurance coverage, self-insurance coverage, or local government liability insurance pool coverage shall not be deemed a waiver of immunity to the extent of liability coverage, nor shall any contract entered into by the County be required to contain any provision for waiver. n) Privileges and Immunities: All of the privileges and immunities from liability, exemptions from laws, ordinances, and rules, pensions and relief, disability, workers’ compensation, and other benefits which apply to the activity of officers, agents, or employees of

CR 905 Bike Lanes


any public agents or employees of the County, when performing their respective functions under this Agreement within the territorial limits of the County shall apply to the same degree and extent to the performance of such functions and duties of such officers, agents, volunteers, or employees outside the territorial limits of the County. o) Legal Obligations and Responsibilities: Non-Delegation of Constitutional or Statutory Duties. This Agreement is not intended to, nor shall it be construed as, relieving any participating entity from any obligation or responsibility imposed upon the entity by law except to the extent of actual and timely performance thereof by any participating entity, in which case the performance may be offered in satisfaction of the obligation or responsibility. Further, this Agreement is not intended to, nor shall it be construed as, authorizing the delegation of the constitutional or statutory duties of the County, except to the extent permitted by the Florida constitution, state statute, and case law. p) Non-Reliance by Non-Parties: No person or entity shall be entitled to rely upon the terms, or any of them, of this Agreement to enforce or attempt to enforce any third-party claim or entitlement to or benefit of any service or program contemplated hereunder, and the County and the Contractor agree that neither the County nor the Contractor or any agent, officer, or employee of either shall have the authority to inform, counsel, or otherwise indicate that any particular individual or group of individuals, entity or entities, have entitlements or benefits under this Agreement separate and apart, inferior to, or superior to the community in general or for the purposes contemplated in this Agreement.

q) Attestations: Contractor agrees to execute such documents as the County may reasonably require, including a Public Entity Crime Statement, an Ethics Statement, and a Drug-Free Workplace Statement.

r) No Personal Liability: No covenant or agreement contained herein shall be

deemed to be a covenant or agreement of any member, officer, agent or employee of Monroe County in his or her individual capacity, and no member, officer, agent or employee of Monroe County shall be liable personally on this Agreement or be subject to any personal liability or accountability by reason of the execution of this Agreement.

s) Execution in Counterparts: This Agreement may be executed in any number of

counterparts, each of which shall be regarded as an original, all of which taken together shall constitute one and the same instrument and any of the parties hereto may execute this Agreement by signing any such counterpart.

t) Section Headings: Section headings have been inserted in this Agreement as a

matter of convenience of reference only, and it is agreed that such section headings are not a part of this Agreement and will not be used in the interpretation of any provision of this Agreement.

u) Special Conditions, if any are detailed in Section 01000 of the Project Manual for this Project. v) Hold Harmless and Indemnification: Notwithstanding any minimum insurance requirements prescribed elsewhere in this agreement, the Contractor covenants and agrees that he shall defend, indemnify and hold the COUNTY and the COUNTY’s elected and appointed officers and employees harmless from and against (i) claims, actions or causes of action, (ii) litigation, administrative proceedings, appellate proceedings, or other proceedings relating to any

CR 905 Bike Lanes


type of injury (including death), loss, damage, fine, penalty or business interruption, and (iii) costs or expenses that may be asserted against, initiated with respect to, or sustained by the County and the COUNTY’s elected and appointed officers and employees from liabilities damages, losses and costs, including but not limited to, reasonable attorney’s fees, to the extent caused by the negligence, recklessness, or intentional wrongful misconduct of the Contractor and persons employed or utilized by the indemnifying party in the performance of the construction contract. The monetary limitation of liability under this contract shall be not less than $1 million per occurrence pursuant to F. S. 725.06. Insofar as the claims, actions, causes of action, litigation, proceedings, costs or expenses relate to events or circumstances that occur during the term of this Agreement, this section will survive the expiration of the term of this Agreement or any earlier termination of this Agreement.

In the event the completion of the project (including the work of others) is delayed or suspended as a result of the Contractor’s failure to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the Contractor shall indemnify the County from any and all increased expenses resulting from such delay. The first ten dollars ($10.00) of remuneration paid to the Contractor is for the indemnification provided for above. The extent of liability is in no way limited to, reduced, or lessened by the insurance requirements contained elsewhere within this agreement.

w) Adjudication of Disputes or Disagreements: The Owner and Contractor agree that all disputes and disagreement shall be attempted to be resolved by meet and confer sessions between representatives of each of the parties. If no resolution can be agreed upon within 30 days after the first meet and confer session, the issue or issues shall be discussed at public meeting of the Board of County Commissioners. If the issue or issues are still not resolved to the satisfaction of the parties, then any party shall have the right to seek such relief or remedy as may be provided by this Agreement or by Florida law. This provision does not negate or waive the provisions of Paragraph X concerning cancellation. x) Cancellation: In the event that the Contractor shall be found to be negligent in any aspect of installation, stocking, maintenance, repair, or service, the County shall have the right to terminate this agreement after five days written notification to the Contractor.

y) Cooperation: In the event any administrative or legal proceeding is instituted against either party relating to the formation, execution, performance, or breach of this Agreement, County and Contractor agree to participate, to the extent required by the other party, in all proceedings, hearings, processes, meetings, and other activities related to the substance of this Agreement or provision of the services under this Agreement. County and Contractor specifically agree that no party to this Agreement shall be required to enter into any arbitration proceedings related to this Agreement. 7.7 Ownership of the Project Documents: The documents prepared by the Contractor for this Project belong to the County and may be reproduced and copied without acknowledgement or permission of the Contractor. 7.8 Successors and Assigns: The Contractor shall not assign or subcontract its obligations under this agreement, except in writing and with the prior written approval of the Board of

CR 905 Bike Lanes


County Commissioners for Monroe County, which approval shall be subject to such conditions and provisions as the Board may deem necessary. This paragraph shall be incorporated by reference into any assignment or subcontract and any assignee or subcontractor shall comply with all of the provisions of this Agreement. Subject to the provisions of the immediately preceding sentence, each party hereto binds itself, its successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other and to the successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party. 7.9 No third Party Beneficiaries: Nothing contained herein shall create any relationship, contractual or otherwise, with or any rights in favor of, any third party. 7.10 Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA) - The CONTRACTOR will comply with all the requirements as imposed by the ADA, the regulations of the Federal government issued thereunder, and the assurance by the CONTRACTOR pursuant thereto. 7.11 Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) Policy and Obligation - It is the policy of the COUNTY that DBE’s, as defined in 49 C.F.R. Part 26, as amended, shall have the opportunity to participate in the performance of contracts financed in whole or in part with COUNTY funds under this Agreement. The DBE requirements of applicable federal and state laws and regulations apply to this Agreement. The COUNTY and its CONTRACTOR agree to ensure that DBE’s have the opportunity to participate in the performance of this Agreement. In this regard, all recipients and contractors shall take all necessary and reasonable steps in accordance with applicable federal and state laws and regulations to ensure that the DBE’s have the opportunity to compete for and perform contracts. The COUNTY and the CONTRACTOR and subcontractors shall not discriminate on the basis of race, color, national origin or sex in the award and performance of contracts, entered pursuant to this Agreement.

ARTICLE 8

Termination or Suspension

8.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions. 8.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of the General Conditions.

Article 9

Enumeration of Contract Documents

9.1 The Contract Documents, except for Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, are enumerated as follows: See Article 1 9.1.1 The Agreement is this executed Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor. 9.1.2 The General Conditions are the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


9.1.3 The Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract are those contained in the Project Manual dated September, 2013 and are as follows:

As listed in Table of Contents, Section 00001 of the Project Manual for this project.

9.1.4 The Specifications are those contained in the Project Manual dated as in Subparagraph

9.1.3, and are as follows:

As listed in Table of Contents, Section 00001 of the Project Manual for this project. 9.1.5 The Drawings are as follows, and are dated on each individual drawing unless a different

date is shown below: Contract Plans dated 4/29/13 Sheets G12 and G13 dated 8/6/13 9.1.6 The Addenda, if any, are as follows: Portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding requirements are also enumerated in this Article 9. 9.1.7 Other documents, if any, forming part of the contract Documents are as follows: Monroe County Bid Form in Section 00110. See Article 1.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF the parties hereto have executed this Agreement on the day and date first written above in four (4) counterparts, each of which shall, without proof or accounting for the other counterparts, be deemed an original contract. (SEAL) BOARD OF COUNTY COMMISSIONERS Attest: AMY HEAVILIN, Clerk OF MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA By: By Deputy Clerk Mayor Date (SEAL) CONTRACTOR Attest: By: By: __________________________ Title: ___________________________ Title: __________________________

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ END OF SECTION 00500

Conditions of the Contract

Section 00750 General Conditions Section 00850 Public Construction Bond Section 00900 General Insurance Requirements for Contractors

and Subcontractors Section 01000 Special Conditions

Attachment A: Geotechnical Report Attachment B: USACOE Permit SAJ-2012- 03326(NPR-IF) SFWMD No Notice General Permit USFWS Coordination Letter

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 00750-1

Section 00750

General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

Table of Articles

1. General Provisions 8. Time 2. Owner 9. Payments and Completion 3. Contractor 10. Protection of Persons and Property 4. Administration of the Contract 11. Insurance and Bonds 5. Subcontractors 12. Uncovering and Correction of Work 6. Construction by Owner or By Other 13. Miscellaneous Provisions Contractors 7. Changes in the Work 14. Termination or Suspension of the Contract

CR 905 Bike Lanes


General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.1 Basic Definitions 1.1.1 The Contract Documents: The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work. 1.1.2 The Contract: The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind between any persons or entities other the Owner and Contractor. 1.1.3 The Work: The term “Work” means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 1.1.4 The Project: The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by other Contractors and by the Owner’s own forces including persons or entities under separate contracts not administered by the Owner. 1.1.5 The Drawings: The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents, wherever located and whenever issued, showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams. 1.1.6 The Specifications: The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. 1.1.7 The Project Manual: The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work, which may include the bidding requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. 1.2 Execution, Correlation and Intent 1.2.2 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a presentation that the Contractor has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2.3 The intent of the Contract Document is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the intended results. 1.2.4 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. 1.2.5 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. 1.2.6 Where on any of the drawings, a portion of the Work is drawn out and the remainder is indicated in outline, the parts drawn out shall also apply to all other like portions of the Work.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


1.3 Ownership and Use of Owner’s Drawings, Specifications and Other Documents 1.3.1 The Drawing, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Owner are instruments of the Owner’s service through which the Work to be executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one contract record set. Neither the Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Owner, and unless otherwise indicated the Owner shall be deemed the author of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. All copies of them, except the Contractor’s record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Owner, on request, upon completion of the Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Owner, and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor, are for use solely with respect to the Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Owner appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this license shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Owner. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Owner’s copyright or other reserved rights. 1.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, three copies of Drawings and Specifications for the execution of the Work, additional copies will be made available at $100.00 a set. 1.4 Capitalization 1.4.1 Terms capitalization in these General Conditions include those which are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles and identified references to Paragraphs, Subparagraphs and Clauses in the document or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Owners. 1.5 Interpretation 1.5.1 In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as “all” and “any” and articles such as “the” and “an,” but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.

ARTICLE 2 OWNER

2.1 Definition 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term “Owner” means Monroe County and its authorized representative employed by the County. 2.2 Information and Services Required of the Owner 2.2.2 The owner shall furnish available surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations

for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site as needed. 2.2.3 Except for permits and fees, which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. 2.2.4 Information or services under the Owner’s control shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in orderly progress of the Work. 2.2.5 Not Used. 2.2.6 The Owner shall forward all communications to the Contractor through the Owners Representative. In absence of the Owners Representative the Contractor shall communicate with the Owner

CR 905 Bike Lanes


2.2.7 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and responsibilities of the Owner enumerated herein and especially those in respect to Article 6 (Construction by Owner or by Other Contractors), Article 9 (Payments and Completion) and Article 11 (Insurance and Bonds). 2.3 Owner’s Right to Stop the Work 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner, by written order signed personally or by an agent specifically so empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity. 2.4 Owner’s Right to Carry out the Work 2.4.1 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a three-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may after such three-day period give the Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a three-day period. If the Contractor within such second three-day period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for the Project Manager’s and the Owner and their respective consultants’ additional services and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect or failure.

ARTICLE 3

CONTRACTOR

3.1 Definition 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout this Agreement as if singular in number. The term “Contractor” means the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative. 3.1.2 The plural term “Contractors” refers to persons or entities that perform construction under Conditions of the Contract that are administered by the Owner, and that are identical or substantially similar to these Conditions. 3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor 3.2.1 The Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.2 and shall at once report to the Owner errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner, for damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission and knowingly failed to report it to the Owner. If the Contractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Owners Representative and Owner, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such performance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable costs for correction. 3.2.2 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefully compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported to the Project Manager and Owner at once. 3.2.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and submittals approved pursuant to Paragraph 3.12. 3.2.4 The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is called for by any, shall be as binding as if called for by all.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


3.2.5 In case of conflict between the drawings and specifications, the specifications shall take precedence over the drawings. The captions or subtitles of the several Articles and Divisions of these Contract Documents constitute no part of the context hereof, but are only labels to assist in locating and reading the provisions hereof. 3.2.6 Full size details shall take precedence over scale drawings and large-scaled drawings shall take precedence over small-scale drawings. Dimensions given in figures shall take precedence over scaled dimensions. 3.2.7 When measurements are affected by conditions already established or where items are to be fitted into constructed conditions, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify all such dimensions at the site and the actual job dimensions shall take precedence over scale and figure dimensions on the drawings. 3.2.8 Wherever a stock size of manufactured item or piece of equipment is specified by its nominal size, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the actual space requirements for setting and for entrance to the setting space to make all necessary allowances and adjustments there for in his work without additional cost to Owner. 3.2.9 Standard specifications or other specifications of the organizations, societies or bodies referred to herein or to specifications listed therein, shall be to their current editions and whenever it is stated in the Specifications that materials or work shall conform to the requirements of any of these specifications, work and/or material shall also conform to any other specification referred to herein. 3.2.10 The Contractor shall test all figures on the drawings before laying out the work. 3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under this Contract, subject to overall coordination of the Owners Representative as provided in Subparagraphs 4.6.3 and 4.6.4. 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor. 3.3.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents by either activities or duties of the Owners Representative or Owner in their administration of the Contract, or by test, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor. 3.3.4 The Contractor shall inspect portions of the Project related to the Contractor’s Work in order to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent work. 3.4 Labor and Materials 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. 3.4.2 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. 3.4.3 The Contractor is responsible for the conduct of his employees at all times. Misconduct, destruction of property, unsafe practices, or violation of any Federal or State regulations including abuse of alcohol or drugs, will be cause for permanent dismissal from the project. If any Contractor employee is determined to be detrimental to the Project, as deemed by the Owners Representative, the Contractor will remove and/or replace the employee at the request of the Owners Representative. Employees dismissed from the project will be transported from the job site at the Contractor’s expense. 3.4.4 The Contractor shall be totally responsible for the security of his work, materials, equipment, supplies, tools, machinery, and construction equipment.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


3.4.5 The Contractor shall be responsible for complete, timely and accurate field measurements as necessary for proper coordination, fabrication and installation of his materials and equipment. The Contractor agrees to cooperate with the Owners Representative, if required, to accommodate any discovered variations or deviations from the Drawings and Specifications so that the progress of the Work is not adversely affected. 3.5 Warranty 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Owners Representative that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work/not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear under normal usage. If required by the Owners Representative or Owner, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. 3.6 Taxes 3.6.1 The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work or portions thereof provided by the Contractor which is legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. 3.7 Permits, Fees and Notices 3.7.1 The Contractor shall secure and pay for all permits, impact fees, governmental fees, licenses, inspections and surveys required by Federal, State, or Municipal bodies having jurisdiction over the project for the proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are legally required at the time bids are received. The Owner will not assess any County building permit or County impact fees. The Contractor will be responsible for any other building permit costs or impact fees required for this project. The Contractor shall secure and pay for all building and specialty permits including plumbing, electrical, HVAC, etc. 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. 3.7.3 It is not the Contractor’s responsibility to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations. However, if the Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Owners Representative and Owner in writing and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. 3.7.4 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Owner, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the attributable costs. 3.9 Superintendent 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the

Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. The superintendent shall be satisfactory to the Owners Representative and shall not be changed except with the consent of the Owners Representative, unless the superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor or ceases to be in his employ.

3.10 Contractor’s Construction Schedule 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner’s information and the Owners Representative’s approval a Contractor’s Construction Schedule for the Work. Such schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the

CR 905 Bike Lanes


conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project construction schedule to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. This schedule, to be submitted within seven (7) days after Contract Award, shall indicate the dates for the starting and completion of the various stages of construction, shall be revised as required by the conditions of the Work, and shall be subject to the Owners Representative’s approval. 3.10.2 The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owners Representative in scheduling and performing the Contractor’s Work to avoid conflict, delay in or interference with the Work of other Contractors or the construction or operations of the Owner’s own forces. 3.10.4 The Contractor shall conform to the most recent schedules. 3.10.5 The Owners Representative will conduct a weekly scheduling meeting, which the Contractor shall attend. At this meeting, the parties can discuss jointly such matters as progress, scheduling, and problems. 3.11 Documents and Samples at the Site 3.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record changes and selections made during construction, and in addition approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Owner and shall be delivered for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work. 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples, which illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required the way the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Owner’s Representative is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph 4.6.12. 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review, approve and submit to the Owners Representative, in accordance with the schedule and sequence approved by the Owner, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in the coordination of the Contractor’s Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals with related documents submitted by other Contractors. Submittals made by the Contractor which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned without action. 3.12.6 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Owner. Such Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. 3.12.7 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. 3.12.8 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Owners Representative’s and Owner’s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Owners Representative and Owner in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and the Owners Representative and Owner have given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Owners Representative’s and Owner’s approval thereof.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Owner on previous submittals. 3.12.10 Informational submittals upon which the Owner is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. 3.12.11 When professional certification of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and completeness of such calculations and certifications. 3.12.12 If materials specified in the Contract Documents are not available on the present market, the Contractor may submit data on substitute materials to the Owners Representative for approval by the Owner. 3.13 Use of Site 3.13.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. 3.13.2 The Contractor shall coordinate the Contractor’s operations with, and secure the approval of, the Owner before using any portion of the site. 3.14 Cutting and Patching 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly; he shall also provide protection of existing work as required. 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner’s own forces or of other Contractors by cutting, patching, excavating or otherwise altering such construction. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by other Contractors or by the Owner’s own forces except with written consent of the Owner and such other contractors: such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the other Contractors or the Owner the Contractor’s consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. When structural members are involved, the written consent of the Owner shall also be required. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or any separate contractor his consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. 3.14.3 The Contractor shall arrange for any blockouts, cutout, or opening required for the installation of his materials and equipment and the execution of his work, whether or not shown or indicated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall be further responsible for sealing and/or finishing, in an acceptable fashion and meeting any applicable code requirements, and such block-out, cutout opening, or other hole in any fire-related floor, ceiling, wall, security wall, or any other finished surface. 3.15 Cleaning Up 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the project waste materials rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. Clean up shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Project Manager may do so with the Owner’s approval and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor. 3.16 Access to Work 3.16.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner’s Representative and the Owner access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. 3.17 Royalties and Patents

CR 905 Bike Lanes


3.17.1 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and shall hold the Owner harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a patent; the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Owner. 3.18 Indemnification and Hold Harmless Notwithstanding any minimum insurance requirements prescribed elsewhere in this agreement, the Contractor covenants and agrees that he shall defend, indemnify and hold the COUNTY and the COUNTY’s elected and appointed officers and employees harmless from and against (i) claims, actions or causes of action, (ii) litigation, administrative proceedings, appellate proceedings, or other proceedings relating to any type of injury (including death), loss, damage, fine, penalty or business interruption, and (iii) costs or expenses that may be asserted against, initiated with respect to, or sustained by the County and the COUNTY’s elected and appointed officers and employees from liabilities damages, losses and costs, including but not limited to, reasonable attorney’s fees, to the extent caused by the negligence, recklessness, or intentional wrongful misconduct of the Contractor and persons employed or utilized by the indemnifying party in the performance of the construction contract. The monetary limitation of liability under this contract shall be not less than $1 million per occurrence pursuant to F. S. 725.06. Insofar as the claims, actions, causes of action, litigation, proceedings, costs or expenses relate to events or circumstances that occur during the term of this Agreement, this section will survive the expiration of the term of this Agreement or any earlier termination of this Agreement. In the event the completion of the project (including the work of others) is delayed or suspended as a result of the Contractor’s failure to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the Contractor shall indemnify the County from any and all increased expenses resulting from such delay. In the event the completion of the project (including the work of others) is delayed or suspended as a result of the Contractor’s failure to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the Contractor shall indemnify the County from any and all increased expenses resulting from such delay. The first ten dollars ($10.00) of remuneration paid to the Contractor is for the indemnification provided for above.

The extent of liability is in no way limited to, reduced, or lessened by the insurance requirements contained elsewhere within this agreement.

ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTACT

4.1 Owner 4.1.1 The Owner for the Project is Monroe County. The Contractor shall work with the Owner’s Representative for all oversight. 4.2 Owner’s Representative 4.2.1 Where the term Owner’s Representative is used, it shall mean the Monroe County Project Manager or Construction Engineering and Inspection (CEI) Consultant. 4.3 Engineer 4.3.1 The Engineer is the person lawfully licensed to practice engineering or any entity lawfully practicing engineering identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term “Engineer” means the Engineer or the Engineer’s authorized representative. 4.4 Not Used. 4.5 Not Used.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


4.6 Administration of the Contract 4.6.1 The Owners Representative will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be the Owner’s representatives (1) during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner’s concurrence, from time to time during the correction period described in Paragraph 12.2. The Owners Representative will advise and consult with the Owner and will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Document, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with other provision of the Contract. 4.6.2 The Owners Representative will determine in general that the Work is being performed in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, will keep the Owner informed of the progress of the Work, and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. 4.6.3 The Owners Representative will provide for coordination of the activities of other Contractors and of the Owner’s own forces with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other Contractors and Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the Construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, other Contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. 4.6.5 The Owner will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Owner will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check quality or quantity of the Work. On the basis of on-site observations, the Owners Representative will keep the Owner informed of progress of the Work, and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the work. 4.6.6 The Owners Representative and Owner will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for construction means, method, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor’s responsibility as provided in Paragraph 3.3, and neither will be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Neither the Owners Representative nor the Owner will have control over or charge of or be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or of any other persons performing portions of the Work. 4.6.7 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall communicate through the Owners Representative, and shall contemporaneously provide the same communications to the Owner. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with other Contractors shall be through the Owners Representative and shall be contemporaneously provided to the Owner. 4.6.8 The Owners Representative will review and certify all Applications for Payment by the Contractor, including final payment. After reviewing and certifying the amounts due the Contractors, the Owners Representative will submit the Project Application and Project Certificate for Payment, to the Owner. 4.6.9 Based on the Owner’s observations and evaluations of Contractors’ Applications for Payment, and the certifications of the Owners Representative, the Owner will review and certify the amounts due the Contractors and will issue a Project Certificate for Payment. 4.6.10 The Owner will have authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents, and to require additional inspection or testing, in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed, but will take such action only after notifying the Owners Representative. Subject to review by the Owner, the Owners Representative will have the authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Owners Representative considers it necessary or advisable for implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Owners Representative will have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 4.6.11 The Owner’s Representative will receive from the Contractor and review and approve all Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, coordinate them with information received from other Contractors, and transmit to the Owner those

CR 905 Bike Lanes


recommended for approval. The Owner’s Representative’s actions will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work of the Contractor or in the activities of other Contractors or the Owner. 4.6.12 The Owner’s Representative will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon the Contractor’s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Owner’s Representative’s action will be taken with such promptness consistent with the constraints of the project schedule so as to cause no delay in the Work of the Contractor or in the activities of the other Contractors, the Owner, or the Owners Representative, while allowing sufficient time in the Owner’s Representative’s professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Owner’s Representative’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Owner’s Representative’s review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Owner’s Representative, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Owner’s Representative’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 4.6.13 The Owners Representative will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives. 4.6.14 Following consultation with the Owners Representative, the Owner will take appropriate action on Change Orders or Construction Change Directives in accordance with Article 7 and will have authority to order minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4. 4.6.16 The Contractor will assist the Owner’s Representative in conducting inspections to determine the dates of Substantial completion and final completion, and will receive and forward to the Owner’s Representative written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor. The Owners Representative will forward to the Owner a final Project Application and Project Certificate for Payment upon compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4.6.17 If the Owner and Contractor agree, the Contractor will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Contractor’s responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. 4.6.18 The Engineer will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of the Owners Representative, Owner or Contractor. The Engineer’s response to such requests will be made with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed upon. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Engineer shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.6, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Engineer to furnish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them. 4.6.19 Interpretations and decisions of the Engineer will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Engineer will endeavor to secure faithful performance by the Contractor, and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. 4.6.20 The Engineer’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. 4.7 Claims and Disputes 4.7.1 Definition. A Claim is demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term “Claim” also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. Claims must be made by written notice. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the claim. 4.7.2 Decision of Owner. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Engineer or Owner, shall be referred initially to the Owner for action as provided in Paragraph 4.8. A decision by the Owner, as provided in Subparagraph 4.8.4, shall be required as a condition precedent to litigation of a Claim between the Contractor and Owner as

CR 905 Bike Lanes


to all such matters arising prior to the date final payment is due, regardless of (1) whether such matters relate to execution and progress of the Work or (2) the extent to which the Work has been completed. The decision by the Owner in response to a Claim shall not be a condition precedent or litigation in the event (1) the position of Owner is vacant, (2) The Owner has not received evidence or has failed to render a decision within agreed time limits, (3) the Owner has failed to take action required under Subparagraph 4.8.4 within 30 days after the Claim is made, (4) 45 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Owner or (5) the Claim relates to a mechanic’s lien. 4.7.3 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be made by written notice. An additional Claim made after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order will not be considered unless submitted in a timely manner. 4.7.4 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim unless otherwise agreed in writing the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4.7.5 Not Used. 4.7.6 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If conditions are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Owner will promptly investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend and equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Owner determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Owner shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Claims by either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after the Owner has given notice of the decision. If the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the adjustment shall be referred to the Owner for initial determination, subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph 4.6. 4.7.7 Claims for Additional Cost. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Paragraph 10.3 If the Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to (1) a written interpretation from the Owner, (2) Not Applicable (3) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Owner, (4) failure of payment by the Owner, (5) termination of the Contract by the Owner, (6) Owner’s suspension or (7) other reasonable grounds, Claim shall be filed in accordance with the procedure established herein. 4.7.8 Claims for Additional Time. 4.7.8.1. If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. 4.7.8.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time and could not have been reasonably anticipated, and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. 4.7.9 Injury or Damage to Person or Property. If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, of any of the other party’s employees or agents, or of others for whose acts such party is legally liable, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after first observance. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. If a Claim for additional cost or time related to this Claim is to be asserted, it shall be filed as provided in Subparagraphs 4.7.7 or 4.7.8. 4.8 Resolution of Claims and Disputes

CR 905 Bike Lanes


4.8.1 The Owner will review Claims and take one or more of the following preliminary actions within ten days of receipt of a Claim: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant, (2) submit a schedule to the parties indicating when the Owner expects to take action, (3) reject the Claim in whole or in part, stating reasons for rejection, (4) recommend approval of the Claim by the other party or (5) suggest a compromise. The Owner may also, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. 4.8.2 If a Claim has been resolved, the Owner will prepare or obtain appropriate documentation. 4.8.3 If a Claim has not been resolved, the party making the Claim shall, within ten days after the Owner’s preliminary response, take one or more of the following actions: (1) submit additional supporting data requested by the Owner, (2) modify the initial Claim or (3) notify the Owner that the initial Claim stands. 4.8.4 If a Claim has not been resolved after consideration of the foregoing and of further evidence presented by the parties or requested by the Owner, the Owner will notify the parties in writing that the Owner’s decision will be made within seven days, which decision shall be final and binding on the parties. Upon expiration of such period, the Owner will render to the parties the Owner’s written decision relative to the Claim, including any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. If there is a surety and there appears to be a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy. 4.9 Court Determination of Claims/Disputes. Any claim or dispute for which the parties are unable to achieve a settlement shall be decided by the Circuit Court, 16th Judicial Circuit, Monroe County, Florida. Venue for all claims or disputes shall be in Monroe County, Florida. Mediation shall be conducted in accordance with the rules for the Sixteenth Judicial Circuit, Monroe County, Florida. This Contract shall not be subject to Arbitration.

ARTICLE 5

SUBCONTRACTORS

5.1 Definitions 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term “Subcontractor” does not include other Contractors or subcontractors of other Contractors. 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term “Sub-subcontractor” is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. 5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owners Representative for review by the Owner and Owners Representative the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Owners Representative will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not the Owner, Owners Representative or Owner, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. Failure of the Owners Representative to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner, or Owners Representative has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. 5.2.3 If the Owner or Owners Representative refuses to accept any person or entity on a list submitted by the Contractor in response to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall submit an acceptable substitute; however, no increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for any such substitution. 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Owners Representative makes reasonable objection to such change.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


5.3 Sub-Contractual Relations 5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Owners Representative. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Owners Representative under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights. When appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, copies of the Contract Documents which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. 5.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner provided that: .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Paragraph 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor in writing; and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract.

ARTICLE 6

CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY OTHER CONTRACTORS

6.1 Owner’s Right to Perform Construction with Own Forces and to Award Other Contracts 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations released to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, which include persons or entities under separate contracts not administered by the Owners Representative. The Owner further reserves the right to award other contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver or subrogation. 6.1.2 When the Owner performs construction or operations with the Owner’s own forces including persons or entities under separate contracts not administered by the Owners Representative, the Owner shall provide for coordination of such forces with the Work of the Contractor who shall cooperate with them. 6.1.3 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate his work with the work of other contractors on the site. The Owner and Owners Representative shall be held harmless of any and all costs associated with improper coordination. 6.2 Mutual Responsibility 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner’s own forces, Owners Representative and other Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner’s own forces or other Contractors, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Owners Representative and Owner apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner’s own forces or other Contractors’ completed or partially completed or partial completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor’s Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


6.2.3 Costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be borne by the Contractor responsible therefore. 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by the Contractor to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or other Contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. 6.2.5 Claims and other disputes and matters in question between the Contractor and other Contractors shall be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 4.7 provided the other Contractors have reciprocal obligations. 6.2.6 The Owner and other Contractors shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Paragraph 3.14. 6.2.7 Should the Contractor contend that he is entitled to an extension of time for completion of any portion or portions of the work, he shall, within (72) hours of the occurrence of the cause of the delay, notify the Owners Representative in writing, of his contention: setting forth (A) the cause for the delay, (B) a description of the portion or portions of work affected thereby, and (C) all details pertinent thereto. A subsequent written application for the specific number of days of extension of time requested shall be made by the Contractor to the Owners Representative within (72) hours after the delay has ceased to exist. .1 It is a condition precedent to the consideration or prosecution of any claim for an extension of time that the foregoing provisions be strictly adhered to in each instance and, if the Contractor fails to comply, he shall be deemed to have waived the claim. .2 The Contractor agrees that whether or not any delay, regardless of cause, shall be the basis for an extension of

time he shall have no claim against the Owner or Owners Representative for an increase in the Contract price, nor a claim against the Owner or Owners Representative for a payment or allowance of any kind for damage, loss or expense resulting from delays: nor shall the Contractor have any claim for damage, loss or expense resulting from interruptions to, or suspension of, his work to enable other contractors to perform their work. The only remedy available to the Contractor shall be an extension of time.

6.3 Owner’s Right to Clean Up 6.3.1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, other Contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish as described in Paragraph 3.15, the Owner may clean up and allocate the cost among those responsible as the Owners Representative, in consultation with the Owner, determines to be just.

ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK

7.1 Changes 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Owners Representative, and Contractor; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner, Owners Representative and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Owner alone. 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. 7.1.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted, either by increase or decrease.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


7.2 Change Orders 7.2.1 A change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Owners Representative and signed by the Owner and Contractor, stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 a change in the Work; .2 the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any; and .3 the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any. 7.2.2 The cost or credit to the owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined in one or more of the following: .1 mutual acceptance of lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; .4 or by method provided in subparagraph 7.2.3. 7.2.3 If none of the methods set forth in Clauses 7.2.2.1; 7.2.2.2; or 7.2.2.3 is agreed upon, the Contractor, provided a written order signed by the Owner or Owners Representative is received, shall promptly proceed with the Work involved. The cost of such Work shall then be determined by daily force accounts in a form acceptable to the Owner and Owners Representative and shall include only equipment and personnel hours and materials used to execute the Work. The daily force account forms shall identify Contractor and /or Subcontractor personnel by name, hours for each man , each piece of equipment and total hours for equipment and all material(s) by type for each extra Work activity claim. Each daily force account form shall be signed by the designated Owners Representative’s representative no later than the close of business on the day the Work is performed to verify the items and hours listed. Extended pricing of these forms shall be submitted to the Owners Representative with all supporting documentation required by the Owners Representative for inclusion into a change order. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, cost shall be limited to the following: cost of materials, including sales tax and cost of delivery; cost of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, and fringe benefits required by agreement or custom; works’ or workmen’s compensation insurance; and the rental value of equipment and machinery. Markups for overhead and profit will be in accordance with subparagraph 7.2.4. Pending final determination of cost, payments on account shall be made as determined by the Owners Representative. The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor for any deletion or change, which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum, will be the amount of the actual net cost as confirmed by the Owners Representative. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in any one change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of the net increase, if any with respect to that change. 7.2.4 The actual cost of Changes in the Work may include all items of labor or material, power tools, and equipment actually used, utilities, pro rata charges for foreman, and all payroll charges such as Public Liability and Workmen’s Compensation Insurance. No percentage for overhead and profit shall be allowed on items of Social Security and Sales Tax. If deductions are ordered the credit shall be the net cost. Items considered as overhead shall include insurance other than that mentioned above, bond or bonds, superintendent, timekeeper, clerks, watchmen, use of small tools, miscellaneous supplies, incidental job costs, warranties, and all general home/field office expenses. The actual cost of Changes in the Work (other than those covered by unit prices set forth in the Contract Documents) shall be computed as follows: .1 if the Contractor performs the actual Work, the maximum percentage mark-up for overhead shall be five percent (5%) and the maximum percentage for profit shall be five percent (5%); .2 if the Subcontractor performs the actual Work, the percentage mark-up for overhead and profit shall be a maximum addition of ten percent (10%). If the Contractor does not enter into the Work, the maximum mark-up for managing this Work will be five percent (5%); .3 if the Subcontractor performs part of the actual Work, his percentage mark-up for overhead and profit shall be a maximum addition of then percent (10%) on his direct Work only. If the Contractor performs part of the actual

CR 905 Bike Lanes


Work, his percentage mark-up for overhead and profit shall be a maximum addition of ten percent (10%) on his direct Work only. 7.2.5 The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner through the Owners Representative, an itemized breakdown of the quantities and prices used in computing the value of any change that might be ordered. Any additional supporting documentation requested by the Owners Representative such as certified quotations or invoices shall be provided by the Contractor to the Owners Representative at no additional cost to the Owner. 7.2.6 If the Contractor claims that any instructions given to him by the Owners Representative, by drawings or otherwise, involve extra Work not covered by the Contract, he shall give the Owners Representative written notice thereof within five (5) days after the receipt of such instructions and before proceeding to execute the work, except in emergencies endangering life or property, in which case the Contractor shall proceed in accordance with Paragraph 10.3. .1 The written notice to the Owners Representative for the Extra Work shall include a complete description of the extra Work, the total cost and a detailed cost breakdown by labor, material and equipment for each additional activity required to be performed. Mark-ups shall be limited as specified elsewhere in this Article. .2 Except as otherwise specifically provided, no claim for additional cost shall be allowed unless the complete notice specified by this subparagraph is given by the Contractor. 7.2.7 Unless otherwise agreed in writing, the Contractor shall carry on the Work and maintain its progress during any dispute or claim proceeding, and Owner shall continue to make payments to the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. Disputes unresolved shall be settled in accordance with subparagraph 12.1.1. The Contractor shall maintain completed daily force account forms in accordance with subparagraph 7.2.3 for any dispute or claim item. 7.4 The Owner will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order issued through the Owners Representative and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly.

ARTICLE 8

TIME

8.1 Definitions 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. The date shall not be postponed by the failure to act of the Contractor or of persons or entities for whom the Contractor is responsible. 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Owner in accordance with Paragraph 9.8. 8.1.4 The term “day” as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. 8.1.5 The Owner/Owners Representative shall be the final judge as to whether substantial completion has been achieved and certifies the date to the Contractor. 8.2 Progress and Completion 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. Unless the date of commencement is established by a notice to proceed given by the Owner, the Contractor shall notify the

CR 905 Bike Lanes


Owner in writing not less than five days or other agreed period before commencing the Work to permit the timely filling of mortgages, mechanic’s liens and other security interests. 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed, at any time, in the progress of the Work by any act or neglect of the Owner, Owners Representative, or by any employee of either, or by any separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by fire, unusual delay in transportation, adverse weather conditions not reasonably anticipatable, unavoidable casualties or any causes beyond the Contractor’s control, or by delay authorized by the Owner, Owners Representative, or by any other cause which the Owners Representative determines may justify the delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by no cost Change Order for such reasonable time as the Owners Representative may determine, in accordance with subparagraph 6.2.7. 8.3.2 Any claim for extension of time shall be made in writing to the Owners Representative not more than seventy-two (72) hours after the commencement of the delay in accordance with paragraph 6.2.7; otherwise it shall be waived. Any claim for extension of time shall state the cause of the delay and the number of days of extension requested. If the cause of the delay is continuing, only one claim is necessary, but the Contractor shall report the termination of the cause for the delay within seventy-two (72) hours after such termination in accordance with paragraph 6.2.7; otherwise, any claim for extension of time based upon that cause shall be waived. 8.3.3 No claim for an increase in the Contract Sum for either acceleration or delay will be allowed for extensions of time pursuant to this Paragraph 8.3 or for other changes in the Construction Schedules. 8.3.4 If the Project is delayed as a result of the Contractor’s refusal or failure to begin the Work on the date of commencement as defined in Paragraph 8.1.2, or his refusal or failure to carry the Work forward expeditiously with adequate forces, the Contractor causing the delay shall be liable, but not limited to, delay claims from other Contractors which are affected.

ARTICLE 9

PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

9.1 Contract Sum 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 9.2 Schedule of Values 9.2.1 Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner, through the Owners

Representative, a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Owners Representative and Owner may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Owners Representative or Owner shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment.

9.3 Applications for Payment 9.3.1 At least fifteen days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Owners Representative an itemized Application for Payment for Work completed in accordance with the schedule of values. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment as the Owners Representative and Owner may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and reflecting retainage if provided for elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

.1 Such applications may include request for payment because of changes in the Work, which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives but not included in Change Orders.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


.2 Such applications may not include requests for payment of amounts the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier because of a dispute or other reason. 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. All Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors shall execute an agreement stating that title will so pass, upon their receipt of payment from the Contractor. The warrants are for the administrative convenience of the Owner only and do not create an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay directly any unpaid subcontractor, laborer or materialmen. Such persons must seek payment from the Contractor or his public construction bond surety only. 9.4 Certificate for Payment 9.4.1 The Owners Representative will assemble a Project Application for Payment by combining the Contractor’s applications with similar applications for progress payments from other Contractors and, after certifying the amounts due on such applications, forward them to the Owner within seven days. 9.4.2 Within seven days after the Owner’s receipt of the Project Application for Payment, the Owners Representative and Owner will either issue to the Owner a Project Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Owners Representative and Owner determine is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Owners Representative’s and Owner’s reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. Such notification will be forwarded to the Contractor by the Owners Representative. 9.4.3 The issuance of a separate Certificate for Payment or a Project Certificate for Payment will constitute representations made separately by the Owners Representative and Owner to the Owner, based on their individual observations at the site and the data comprising the Application for Payment submitted by the Contractor, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of the Owners Representative’s and Owner’s knowledge, information and belief, quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to minor deviations from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Owners Representative or Owner. The issuance of a separate Certificate for Payment or a Project Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a separate Certificate for Payment or a Project Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Owners Representative or Owner has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed the Contractor’s construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.5.1 The Owners Representative/Owner may decline to approve an Application for Payment if, in his opinion, the application is not adequately supported. If the Contractor and Owners Representative cannot agree on a revised amount, the Owners Representative shall process the Application for the amount he deems appropriate. The Owners Representative may also decline to approve any Application for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or subsequent inspections, he may nullify, in whole or part, any approval previously made to such extent as may be necessary in his opinion because of: (1) defective Work not remedied; (2) third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims; (3) failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials, or equipment;

CR 905 Bike Lanes


(4) reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; (5) damage to the Owners Representative, the Owner, or another contractor working at the project; (6) reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the contract time; (7) persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. .1 No payment shall be made to the Contractor until certificates of insurance or other evidence of compliance by the

Contractor, within all the requirements of Article 11, have been filed with the Owner and Owners Representative. 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. 9.6 Progress Payments 9.6.1 After the Owners Representative and Owner have issued a Project Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Owners Representative and Owner. From the total of the amount determined to be payable on a progress payment, ten percent (10 %) of such total amount will be deducted and retained by the Owner until final payment is made. The balance ninety percent (90 %) of the amount payable, less all previous payments, shall be certified for payment. .1 It is understood and agreed that the Contractor shall not be entitled to demand or receive progress payment based

on quantities of Work in excess of those provided in the proposal or covered by approved change orders, except when such excess quantities have been determined by the Owners Representative to be a part of the final quantity for the item of Work in question.

.2 No progress payment shall bind the Owner to the acceptance of any materials or Work in place, as to quality or quantity. All progress payments are subject to correction at the time of final payments. 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor’s portion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. 9.6.3 The Owners Representative will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Owner, Owners Representative and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. 9.6.4 Neither the Owner or Owners Representative shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and

9.6.4. 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.6.7 All material and work covered by partial payments made shall thereupon become the sole property of the Owner, and by this provision shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from the sole responsibility for the materials and Work upon which payments have been made or the restoration for any damaged material, or as a waiver to the right of the Owner or Owners Representative to require the fulfillment of all the terms of the Contract. 9.6.8 Except in case of bona fide disputes, or where the Contractor has some other justifiable reason for delay, the Contractor shall pay for all transportation and utility services not later than the end of the calendar month following that in which services are rendered and for all materials, tools, and other expendable equipment which are delivered at the site of the Project. The Contractor shall pay to each of his Subcontractors, not later than the end of the calendar month in which each payment is made to the Contractor; the representative amount allowed the Contractor on account of the Work performed by is Subcontractor interest therein. The Contractor shall, by an appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, also require each Subcontractor to make payments to his suppliers and Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


9.8 Substantial Completion 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor and Owners Representative shall jointly prepare and submit to the Owner a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected. The Contractor shall proceed promptly to complete and correct items on the list. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Upon receipt of the list, the Owner, assisted by the Owners Representative, will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Owner’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the list, which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Owner. The Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Owner, assisted by the Owners Representative, to determine Substantial Completion. When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Owner will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. 9.8.3 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof and upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Owners Representative and Owner, the Owner shall make payment, reflecting adjustment in retainage, if any, for such Work or portion thereof as provided in the Contract Documents. 9.9 Partial Occupancy or Use 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Subparagraph 11.3.11 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor and Owners Representative shall jointly prepare and submit a list to the Owner as provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Owner after consultation with the Owners Representative. 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Owners Representative, Contractor shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment 9.10.1 Upon completion of the Work, the Contractor shall forward to the Owners Representative a written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and shall also forward to the Owners Representative a final Contractor’s Application for Payment. Upon receipt, the Owners Representative will forward the notice and Application to the Owner who will promptly make such inspection. When the Owner, based on the recommendation of the Owners Representative, finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Owners Representative and Owner will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of their knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of their observations and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in said final Certificate is due and payable. The Owners Representative’s and Owner’s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation

CR 905 Bike Lanes


that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Owner through the Owners Representative (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payments currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner, if a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Owners Representative and Owner so confirm, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Owners Representative and Owner, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bond have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Owner through the Construction Manger prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 4.7.5. 9.10.4 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. 9.11 Any requirement of this Article 9 that the Contractor furnish proof to the Owner, or Owners Representative that the subcontractors and materialmen have been paid is for the protection and convenience of the Owner only. Unpaid subcontractors and materialmen may only seek payment from the Contractor and the surety that provided the Contractor’s Public Construction Bond. The Contractor must insert this paragraph 9.11 in all its contracts with subcontractors and materialmen.

ARTICLE 10

PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. The Contractor shall submit the Contractor’s safety program to the Owners Representative for review and coordination with the safety programs of other Contractors. 10.1.2 In the event the Contractor encounters on the site material reasonably believed to be asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) which has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected and report the condition to the Owner and Owners Representative in writing. The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor if in fact the material is asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) and has not been rendered harmless. The Work in the affected area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), or when it has been rendered harmless, by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. 10.1.3 The Contractor shall not be required pursuant to Article 7 to perform without consent any Work relating to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB). 10.1.5 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition,

CR 905 Bike Lanes


immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Owners Representative in writing. The Owner, Contractor and Owners Representative shall then proceed in the same manner described in Subparagraph 10.1.2. 10.1.6 The Owner shall be responsible for obtaining the services of a licensed laboratory to verify a presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to verify that it has been rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor, Owners Representative and Owner the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor, the Owners Representative and the Owner will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not any of them has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If the Contractor, Owners Representative or Owner has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor, the Owners Representative and the Owner have no reasonable objection. 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor’s Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors; .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction; and .4 construction or operations by the Owner or other Contractors. 10.2.2 The Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of property qualified personnel. 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss to property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1.2, 10.2.1.3, 10.2.1.4 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2, 10.2.1.3 and 10.2.1.4, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner, Constructions Manager or Owner or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.18. 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Owners Representative. 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. 10.3 Emergencies 10.3.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph 4.7 and Article 7.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS

11.1.1 Prior to commencement of Work governed by this contract (including the pre-staging of personnel and material), the Contractor shall obtain, at their own expense, insurance as specified in the attached schedules, which are made part of this Agreement. The Contractor will ensure that the insurance obtained will extend protection to all subcontractors engaged by the Contractor. As an alternative the Contractor may require all subcontractors to obtain insurance consistent with the attached schedules. 11.1.2 The Contractor will not be permitted to commence Work governed by the Agreement (including pre-staging of personnel and material) until satisfactory evidence of the required insurance has been furnished to the County as specified below. Delays in the commencement of Work resulting from the failure of the Contractor to provide satisfactory evidence of the required insurance shall not extend deadlines specified in this Agreement and any penalties and failure to perform assessments shall be imposed as if the Work commenced on the specified date and time, except for the Contractor’s failure to provide satisfactory evidence. 11.1.3 The Contractor shall maintain the required insurance throughout the entire term of this contract and any extensions specified in any attached schedules. Failure to comply with this provision may result in the immediate suspension of all Work until the required insurance has been reinstated or replaced. Delays in the completion of Work resulting from the failure of the Contractor to maintain the required insurance shall not extend deadlines specified in this Agreement and any penalties and failure to perform assessments shall be imposed as if the Work commenced on the specified date and time, except for the Contractor’s failure to provide satisfactory evidence. 11.1.4 The Contractor shall provide, to the County in care of the Owners Representative, as satisfactory evidence of the required insurance, either: Certificate of Insurance or A certified copy of the actual insurance policy 11.1.5 The County, at its sole option, has the right to request a certified copy of any or all insurance policies required by this Contract. 11.1.6 All insurance policies must specify that they are not subject to cancellation, non-renewal, material change, or reduction in coverage unless a minimum of thirty (30) days prior notification is given to the County by the insurer. 11.1.7 The acceptance and/or approval of the Contractor’s insurance shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from any liability or obligation assumed under this contract or imposed by law. 11.1.8 The Monroe County Board of County Commissioners, it’s employees and officials will be included as “Additional Insured” on all policies, except for Worker’s Compensation. 11.1.9 In addition, the County will be named as an additional insured and loss payee on all policies covering County -owned property. 11.1.10 Any deviations from these General Insurance Requirements must be requested in writing on the County prepared form entitled “Request for Waiver of Insurance Requirements” and approved by the Monroe County’s Risk Manager. 11.2 Public Construction Bond 11.3.1 The Owner shall require the Contractor to furnish a Public Construction Bond in the form provided by the Owner in this section as a guarantee for the faithful performance of the Contract (including guarantee and maintenance provisions) and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder. The Public Construction Bond shall be in an amount at least equal to the contract price. This contract is subject to the provisions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, which are incorporated herein. If change orders render the contract more than ten (10%) percent higher than the bond amount, the Contractor shall increase the bond amount to cover the entire difference.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK

12.1 Uncovering of Work 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Owners Representative’s or Owner’s request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by either, be uncovered for their observation and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time. 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Owners Representative or Owner has not specifically requested to observe prior to its being covered, the Owners Representative or Owner may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor, if such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner, if such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such costs unless the condition was caused by the Owner or one of the other Contractors in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. 12.2 Correction of Work 12.2.1 The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Owners Representative or Owner or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Owners Representative’s and Owner’s services and expenses made necessary thereby. 12.2.2 If, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Subparagraph 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. This period of one year shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. This obligation under this Subparagraph 12.2.2 shall survive acceptance of the Work under the Contract and termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. 12.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 2.4. If the Contractor does not proceed with correction of such nonconforming Work within a reasonable time fixed by written notice from the Owner issued through the Owners Representative, the Owner may remove it and store the salvable materials or equipment at the Contractor’s expense, if the Contractor does not pay costs of such removal and storage within ten days after written notice, the Owner may upon ten additional days’ written notice sell such materials and equipment at auction or at private sale and shall account for the proceeds thereof, after deducting costs and damages that should have been borne by the Contractor, including compensation for the Owners Representative’s and Owner’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, if such proceeds of sale do not cover costs which the Contractor should have borne, the Contract Sum shall be reduced by the deficiency. If payments then or thereafter due the contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. 12.2.5 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or other Contractors caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 12.2.6 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one year as described in Subparagraph 12.2.2, relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced,

CR 905 Bike Lanes


nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made.

ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISION

13.1 Governing Law 13.1.1 The contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Florida. Venue for any claims or disputes arising under this contract shall be in the Circuit Court of the 16th Judicial Circuit of the State of Florida, Monroe County. 13.2 Successors and Assigns 13.2.1 The Owner and the Contractor each binds himself, his partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives of such other party in respect to all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract or sublet it as a whole without the written consent of the other. 13.2.2 The Contractor shall not assign any monies due or to become due under this Contract without prior written consent of the Owner or Owners Representative. 13.3 Written Notice 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. 13.3.2 All written correspondence to the Owner shall be serialized, dated, and signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor. The correspondence shall be directed to: Ms. Judith Clarke, P.E. Director of Engineering Services Monroe County Public Works and Engineering Division 1100 Simonton Street

Key West, Florida 33040 13.4 Rights and Remedies 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents, rights, and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Owners Representative, or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 13.5 Tests and Inspections 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Owners Representative and Owner timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Owners Representative and Owner may observe such procedures. The

CR 905 Bike Lanes


Owner shall bear costs of test, inspections or approvals which do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. 13.5.2 If the Owners Representative, Owner, or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Subparagraph 13.5.1, the Owners Representative will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Owners Representative and Owner of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Owners Representative and Owner may observe such procedures. The Owner shall bear such costs except as provided in Subparagraph 13.5.3. 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Owners Representative’s and Owner’s services and expenses. 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owners Representative for transmittal to the Owner. 13.5.5 If the Owners Representative or Owner is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Owners Representative or Owner will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. 13.5.6 Test or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. 13.6 Not Used. 13.7 Commencement of Statutory Limitation Period 13.7.1 The statute of limitations applicable to this contact are as provided in Section 95.11 (3) (C), Florida Statutes.

ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT

14.1 Termination by the Contractor 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with Contractor, for any of the following reasons: .1 issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction; .2 an act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, making material unavailable; .3 because the Owners Representative or Owner has not issued a certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.2, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; .4 if repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions by the Owner as described in Paragraph 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period whichever is less; or .5 the Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor’s request, reasonable evidence as required by Subparagraph 2.2. 14.1.2 If one of the above reasons exists, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ written notice to the Owner and Owners Representative, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed and for proven loss with respect to materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery, including reasonable overhead, profit and damages.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


14.1.3 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has persistently failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ written notice to the Owner and Owners Representative, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Subparagraph 14.1.2. 14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor: .1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors; .3 persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction; .or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, after consultation with the Owners Representative, and upon certification by the Owner that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, 72 hours written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.4; and .3 finishes the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Subparagraph 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Construction manger’s and Owner’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amounts to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall, upon application, be certified by the Owner after consultation with the Owners Representative, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. 14.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. 14.3.3 Adjustments made in the cost of performance may have a mutually agreed fixed or percentage fee.

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ END OF SECTION 00750

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND 00850-1

SECTION 00850

PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND BY THIS BOND, We ___________________________ ________, as Principal and , a corporation, as Surety, are bound to , herein called Owner, in the sum of $ , for payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, personal representatives, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally. THE CONDITION OF THIS BOND is that if Principal: 1. Performs the contract dated , 20 , between Principal and

Owner for construction of CR 905 Bike Lanes Project

Key Largo Monroe County, Florida

The contract being made a part of this bond by reference, at the times and in the manner prescribed in the contract; and

2. Promptly makes payments to all claimants, as defined in Section 255.05(1), Florida Statutes, supplying Principal with labor, materials, or supplies, used directly or indirectly by Principal in the prosecution of the work provided for in the contract; and

3. Pays Owner all losses, damages, expenses, costs, and attorney's fees, including appellate proceedings, that Owner sustains because of a default by Principal under the contract; and

4. Performs the guarantee of all work and materials furnished under the contract for the time specified in the contract, then this bond is void; otherwise it remains in full force.

5. Any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in Sec. 255.05(2) Florida Statues.

Any changes in or under the contract documents and compliance or noncompliance with any formalities connected with the contract or the changes does not affect Surety's obligation under this bond. Dated , 2013. (Name of Principal) By (As Attorney in Fact) (Name of Surety)

~~~~~~~~~~

END OF SECTION 00850

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 SUPPLEMENTARY INSURANCE DOCUMENTS 00900-1

GENERAL INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

FOR

CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS Prior to the commencement of work governed by this contract (including the pre-staging of personnel and material), the Contractor shall obtain, at his/her own expense, insurance as specified in the attached schedules, which are made part of this contract. The Contractor will also ensure that the insurance obtained will extend protection to all Sub-Contractors engaged by the Contractor. As an alternative, the Contractor may require all Sub-Contractors to obtain insurance consistent with the attached schedules. The Contractor will not be permitted to commence work governed by this contract (including pre-staging of personnel and material) until satisfactory evidence of the required insurance has been furnished to the County as specified below. Delays in the commencement of work, resulting from the failure of the Contractor to provide satisfactory evidence of the required insurance, shall not extend deadlines specified in this contract and any penalties and failure to perform assessments shall be imposed as if the work commenced on the specified date and time, except for the Contractor's failure to provide satisfactory evidence. The Contractor shall maintain the required insurance throughout the entire term of this contract and any extensions specified in any attached schedules. Failure to comply with this provision may result in the immediate suspension of all work until the required insurance has been reinstated or replaced. Delays in the completion of the work resulting from the failure of the Contractor to maintain the required insurance shall not extend deadlines specified in this contract and any penalties and failure to perform assessments shall be imposed as if the work had not been suspended, except for the Contractor's failure to maintain the required insurance. The Contractor shall provide, to the County, as satisfactory evidence of the required insurance, either: - Certificate of Insurance or - A Certified copy of the actual insurance policy. The County, at its sole option, has the right to request a certified copy of any or all insurance policies required by this contract. All insurance policies must specify that they are not subject to cancellation, non-renewal, material change, or reduction in coverage unless a minimum of thirty (30) days prior notification is given to the County by the insurer. The acceptance and/or approval of the Contractor's insurance shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from any liability or obligation assumed under this contract or imposed by law. The Monroe County Board of County Commissioners, its employees and officials will be included as "Additional Insured" on all policies, except for Workers' Compensation. In addition, the County will be named as an Additional Insured and Loss Payee on all policies covering County-owned property. Any deviations from these General Insurance Requirements must be requested in writing on the County prepared form entitled "Request for Waiver of Insurance Requirements" and approved by Monroe County's Risk Manager.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


Indemnification and Hold Harmless

For

Construction Contractors and Subcontractors

Notwithstanding any minimum insurance requirements prescribed elsewhere in this agreement, the Contractor covenants and agrees that he shall defend, indemnify and hold the COUNTY and the COUNTY’s elected and appointed officers and employees harmless from and against (i) claims, actions or causes of action, (ii) litigation, administrative proceedings, appellate proceedings, or other proceedings relating to any type of injury (including death), loss, damage, fine, penalty or business interruption, and (iii) costs or expenses that may be asserted against, initiated with respect to, or sustained by the County and the COUNTY’s elected and appointed officers and employees from liabilities damages, losses and costs, including but not limited to, reasonable attorney’s fees, to the extent caused by the negligence, recklessness, or intentional wrongful misconduct of the Contractor and persons employed or utilized by the indemnifying party in the performance of the construction contract. The monetary limitation of liability under this contract shall be not less than $1 million per occurrence pursuant to F. S. 725.06. Insofar as the claims, actions, causes of action, litigation, proceedings, costs or expenses relate to events or circumstances that occur during the term of this Agreement, this section will survive the expiration of the term of this Agreement or any earlier termination of this Agreement.

In the event the completion of the project (including the work of others) is delayed or suspended as a result of the Contractor’s failure to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the Contractor shall indemnify the County from any and all increased expenses resulting from such delay. In the event the completion of the project (including the work of others) is delayed or suspended as a result of the Contractor’s failure to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the Contractor shall indemnify the County from any and all increased expenses resulting from such delay. The first ten dollars ($10.00) of remuneration paid to the Contractor is for the indemnification provided for above. The extent of liability is in no way limited to, reduced, or lessened by the insurance requirements contained elsewhere within this agreement.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA INSURANCE CHECKLIST

FOR VENDORS SUBMITTING PROPOSALS

FOR WORK To assist in the development of your proposal, the insurance coverages marked with an "X" will be required in the event an award is made to your firm. Please review this form with your insurance agent and have him/her sign it in the place provided. It is also required that the bidder sign the form and submit it with each proposal.

WORKER'S COMPENSATION AND

EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY

__X__ Workers' Compensation Statutory Limits WC1 __ __ Employers' Liability $100,000/$500,000/$100,000 WC2 Employers' Liability $500,000/$500,000/$500,000 WC3 X Employers' Liability $1,000,000/$1,000,000/$1,000,000 WCUSLH US Longshoremen & $500,000/$500,000/$500,000 Harbor Workers Act WCJA X Federal Jones Act $500,000/$500,000/$500,000

CR 905 Bike Lanes


GENERAL LIABILITY

As a minimum, the required general liability coverages will include: - Premises Operations - Products and Completed Operations - Blanket Contractual - Personal Injury - Expanded Definition Of Property Damage

Monroe County will be named as additional insured on General Liability Policy. Required Limits: GL1 __ $ 100,000 per Person; $300,000 per Occurrence $ 50,000 Property Damage or $ 300,000 Combined Single Limit GL2 $ 250,000 per Person; $500,000 per Occurrence $ 50,000 Property Damage or $ 500,000 Combined Single Limit GL3 $ 500,000 per Person; $1,000,000 per Occurrence $ 100,000 Property Damage or $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit GL4 X $ 5,000,000 Combined Single Limit Required Endorsement: GLXCU X Underground, Explosion and Collapse (XCU) GLLIQ Liquor Liability GLS Security Services All endorsements are required to have the same limits as the basic policy.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


VEHICLE LIABILITY As a minimum, coverage should extend to liability for:

- Owned; Nonowned; and Hired Vehicles Monroe County will be named as additional insured on the Vehicle Liability Policy. Required Limits: VL1 $ 50,000 per Person; $100,000 per Occurrence $ 25,000 Property Damage or $ 100,000 Combined Single Limit VL2 $ 100,000 per Person; $300,000 per Occurrence $ 50,000 Property Damage or $ 300,000 Combined Single Limit VL3 X $ 500,000 per Person; $1,000,000 per Occurrence $ 100,000 Property Damage or $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit

CR 905 Bike Lanes


INSURANCE AGENT'S STATEMENT I have reviewed the above requirements with the bidder named below. The following deductibles apply to the corresponding policy. POLICY DEDUCTIBLES Liability policies are Occurrence Claims Made Insurance Agency Signature

BIDDER'S STATEMENT I understand the insurance that will be mandatory if awarded the contract and will comply in full with all the requirements. Bidder Signature

CR 905 Bike Lanes


MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA

INSURANCE GUIDE

TO CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION

WAIVER OF INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS

There will be times when it will be necessary, or in the best interest of the County, to deviate from the standard insurance requirements specified within this manual. Recognizing this potential, and acting on the advice of the County Attorney, the Board of County Commissioners has granted authorization to Risk Management to waive and modify various insurance provisions. Specifically excluded from this authorization is the right to waive:

The County as being named as an Additional Insured—If a letter from the Insurance Company (not the Agent) is presented, stating that they are unable or unwilling to name the County as an Additional Insured, Risk Management has been granted the authority to waive this provision.

and

The Indemnification and Hold Harmless provisions Waiving of insurance provisions could expose the County to economic loss. For this reason, every attempt should be made to obtain the standard insurance requirements. If a waiver or a modification is desired, a Request for Waiver of Insurance Requirements form should be completed and routed to Risk Management for consideration and negotiation as soon as possible. The form will be returned, either approved or disapproved, to the County Attorney who will submit the Waiver with the other contract documents for execution by the Clerk of the Courts. Should Risk Management deny the Waiver Request, the other party may file an appeal with the County Administrator or the Board of County Commissioners, who retains the final decision-making authority.

MONROE COUNTY, FLORIDA

CR 905 Bike Lanes


Request For Waiver of

Insurance Requirements It is requested that the insurance requirements, as specified in the County’s Schedule of Insurance Requirements, be waived or modified on the following contract: Contractor: Contract for: Address of Contractor: Phone: Scope of Work: Reason for Waiver: Signature of Contractor: Approved Not Approved Risk Management: Date: County Administrator appeal: Approved Not Approved Date: Board of County Commissioners appeal: Approved Not Approved Meeting Date:

~~~~~~~~~~ END OF SECTION 00900

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 01000-1

SECTION 01000

SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1.1 SCOPE

A. The Project consists of all related work as identified in Section 00300 and on the Construction Drawings and the Specifications for the Project.

1.2 STANDARD DOCUMENTS

A. Construction shall conform to the technical portions of the most recently published edition of Florida D.O.T. Standard Specifications for Roadway Construction, the Technical Specifications included in this Manual and all appropriate portions of the Monroe County Public Works Manual, except when otherwise indicated hereinafter. The Contractor is responsible for complying with all OSHA and ADA regulations pertaining to this project.

1.3 LAYING OUT THE WORK

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for establishing all lines and grades together with all reference points as required by the various trades for all work under this Contract.

B. The Contractor shall provide all labor and instruments and all stakes, templates, and

other materials necessary for marking and maintaining all lines and grades. The lines and grades shall be subject to any checking the Director of Engineering Services may decide necessary.

C. No separate cost item is provided for laying out the work, the cost of which shall be

included in the unit prices for items in the bid. 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S OFFICE

A. Not Used. 1.5 CARE OF TREES, SHRUBS AND GRASS

A. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for maintaining in good condition all vegetation inside the County right-of-way. Contractor will conduct work in a manner that minimizes the amount of vegetation that is impacted by the Work. Where vegetation must be removed or destroyed incident to the construction operation, the Contractor, after completion of the work, must replace or restore to the original condition all destroyed or damaged shrubbery, grass areas or pea rock areas. He must, however, leave the area in a clean and workmanlike condition. Care of trees, shrubs and grass shall be considered incidental & cost shall be included in the bid price of the items listed in the bid.

1.6 EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for and make good all damage to pavement beyond the limits of this Contract, buildings, telephone or other cables, water pipes,

CR 905 Bike Lanes


sanitary pipes, or other structures which may be encountered, whether or not shown on the Drawings.

B. Information shown on the Drawings as to the location of existing utilities has been

prepared by the most reliable data available to the Engineer. This information is not guaranteed, however, and it shall be this Contractor's responsibility to determine the location, character and depth of any existing utilities. He shall assist the utility companies, by every means possible to determine said locations. Extreme caution shall be exercised to eliminate any possibility of any damage to said locations. Extreme caution shall be exercised to eliminate any possibility of any damage to utilities resulting from his activities.

C. Any existing utility castings, including valve boxes, junction boxes, manholes, hand

holes, pull boxes, manhole rings, inlet grates, and similar utility structures located within the limits of the right-of-way and the project boundary limits are to remain in service and shall be adjusted by the Contractor or if by mutual agreement, the utility Owner. There will be no separate pay items for adjustments.

1.7 Not Used 1.8 RECORD DRAWINGS Record Drawings will be required before final payment. 1.9 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for having determined to his satisfaction, prior to the submission of his bid, the nature & location of the work, the conformation of the ground, the character and quality of the substrata, the types and quantity of materials to be encountered, the nature of the ground water conditions, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the execution of the work, the general and local conditions and all other matters which can in any way affect the work under this contract. The prices established for the work to be done will reflect all costs pertaining to the work. Any claims for extras based on substrata or ground water table conditions will not be allowed.

B. Geotechnical Report for investigation during design is included as Attachment A to this section.

1.10 PROJECT SIGNS A. Not used. 1.11 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper maintenance control and detour of traffic in the area of construction, during the course of construction. All traffic control and maintenance procedures shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Florida D.O.T. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility, as Bidder, prior to submitting his Bid, to determine the requirements so that his Proposal reflects all costs

CR 905 Bike Lanes


to be incurred. No claims for additional payment will be considered for costs incurred in providing the proper maintenance, control, detour and protection of traffic. The Contractor will be required to submit a Maintenance of Traffic Plan covering all phases of the Project to the Owner for review and approval prior to the start of Work.

B. All traffic control signs and devices, barricades, flashers, flambeaus and similar

devices shall be furnished and maintained by the Contractor. C. Construction shall be conducted in such a manner to cause the least possible

interruption to traffic. Necessary access to and from adjacent properties shall be provided at all times.

1.12 BARRICADES AND PROTECTION OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall protect his work throughout its length by the erection of suitable barricades, where required. He shall further indicate his work at night by the maintenance of suitable lights or flares. He shall comply with all laws or ordinances covering the protection of such work and the safety measures to be employed therein. The Contractor shall carry out his work so as not to deny access to private property. All utility access manholes, valves, fire hydrants, and letter boxes shall be kept accessible at all times.

B. In the event or threat of a hurricane the Contractor shall remove all equipment and

material from the roadway. He shall make the area safe to traffic and pedestrian. No object from the site should pose a threat to anyone caused by wind or water.

1.13 TURBIDITY CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall employ adequate silt containment equipment and/or procedures during excavation and construction to control turbidity of the adjacent waters to within the limits required by Federal, State and local laws and/or permit requirements.

The Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials and perform all operations necessary for the installation and maintenance of a silt barrier around the area of construction including the removal of the barrier upon completion of the project.

1.14 PROTECTION OF WATER RESOURCES

A. It is intended that the natural resources outside the limits of permanent work performed under the contract be preserved in their existing condition. The Contractor shall confine all activities to areas defined by the drawings and/or contract documents. The Contractor shall not discharge or permit the discharge into waters of any fuels, oils, bitumen, garbage, sewage, or other materials that may be detrimental to outdoor recreation. All work shall be performed in such a manner that objectionable conditions will not be created in waters through or adjacent to the project area. If a violation is noted during construction, all work shall cease until the condition is corrected by the Contractor.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


1.15 ENVIRONMENTAL RESOURCES PERMITS A. The Contractor will adhere to all conditions outlined in the U.S. Army Corps of

Engineers notice no. SAJ-2012-03326 (NPR-IF) that was issued for this project, the SFWMD letter dated February 14, 2103 issued in response to application no. 130201-12 and the USFWS letter dated September 11, 2013, which are included in this Specification Section as Attachment B.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


Attachment A Geotechnical Report

CR 905 Bike Lanes Project Design – Monroe County, Florida January 2, 2013 HR Engineering Services, Inc. Project No. HR12-840R

i

Table of Contents

Page #

1.0 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................ 1-1 2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION ............................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................ 2-1 2.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................... 2-1

3.0 FIELD EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING ........................................... 3-1 3.1 FIELD EXPLORATION .......................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 PERCOLATION TESTING ...................................................................................................... 3-1 3.3 DOUBLE RING INFILTROMETER TESTING ........................................................................... 3-2 3.4 LABORATORY TESTING ....................................................................................................... 3-2

3.4.1 Soil Testing .................................................................................................................. 3-2 4.0 SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ....................................................................... 4-1

4.1 SITE CONDITIONS ................................................................................................................ 4-1 4.2 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ................................................................................................. 4-1

4.2.1 Generalized Subsurface Conditions Encountered Along the Alignment..................... 4-1 4.2.2 Groundwater Conditions ............................................................................................. 4-1

5.0 ROADWAY CONSTRUCTION RECOMMENDATIONS ............................................. 5-1 5.1 BASIS FOR RECOMMENDATIONS ......................................................................................... 5-1 5.2 SUITABILITY OF IN-SITU MATERIALS ................................................................................. 5-1 5.3 CONSTRUCTION RECOMMENDATIONS ................................................................................ 5-2 5.4 CONSTRUCTION PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS REVIEW ...................................................... 5-2

APPENDIX A:

Site Location Map .................................................................................................................... A-1 Field Exploration Plans ........................................................................................... A-2 thru A-23 Summary of Test Boring, Percolation and Double Ring Infiltrometer Test Locations ........................................................... A-24 thru A-26 Soils Information Table ........................................................................................ A-27 thru A-33 Report of Core Borings ......................................................................................... A-34 thru A-38 Summary of Percolation Test Results ...................................................................A-39 and A-40 Summary of Double Ring Infiltrometer Test Results ........................................................... A-41 Field Testing Procedures ....................................................................................................... A-42

APPENDIX B:

Summary of Laboratory Test Results ....................................................................... B-1 thru B-3 Roadway Soils Survey ............................................................................................................. B-4 Laboratory Testing Procedures ................................................................................................ B-5 Laboratory Test Results – Soil Testing


1-1

1.0 INTRODUCTION

The purpose of this geotechnical exploration was to obtain information concerning the site and

subsurface conditions along the proposed bike lane construction at CR 905, from Ocean Reef to

North of SR 5/US 1 in Monroe County-Florida, and provide an evaluation of the suitability of the

in-situ materials. This report discusses our exploratory and testing procedures, presents our findings

and evaluation and includes the following items:

Field Services

• Performed thirty-nine (39) test borings (B-1 through B-39) each to a depth of 8 feet (except B-7 and B-15 which were performed to depths of 6 feet and 4 feet, respectively). The roadway borings were performed to help characterize the subsurface condition along the proposed roadway widening. The test borings subsurface information is presented on the Soils Information Table in Appendix A. Test Borings B-6A, B-6B, B-6C, B-6D, B-6E and B-7F, included in this investigation were performed for a previous geotechnical exploration for Card Sound Road and CR 905 Intersection Improvement, dated October 2005.

• Performed a total of 10 constant head percolation tests (P-1 through P-10) to one depth interval: from 0 to 15 feet. The percolation test results are presented in Appendix A. Percolation Tests P-2A, P-2B and P-2C, included in this investigation were performed for a previous geotechnical exploration for Card Sound Road and CR 905 Intersection Improvement, dated October 2005.

• Performed a total of 10 double ring infiltrometer tests (DR-1 through DR-10). The double ring infiltrometer tests results are presented in Appendix A.

• A brief description of our field testing procedures.

Evaluation

• A general review of existing surface features and site conditions. • Soils Information Table. • Report of Core Borings. • Roadway Soils Survey. • Percolation and double ring infiltrometer test results. • Roadway construction recommendations.

Laboratory Testing

• The results of laboratory tests performed on selected soil samples obtained from the roadway borings.

• A brief description of our laboratory testing procedures.


2-1

2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION

2.1 GENERAL

Project information for this subsurface exploration has been provided to us by Ms. Shari J. Ramirez,

P.E. Project Engineer of EAC Consulting, Inc. Additional information has been provided during

telephone conversations.

2.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

The project consists of the bike lane construction on either side along CR 905, from Ocean Reef to

North of SR 5/US 1 in Monroe County, Florida. The work consists of roadway widening including

construction of bike lanes/shoulders, drainage, milling and resurfacing.


3-1

3.0 FIELD EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING

3.1 FIELD EXPLORATION

The primary purpose of this field exploration was as follows:

1. To define the near subsurface conditions present along the section of the roadway to be

widened.

2. To obtain soil samples for examination and classification.

3. To conduct percolation and double ring infiltrometer tests for drainage design.

The field exploration was conducted by HRES. The roadway borings were performed to a depth of

8 feet measured from the existing ground surface.

The locations of the roadway borings, percolation tests and double ring infiltrometer tests are

provided in the Summary of Test Boring, Percolation and Double Ring Infiltrometer Tests

Locations in Appendix A. The Soils Information Table in Appendix A summarizes the

approximate boundary between soil types. In some instances, the transition between material types

may be gradual. A brief description of the exploratory sampling techniques used is presented in the

Field Testing Procedures section in Appendix A. A discussion of the subsurface conditions

encountered along the project alignment is provided in Section 4.2 of this report.

3.2 PERCOLATION TESTING

A total of 10 percolation tests (P-1 through P-10) were performed at selected locations. Additional

percolation tests (P-2A, P-2B and P-2C) were included in this study from a previous geotechnical

exploration. The percolation tests were performed in general accordance with the test procedures

outlined in Appendix A. The hydraulic conductivity values ranged as follows:

P-1 through P-10: 0 to 15 feet: 6.4E-05 to 4.9E-04 cfs/ft2-ft. of head.

P-2A, P-2B and P-2C: 0 to 10 feet: 2.8E-05 to 1.3E-04 cfs/ft2-ft. of head.

10 to 15 feet: 4.3E-04 to 7.0E-04 cfs/ft2-ft. of head.

15 to 20 feet: 4.4E-04 to 7.0E-04 cfs/ft2-ft. of head.

A summary of percolation test results is presented in Appendix A.


3-2

3.3 DOUBLE RING INFILTROMETER TESTING

A total of 10 double ring infiltrometer tests were performed at selected locations. The double ring

infiltrometer tests were performed in general accordance with the test procedures outlined in

Appendix A. The effective infiltration rate values ranged from 0.8 to 10.0 inches/hour for an

average of 5.6 inches/hour.

A summary of double ring infiltrometer test results is presented in Appendix A.

3.4 LABORATORY TESTING

3.4.1 Soil Testing

In order to aid in classifying and estimate engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials

encountered, laboratory classification tests were performed on representative soil samples obtained

from the percolation test and test borings. The laboratory testing program included the following:

• 49 Grain size distribution analyses

• 1 Fines content test

• 5 Organic content tests

In addition, 4 moisture content tests were also performed in conjunction with the classification tests.

The soil laboratory test results were classified following the AASHTO Classification System. The

test results are presented in Appendix B of this report.


4-1

4.0 SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

4.1 SITE CONDITIONS

The site conditions were observed by a geotechnical engineer during the months of June and July

2012.

4.2 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

4.2.1 Generalized Subsurface Conditions Encountered Along the Alignment

A total of six different layers of materials were observed during the drilling of the roadway

borings. Stratum 1a is asphaltic concrete. Stratum 1b is topsoil. Stratum 2 consists of limerock

base or silty fine sand with some limerock. Stratum 3 consists of silty fine sand with traces of

limerock. Stratum 4 consists of sandy organic silt or organic silty sand. Stratum 5 is the natural

limestone. For a detailed subsurface condition at a particular borehole location, please refer to

the Report of Core Borings and the Soils Information Table in Appendix A.

4.2.2 Groundwater Conditions

The groundwater levels were measured at the time of drilling. The groundwater level was

encountered at elevations ranging from 1.0 to 1.5 feet. A Seasonal High Ground Water Table

(SHGWT) of 2.0 feet, (NGVD29) is recommended for design. Fluctuation in the observed

groundwater levels should be expected due to seasonal climatic changes, construction activity,

rainfall variations, surface water runoff and other site-specific factors such as a storm surge.

Since groundwater level variations are anticipated, design drawings and specifications should

accommodate such possibilities and construction planning should be based on the assumption that

variations will occur.


5-1

5.0 ROADWAY CONSTRUCTION RECOMMENDATIONS

5.1 BASIS FOR RECOMMENDATIONS

The following construction recommendations are based upon our understanding of the conceptual

design information available at the writing of this report and the data gathered during our subsurface

exploration. The stratification of the subsurface materials underlying the site may vary within even

short lateral distances; therefore, any subsurface condition encountered which differs from those

documented in this study should be reported to us so that our recommendations can be reviewed.

5.2 SUITABILITY OF IN-SITU MATERIALS

Stratum 1a – This stratum is the asphaltic course.

Stratum 1b – This stratum is dark brown organic silty fine sand (topsoil, A-8). Laboratory testing on this material consisted of 2 organic content tests and 2 moisture content tests. The organic content ranged from 12 to 28 percent and the moisture content ranged from 24 to 42 percent. This material is unsuitable and should be removed during the clearing and grubbing in accordance with Section 110 of the FDOT Standard Specifications.

Stratum 2 – This stratum consists of brown limerock material (A-1-a/A-1-b) or light brown to brown silty fine sand with some limerock (fill, A-1-b). Laboratory testing on this material consisted of 38 sieve analyses. The fines content ranged from 9 to 25 percent. This material appears suitable for use as a general fill when utilized in accordance with FDOT Index 505. It cannot be used as base material.

Stratum 3 – This stratum consists of brown silty fine sand with traces of limerock (fill, A-2-4) or silty fine sand with traces of organics. Laboratory testing on this material consisted of 11 sieve analyses, 1 fines content test, 1 organic content test and 1 moisture content test. The fines content ranged from 17 to 28 percent, the organic content was 7 percent and the moisture content was 15 percent. This material appears suitable for use in the embankment when utilized in accordance with FDOT Index 505. However, this material is likely to retain excess moisture and be difficult to dry and compact. It should be used in the embankment above the water level existing at the time of construction. It cannot be used as stabilized subgrade or base material.

Stratum 4 – This stratum consists of dark brown organic silty sand or dark brown organic sandy silt with traces of limerock (A-8). Laboratory testing on this material consisted of 2 organic content tests and 1 moisture content test. The organic content ranged from 9 to 21 percent and the moisture content was 41 percent. This material was encountered at only 2 boreholes as follows:

B-6E (Sta. 491+00): from 5.5 to 6.0 feet, organic content=9%. B-8 (Sta. 468+99): from 4.0 to 5.0 feet, organic content=21%.

This material is unsatisfactory for use in the embankment, as fill, or stabilized subgrade and normally it is removed in accordance with index 500. However, the depth at which this material


5-2

was encountered makes its removal impractical. Therefore, we recommend that this material be left in place.

Stratum 5 – This stratum consists of the natural limestone. This material appears suitable for use as general fill when utilized in accordance with FDOT Index 505. This material typically offers a high resistance to excavation. Special equipment and breaking tools may be required to excavate it. This material is also difficult to dewater due to its high porosity and permeability.

5.3 CONSTRUCTION RECOMMENDATIONS

Based on the information obtained from the test borings, the roadway widening construction may

follow standard procedures that include the removal of the top soil followed by the construction of

the new pavement section. No additional soil improvements (muck removal, geogrid layers) are

needed for the construction of the bike lanes.

5.4 CONSTRUCTION PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS REVIEW

It is recommended that this office be provided the opportunity to make a general review of the

earthwork plans and special provisions prepared from the recommendations presented in this report.

We would then suggest any modifications so that our recommendations are properly interpreted and

implemented.

APPENDIX A

SITE LOCATION MAP A-1 FIELD EXPLORATION PLANS A-2 THRU A-23 SUMMARY OF TEST BORING, PERCOLATION AND DOUBLE RING INFILTROMETER TEST LOCATIONS A-24 THRU A-26 SOILS INFORMATION TABLE A-27 THRU A-33 REPORT OF CORE BORINGS A-34 THRU A-38 SUMMARY OF PERCOLATION TEST RESULTS A-39 AND A-40 SUMMARY OF DOUBLE RING INFILTROMETER TEST RESULTS A-41 FIELD TESTING PROCEDURES A-42


A-42

FIELD TESTING PROCEDURES

Test Borings - The test borings were made in general accordance with ASTM-D-1586,

"Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils." The borings were advanced using a 3-inch

ID casing and a rotary drilling process. At regular intervals, the drilling tools were removed and

soil samples were obtained with a standard 1.4-inch I.D., 2-inch O.D., split-tube sampler. The

sampler was first seated six inches and then driven an additional foot with blows of a 140-lb

hammer falling 30 inches. The number of hammer blows required to drive the sampler the final

foot is designated the "Penetration Resistance". The penetration resistance, when properly

interpreted, is an index to the soil strength and density.

Percolation Testing - The percolation tests were performed in order to estimate the hydraulic

conductivity of the materials encountered. The Constant Head method was used. The general

procedures outlined in the FDOT District 6, Drainage Section were followed. Each test was

performed in a 6.0-inch outside diameter hole initially pre-drilled to a depth of 15 feet (P-1 through

P-10) and to a depth of 10,15 and 20 feet (P-2A, P-2B and P-2C) below the existing ground surface,

using an hollow stem auger. Each borehole was then filled with water and the water level

maintained as close as possible to the ground surface. Once the inflow stabilized or came into

equilibrium with the outflow rate or seepage, the amount of water added for a period of 10 minutes

was recorded and the percolation rate calculated and reported in units of cfs/ft.2-ft. of head.

Double Ring Infiltration Testing – The test was performed in general accordance with ASTM D-

3385. Two open cylinders (12-inch and 24-inch I.D.) were driven into the ground approximately 3

inches, one inside the other. Both cylinders were then partially filled with water. A 4-inch head of

water was maintained in both rings during the test and the volume of water required to maintain the

level in both the inner and the outer rings was recorded every 15 minutes for a total time period of

240 minutes. Infiltration rates were calculated based on the cumulative water volumes and times

for the inner ring.

APPENDIX B

SUMMARY OF LABORATORY TEST RESULTS B-1 THRU B-3 ROADWAY SOILS SURVEY B-4 LABORATORY TESTING PROCEDURES B-5

LABORATORY TEST RESULTS – SOIL TESTING


B-5

LABORATORY TESTING PROCEDURES

Grain Size Distribution – The grain size tests were performed to determine the particle size and

distribution of sample tested. Each Sample was dried, weighed, and washed over a # 200 mesh

sieve. The dried sample was then passed through a standard set nested sieves to determine the grain

size distribution of the soil particles coarser than the # 200 sieves. This test was conducted in

general accordance with ASTM D-22.

Percent Fines Content – In this test, the sample is dried and then washed over a # 200 mesh sieve.

The percentage of soil by weight passing the sieve is the percentage of fines or portion of the

sample in the silt and clay size range. This test was conducted in general accordance with ASTM

D-1140.

Percent Organics (Organic Loss on Ignition) – The amount of organic material in a sample is

determined in this test. The sample is first dried and weighed, then ignited and reweighed. The

amount of organic material is expressed as a percentage.

Water Content – The water content is the ratio, expressed as a percentage of the weight of water in

a given mass of soil to the weight of the soil particles. This test was conducted in general

accordance with ASTM D-2216.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


Attachment B

USACE Environmental Resources Permit # SAJ-2012 03326 (NPR-IF) SFWMD No Notice General Permit

USFWS Coordination Letter

September 11, 2013 Ms. Judith S. Clarke, P.E. Director of Engineering Services 1100 Simonton Street Key West, Florida 33040 Service Federal Activity Code: 2013-CPA-0198 Service Consultation Code: 2013-TA-0275

Date Received: July 29, 2013 Project: CR 905 Bike Lane

Applicant: Monroe County County: Monroe

Dear Ms. Clarke: The U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (Service) has received your scoping request for the project referenced above. We offer the following comments.

PROJECT DESCRIPTION Monroe County has proposed to construct bike lanes on both sides of County Road (CR) 905 from US 1 to the Ocean Reef Club gatehouse at the north end of Key Largo, Florida. The project length is approximately 10.85 miles, and the work consists of constructing 8-foot wide shoulders with 5-foot wide paved bicycle lanes on both sides of the road from US 1 in Key Largo to approximately 3,500 feet south of the CR 905/Card Sound Road intersection. From 3,500 feet south of the intersection up to the entrance of Ocean Reef, the shoulders will be 6 feet wide and the paved bicycle lanes will be 4 feet wide. In addition, the County will be constructing stormwater swales, installing appropriate signage, removing and replacing some fencing and guardrails. The project is bounded to the east by Dagny Johnson Key Largo Hammock Botanical State Park (DJ Park) and to the west by the Crocodile Lake National Wildlife Refuge (CLNWR). All work will be located entirely within the existing cleared right-of-way; there will be some minor clearing and grubbing adjacent to the road, but no clearing of the surrounding trees and vegetation.

THREATENED AND ENDANGERED SPECIES Eastern indigo snake (Drymarchon corais couperi) The threatened eastern indigo snake uses a variety of habitat types in Florida. The project site and adjacent lands show habitat suitable for this species. While no eastern indigo snakes have been documented on North Key Largo since 1998, the Service recommends the applicant adhere to the 2013 Standard Protection Measures for the Eastern Indigo Snake to minimize the likelihood of taking an indigo snake while constructing the project (available at: http://www.fws.gov/northflorida/IndigoSnakes/20130812_Eastern_indigo_snake_Standard_Protection_Measures.htm).

http://www.fws.gov/northflorida/IndigoSnakes/20130812_Eastern_indigo_snake_Standard_Protection_Measures.htm

http://www.fws.gov/northflorida/IndigoSnakes/20130812_Eastern_indigo_snake_Standard_Protection_Measures.htm

Using the recommended protection measures for the indigo snake, the Service believes the proposed project is not likely to result in take of the threatened eastern indigo snake. Key Largo cottonmouse (Peromyscus gossypinus allapaticola) Key Largo woodrat (Neotoma floridana smalli) The endangered Key Largo cotton mouse is a subspecies of the cotton mouse (Peromyscus gossypinus). The Key Largo cotton mouse was first described by Schwartz (1952) as a medium-sized mouse with large ears, protuberant eyes, a reddish to dusky brown back, and white under parts. The body length of the Key Largo cotton mouse ranges from 6.7 inches to 7.5 inches, the tail ranges from 2.8 inches to 3.4 inches, and hind-foot length ranges from 0.8 inch to 0.9 inch. The Key Largo cotton mouse builds leaf-lined nests in logs, tree hollows, and rock crevices. The entrances measure 1.2 to 3.5 inches in diameter. The cotton mouse often partially covers entrances with leaves or bark. Their holes are usually located at the bases of trees, or near or in woodrat nests. They also use recently burned areas where bracken fern (Pteridium aquilinum) dominates ground layers (Goodyear 1985). The Key Largo cotton mouse feeds on leaves, buds, seeds, and fruits. They breed throughout the year and produce two to three litters annually. The average litter is four and the cotton mouse’s average life expectancy is 5 months. However, individuals may live for 2 to 3 years (Service 2009). The endangered Key Largo woodrat is a subspecies of the eastern woodrat (Neotoma floridana), which occurs widely in the eastern United States. The Key Largo woodrat is gray-brown with white underparts, large ears, protuberant eyes, and a hairy tail. The head and body length ranges from 4.7 to 9.0 inches, the tail length ranges from 5.1 to 7.4 inches, and the hind foot length ranges from 1.3 to 1.5 inches. Key Largo woodrats are active climbers, seem to have definite trails, and often use fallen trees to move over the forest floor. They, like other members of the genus Neotoma, have a habit of building large stick nests. Woodrats construct their nests out of sticks, twigs, and various other objects that they assemble into mounds that can reach 4 feet high and 6 to 7 feet in diameter. They frequently build their nests against a stump, fallen tree, or boulder and may use old sheds, abandoned cars, rock piles, and machinery as nest sites. Their nests have several entrances and a single, central nest chamber. Key Largo woodrats feed on a variety of leaves, buds, seeds, and fruits. They are capable of reproducing all year, although there are seasonal peaks. Reproductive activity is highest during the summer and lowest during the winter. Litter sizes range from one to four although a litter typically contains two young. Females can produce two litters per year, with both sexes reaching sexual maturity in about 5 months. The life expectancy of the Key Largo woodrat is unknown, but is probably similar to other subspecies of N. floridana, which may live for 3 years, but probably averages less than 1 year in the wild. Additional information regarding the life history of these species is available at: http://www.fws.gov/verobeach/ListedSpeciesMammals.html . The Key Largo woodrat and cotton mouse occupy the same area of the Keys and have nearly identical habitat requirements. Suitable habitat is tropical hardwood hammock in North Key Largo, north of the US 1 and CR 905 intersection, and tropical hardwood hammock extending south of this intersection to South Key Largo, but not including Tavernier. Although suitable

http://www.fws.gov/verobeach/ListedSpeciesMammals.html

hardwood hammock exists in South Key Largo, there have been no documented occurrences of either woodrats or cotton mice on South Key Largo in recent years. Residential and commercial development is considered the cause of extirpation of Key Largo woodrat south of the intersection of US 1 and CR 905 (Brown 1978; Hersh 1981). Approximately 880 hectares (2,175 acres) of suitable habitat remains (Humphrey 1988; Service 1999; McCleery 2003; Service 2003; FWC 2005), and individuals are found almost exclusively within public lands (CLNWR and DJ Park) (FWC 2005). A few private tracts adjacent to public lands contain suitable habitat and are vulnerable to urbanization. CLNWR and DJ Park were acquired in 1980 and 1982, respectively. Since initial acquisition, both sites have been managed to maintain and restore the native tropical hardwood hammock vegetation on which the Key Largo woodrat and cotton mouse depend, and have continued acquisition of remaining hammock habitat on north Key Largo. Many tracts on these sites were cleared for development or agriculture earlier this century, but hammock vegetation has returned to many of these previously cleared sites. The remaining forest is now composed of a variety of successional stages of tropical hardwood hammock vegetation, reflecting the time since and extent of disturbance. Much of the original tropical hardwood hammock on Key Largo was cleared in the past for development or agriculture, and the southern portion of Key Largo is nearly completely developed. Hardwood hammocks have been increasingly fragmented in the upper Keys because of roads and development activities. Habitat loss and fragmentation have caused the isolation of populations, and make these species more vulnerable to natural catastrophes such as hurricanes or fire, both of which have damaged significant portions of north Key Largo hammocks. The Key Largo woodrat requires a minimum habitat size for daily activities, and habitat destruction can directly reduce home range size and disrupt movement and dispersal patterns. The hammocks on north Key Largo are bisected by CR 905, a high speed road, which disrupts the integrity of the hammocks, acts as a barrier to woodrat movement, and may cause road mortality of dispersing woodrats (McCleery 2006). Physical separation caused by habitat loss and fragmentation leads to increased difficulty locating a mate and can isolate populations. Isolation of small populations reduces or precludes gene flow between populations and can result in the loss of genetic diversity. Any lack of recruitment of juveniles into the population will result in a decline of the population. Additionally, small, isolated populations are subject to inbreeding depression, which can cause populations to decline over time. The threat of losing irreplaceable genetic diversity is a concern and more information is needed to determine the role CR 905, including the existing right-of-way, plays in woodrat dispersal. No specimens of Key Largo woodrats were captured, observed, or counted within the vicinity of the CR 905A/CR 905 intersection during the 2-year FDOT wildlife surveys, but 18 cotton mice were counted during the final five monitoring events. However, neither of these species was observed during the field review conducted on June 2, 2012, on CR 905, from the CR 905/US 1 intersection to the gatehouse for the Ocean Reef Club. While there will be some minor clearing and grubbing adjacent to the road, there will be no clearing of the surrounding trees and woody vegetation in conjunction with this project. All work will be located entirely within the existing cleared right-of-way. During a 2002 study, 6 of the 16 woodrats that were tracked using radio

collars were located within 25 meters (82 feet) of CR 905, and none have been recorded on both sides of CR 905 (McCleery 2006). Additionally, no road mortalities were recorded during this same study. Based on the above information, the Service finds direct impacts such as habitat loss, or road mortality are unlikely to occur. When considering future improvement projects for CR 905, the Service recommends that Monroe County consider a study to determine the effects of CR 905 on woodrats and cotton mice. Results from such a study could be used to determine whether additional retrofits may be needed along CR 905 to allow safe passage for reconnection of populations across CR 905. Please note that Service review of this project in no way implies compliance with other Federal, State, County, or municipal regulations. It is the applicant’s responsibility to ensure that the project meets all applicable regulations. If modifications are made to the project, if additional information involving potential effects to listed species becomes available, if a new species is listed, or if designated critical habitat may be adversely affected by the project, reinitiation of technical assistance may be necessary. Thank you for the opportunity to comment and for your cooperation and effort in protecting Florida’s fish and wildlife resources. If you have any questions, please contact Shawn Christopherson at 772-469-4336.

REFERENCES Brown, L.N. 1978. Key Largo woodrat. Pages 11-12 in J.N. Layne, ed. Rare and endangered

biota of Florida. Mammals. University Press of Florida; Gainesville, Florida. Goodyear, N.C. 1985. Results of a study of Key Largo woodrats and cotton mice: Phase I, spring

and summer 1985. Unpublished report to North Key Largo Study Committee. Hersh, S.L. 1981. Ecology of the Key Largo woodrat (Neotoma floridana smalli). Journal of

Mammalogy 62: 201-206. Humphrey, S.R. 1988. Density estimates of the endangered Key Largo woodrat and cotton

mouse (Neotoma floridana smalli and Peromyscus gossypinus allapaticola), using the nested-grid approach. Journal of Mammalogy 69: 524-531.

McCleery, R.A. 2003. Aspects of Key Largo woodrat ecology. Master’s thesis. Texas A &M University, College Station. McCleery, R.A., R.R. Lopez, N.J. Silvy. 2006a. Movements and habitat use by the Key Largo woodrat. Southeastern Naturalist 4: 725-736. Schwartz. A. 1952. The land mammals of southern Florida and upper Florida Keys.

Unpublished Ph.D. dissertation, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor.

U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service. 1999. South Florida multi-species recovery plan. Atlanta, Georgia.

U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service. 2003. Captive propagation and reintroduction plan for the Key

largo woodrat (Neotoma floridana smalli). South Florida Ecological Services Office, Vero Beach, Florida.

U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service. 2009. Key largo cotton mouse, 5-year status review. Atlanta,

Georgia.

General Requirements

Section 01025 Measurements and Payment Section 01027 Applications for Payment Section 01200 Pre-Construction Meeting Section 01301 Submittals Section 01385 Daily Construction Reports Section 01395 Requests for Information Section 01630 Post-Bid Substitutions

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01025-1

SECTION 01025

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1.0 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall receive and accept the compensation provided in the Proposal and the Contract as full payment for furnishing all materials, labor, tools and equipment, for performing all operations necessary to complete the work under the Contract, and also in full payment for all loss or damages arising from the nature of the work, or from any discrepancy between the actual quantities of work and quantities herein estimated by the Engineer, or from the action of the elements or from any unforeseen difficulties which may be encountered during the prosecution of the work until final acceptance by the Owner.

B. The prices stated in the proposal include all costs and expenses for taxes, labor, equipment,

materials, commissions, transportation charges and expenses, patent fees and royalties, labor for handling materials during inspection, together with any and all other costs and expenses for performing and completing the work as shown on the details and specified herein. The basis of payment for an item at the unit price shown in the proposal shall be in accordance with the description of that item in this Section.

C. The Contractor's attention is again called to the fact that the quotations for the various items of

work are intended to establish a total price for completing the work in its entirety. Should the Contractor feel that the cost for any item of work has not been established by the Bid Form or Payment Items, he shall include the cost for that work in some other applicable bid item, so that his proposal for the project does reflect his total price for completing the work in its entirety.

2.0 MEASUREMENT

A. The quantities for payment under this Contract shall be determined for those completed items, in place, ready for service and accepted by the Owner, in accordance with the applicable method of measurement therefore contained herein. A representative of the Contractor shall witness any field measurements.

~~~~~~~~~~ END OF SECTION 01025

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 01027-1

SECTION 01027

APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section provides procedures for preparation and submittal of Applications for Payment. 1.2 FORMAT

A. The Application and Certificate for Payment including the Worksheet is the required format for submitting invoices. Copies of these forms are included in this section. In addition, the Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debits and Claims form used for final payment is included. The Owner reserves the right to modify the format to better suit his internal accounting system.

1.3 PREPARATION OF APPLICATIONS

A. The Contractor is required to adhere to the following procedure for filling-out the Application for Payment form.

1. Present required information in typewritten form. 2. List Contractor's schedule of values on the Application for Payment form identifying

the progress, retention, and payment amounts for each item as indicated on the form. 3. List each authorized Change Order on the form, including change order number, date,

change in dollar amount, and change in time amount, etc. as required. 4. Execute certification by notarized signature of authorized officer. 5. Attach to the Application for Payment, a completed and properly executed Affidavit

and Partial Release of Lien form also contained in this section. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Initial Payment Application: The following documentation must be submitted prior to processing the initial payment

application:

1. Approved schedule of values 2. Approved construction schedule 3. Approved submittal schedule

B. The initial Application for Payment will not be processed until the Contractor's construction

schedule, the schedule of values, and the initial submittal schedule have been received, reviewed, and approved by the Owner's Representative.

C. Submit an updated construction and submittal schedule and a partial release of lien with each

Application for Payment.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


D. Payment Period: Submit once per month, during the last week of the month. Payment will be made by the Owner approximately 30 days after receipt of completed documentation.

E. Submit one (1) copy of each Application for Payment. 1.5 SUBSTANTIATING DATA A. When the Owner's Representative requires substantiating information, submit data justifying

dollar amounts in question. B. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Indicate Application

number and date, and line item by number and description. 1.6 FINAL PAY REQUEST

A. When the work has been completed, the Contractor shall; submit a final application for payment, execute a Final Release of Lien and Contractor’s Affidavit of Release of Liens, Separate Releases or Waivers of Liens from Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers, submit Consent of Surety to Final Payment form and submit the Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts And Claims form as contained in this Section.

B. These documents will be furnished to the Owner on a form similar to those supplied.

Balance of Page Deliberately Left Blank

CONTRACTOR’S APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT

TO:(Owner)__________________________________________ FROM:(Contractor)_________________________________________APPLICATION NO.:________________________

PROJECT:_____________________________________________CONTRACT DATE:________________________________________ PERIOD ENDING:__________________________

NOTICE TO PROCEED EFFECTIVE DATE:_______________ CONTRACT DURATION: CONTRACT EXPIRATION:______________________________________ ____ _______________________

Change Order Summary

Number Date +/- Amount +/- Time

TOTAL C.O. AMOUNT: REVISED CONTRACT EXPIRATION DATE:

The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information and belief, the Work covered by this Application for Payment has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents, that all amounts have been paid by the Owner for Work for which previous Certificates for Payment were issued and payments received from the Owner, and that current payment is now due. CONTRACTOR:

BY:

DATE:

MONROE COUNTY’S CERTIFICATE OF PAYMENT In accordance with the Contract Documents, based on on-site observations and the data in the above application, the County Engineer certifies that to the best of the Engineer’s knowledge, information and belief, the Work has progressed as indicated, the quality of Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and the Contractor is entitled to payment of the AMOUNT CERTIFIED.

This Certificate is not negotiable. The AMOUNT CERTIFIED is payable only to the Contractor named here. Issuance, payment and acceptance of payment are without prejudice to any rights of the Owner or Contractor under this Contract.

Application is made for Payment, as shown below, in connection with the Application Worksheet which must be submitted with this application.

1. Original Contract Amount: $

2. Total Change Order Amount: $

3. Contract sum to date: $

4. Total Work Completed to date: (see I. on worksheet) $

5. Retainage: (10% of line 4) $

6. Total Earned minus Retainage: (line 4 less line 5) $

7. Previous Payments: (line 6, from previous application) $

8. Current Payment Due: (line 6 less line 7) $

9. Balance to finish, incl. Retainage: (line 3 minus line 6) $ -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

State of: County of:

Subscribed and sworn to me this _____ day of , .

Notary Public:

My Commission expires:

AMOUNT CERTIFIED FOR PAYMENT: $ (See Attached Explanation if Amount Certified differs from Application Amount)

COUNTY APPROVED: DATE: (Judith Clarke, P.E.) COUNTY APPROVED: DATE: (Roman Gastesi, County Administrator)

________________________________________________________________________________________

7/17/13A

PP

LIC

AT

ION

FO

R P

AY

ME

NT

01027-3

7/17/13A

PP

LIC

AT

ION

FO

R P

AY

ME

NT

01027-4

CONTRACTOR’S APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT - Worksheet

PROJECT NAME: APPLICATION NO.: APPLICATION DATE: __

A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. ITEM NO.

DESCRIPTION

QTY.

UNIT COST

TOTAL

AMOUNT

WORK COMPLETED FROM PREVIOUS THIS APPLICATION PERIOD

MATERIALS

STORED (NOT F OR G)

TOTAL WORK AND MATERIALS

(F + G + H)

%

(I/E)

TOTAL

CR 905 Bike Lanes


MONROE COUNTY AFFIDAVIT AND PARTIAL RELEASE OF LIEN

APPLICATION NO.: PERIOD ENDING DATE: APPLICATION DATE:

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that the undersigned, for and in consideration of the payment of the sum $ , to be paid to the undersigned, hereby releases, acquits, satisfies and forever discharges, MONROE COUNTY, OWNER, their successors and assigns from all suits, causes of action, liens, lien rights, claims or demands of any kind whatsoever, to the extent of the payment to date on account of the furnishing of labor, material or services for the improvement of the following described property:

As part of this PARTIAL RELEASE, THAT UNDERSIGNED HEREBY CERTIFIES the following: THAT the contract of the undersigned, as adjusted by all increases and decreases, is in the amount of $ , as of the date of the Partial Release and the undersigned has received $ as payment on the adjusted contract amount as of the date of this Partial Release. THAT all supplies of labor, material or services furnished to, or for the benefit of the undersigned for improvement to the subject property has been paid in full. Any and all suppliers of labor, material or services for improvement to the subject property, who have not been paid in full are listed below with the amount owing each, claimed by each and the reason for non-payment: (If none, write "NONE") CLAIMANT AMOUNT DUE AMOUNT CLAIMED REASON FOR NONPAYMENT ____________ _______________ ___________________ ______________________________ THAT all taxes imposed by all government agencies have been paid and discharged. THAT all funds have been collected for FICA and withholding taxes have been properly deposited with appropriate agencies or paid to the government as required by law. THAT the undersigned has no other claims for money against the OWNER other than those Subcontractors'/Suppliers' amounts remaining due and owing on the adjusted contract balance as reflected above. THAT the undersigned further certifies that if there is a Guarantee, Warranty or Maintenance Agreement in connection with the labor and material furnished by it, that this payment and PARTIAL RELEASE shall not release the undersigned from any obligations under such Guarantee, Warranty, or Maintenance Agreement.

WITNESS MY HAND THIS day of , 20 Witness Name of Company Witness Signature, Title

CR 905 Bike Lanes


MONROE COUNTY FINAL RELEASE OF LIEN

KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that

for and consideration of the sum of

Dollars ($ )

paid to

by Monroe County, Florida receipt of which is hereby acknowledged, do(es) hereby release and quit claim to Monroe County, Florida, the Owner, its successors or assigns, all liens, lien rights, claims or demands of any kind whatsoever which has (have) or might have against the property, building, and/or improvements, on account of labor performed, material furnished, and/or for any incidental expense for the construction of:

thereon or in otherwise improving said property situated as above described.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF THIS day of , 20 Witness Name of Company Witness Signature, Title Notary Public My commission expires:

CR 905 Bike Lanes


CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT OF RELEASE OF LIENS TO OWNER: CONTRACT FOR: (Name and address) CONTRACT DATED: PROJECT: (Name and address)

State of ___________________: County of _________________: The undersigned hereby certifies that to the best of the undersigned’s knowledge, information and belief, except as listed below, the Releases or Waivers of Lien attached hereto include the Contractor, all Subcontractors, all suppliers of materials and equipment, and all performers of Work, labor or services who have or may have liens or encumbrances or the right to assert liens or encumbrances against any property of the Owner arising in any manner out of the performance of the Contract referenced above.

EXCEPTIONS: SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS ATTACHED HERETO: 1. Contractor’s Release or Waiver of Liens,

conditional upon receipt of final payment. 2. Separate Releases or Waivers of Liens from

Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers, to the extent required by the Owner, accompanied by a list thereof.

CONTRACTOR: (Name and address)

By: ________________________________________

(Signature of authorized representative) __________________________________________

(Printed Name and Title) Subscribed and sworn to before me this Date: _________________________________ Notary Public: _____________________________

(SEAL)

My Commission Expires: ____________________

CR 905 Bike Lanes


CONSENT OF SURETY COMPANY TO FINAL PAYMENT

PROJECT: (Address) TO: (Owner) CONTRACTOR: In accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the (here insert name and address of Surety Company) , SURETY COMPANY, on bond of (Here insert name and address of Contractor) , CONTRACTOR, hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor shall not relieve the Surety Company of any of its obligation to (Here insert name and address of Owner) , OWNER, as set forth in the said Surety Company’s bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety Company has hereunto set its hand this day of 20 .

Surety Company Signature of Authorized Representative Title

CR 905 Bike Lanes


CONTRACTOR’S AFFIDAVIT OF PAYMENT OF DEBTS AND CLAIMS

TO OWNER: CONTRACT FOR: (Name and address) CONTRACT DATE: PROJECT: (Name and address)

State of: County of: The undersigned, pursuant to Article 9 of the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, hereby certifies that, except as listed below, he has paid in full or has otherwise satisfied all obligations for all materials and equipment furnished, for all work, labor, and services performed, and for all known indebtedness and claims against the Contractor for damages arising in any manner in connection with the performance of the Contract referenced above for which the Owner or his property might in any way be held responsible. EXCEPTIONS: (If none, write “None”. If required by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish bond satisfactory to the Owner for each exception).

SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS ATTACHED HERETO: 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment. Whenever

Surety is involved, Consent of Surety is required. AIA DOCUMENT G707, CONSENT OF SURETY, may be used for this purpose. Indicate attachment: yes ( ) no ( )

The following supporting documents should be attached hereto: 1. Contractor’s Release or Waiver of Liens,

conditional upon receipt of final payment. 2. Separate Releases or Waivers of Liens from

Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers, to the extent required by the Owner, accompanied by a list thereof.

3. Contractor’s Affidavit or Release of Liens.

CONTRACTOR: Address: By: Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of ,20 . Notary Public: My Commission Expires:

CR 905 Bike Lanes


CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROJECT: CONTRACT FOR: (Name and address) CONTRACT DATE: TO OWNER: TO CONTRACTOR: (Name and address) (Name and address) DATE OF ISSUANCE: PROJECT OR DESIGNATED PORTION SHALL INCLUDE: The Work performed under this Contract has been reviewed and found, to the Architect’s best knowledge, information and belief, to be substantially complete. Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. The date of Substantial Completion of the Project or portion thereof designated above is hereby established as

which is also the date of commencement of applicable warranties required by the Contract Documents, except as stated below:

A list of items to be completed or corrected is attached hereto. The failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. ARCHITECT BY DATE

The Contractor will complete or correct the Work on the list of items attached hereto within the above date of Substantial Completion. CONTRACTOR BY DATE

The Owner accepts the Work or designated portion thereof as substantially complete and will assume full possession thereof at (time), on (date). OWNER BY DATE

The responsibilities of the Owner and the Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance shall be as follows: Note - Owners and Contractors legal and insurance counsel should determine and review insurance requirements and coverage.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


~~~~~~~~~~ END OF SECTION 01027

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING 01200-1

SECTION 01200

PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Pre-Construction Meeting 1.2 LOCATION

A. A central site designated by the Director of Engineering Services.

B. Attendance:

1. Monroe County Director of Engineering Services. 2. The Contractor’s Superintendent. 3. Major subcontractors. 4. Major suppliers. 5. Utility Companies 6. Others as appropriate.

C. Suggested Agenda:

1. Distribution and discussion of:

a. List of major subcontractors and suppliers. b. Projected Construction Schedules, including critical working sequencing.

2. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 3. Project Coordination. 4. Channels and procedures for communication.

a. Designation of responsible personnel.

5. Procedures and processing of:

a. Field decisions.

b. Proposal requests.

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING 01200-2

c. Submittals and shop drawings. d. Change Orders. e. Applications for Payment. f. Bulletins

6. Distribution of the Contract Documents. 7. Rules and regulations governing performance of work. 8. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents. 9. Use of Premises:

a. Office, work, staging, and storage areas.

10. Construction facilities, controls and construction aids. 11. Temporary Utilities. 12. Safety and First-Aid procedures. 13. Housekeeping procedures. 14. Distribute meeting minutes within three (3) days by Owner.

~~~~~~~~~~ END OF SECTION 01200

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 SUBMITTALS 01301-1

SECTION 01301

SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Submit to the Owner’s Representative, submittal schedule, shop drawings,

product data, certifications and samples required by the Technical Specifications. B. Related Sections:

1. Individual submittals required: refer to each specific section, for certifications, shop drawings, product data and sample requirements.

C. The Contractor shall allow a minimum of seven (7) calendar days excluding holidays for

review of submittal by the Owner’s Representative. 1.2 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. The Contractor shall submit within seven (7) days of award of the Contract a preliminary "Submittal Schedule" to the Owners Representative for review, modification and response. No payment applications will be processed prior to finalizing the submittal schedule. The "Submittal Schedule" shall contain the following information:

1. Specification Section number and name. 2. Specification Section paragraph identification which describes submittal requirement. 3. Submittal information required, (i.e., sample, test data, shop drawing, etc.).

B. The Contractor shall also supply the following dates in order to meet the project schedule.

1. Date submittal is scheduled to be submitted and received by the Owner’s

Representative. 2. Date Contractor has scheduled to order material or other equipment or the submittal

item. 3. Date Contractor has scheduled delivery to job-site of material or equipment or the

submittal item. 4. Add any remarks or unique items that the Owner’s Representative should be aware of.

C. The Contractor shall allow a minimum of one (1) week for review of submittal by the Owner’s

Representative. (in calendar days).

D. The submittal master record will then be used to track submittals within the process.

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 SUBMITTALS 01301-2

1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Contractor shall submit legible shop drawings, suitable for reproduction. Prints that cannot be

reproduced will be returned to the Contractor for re-submittal. B. Provide shop drawings as complete submittals (no partial sets) on original drawings or

information prepared solely by the fabricator or supplier. Deviation from complete submittals will only be allowed by pre-arranged method.

C. Do not reproduce the Contract Drawings for shop drawing submittals. D. Sheet sizes shall not exceed the size of the Contract Drawings. E. Each print shall have blank spaces large enough to accept 4" x 4" review stamps of the CEI

and the Contractor. F. Each print shall carry the following information:

1. Project name and contract number. 2. Date. 3. Names of:

a. Owner b. The Contractor c. Supplier d. Manufacturer

4. Identification of product or material. 5. Relation to adjacent structure or materials. 6. Field dimensions, clearly stated as such. 7. Specification Section number. 8. Applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal Specification. 9. Identification of deviations from Contract Documents. 10. Reference to construction drawings by drawing number and/or detail number.

G. Submit prints without folds either as flat sheets if size permits, or rolled in tubes. H. The Contractor shall submit (1) reproducible and (1) copy to the Owner’s Representative.

The Owner’s Representative will return (1) copy to the Contractor. 1.4 PRODUCT DATA

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 SUBMITTALS 01301-3

A. Modify product data sheets to delete information which is not applicable to the Project.

Provide additional information if necessary to supplement standard information. B. Product data sheets that are submitted with extraneous information not deleted and/or

modified will be returned without review to the Contractor for re-submittal. C. The Contractor shall submit at a minimum, (1) original and (1) copy to the Owner’s

Representative. The Owner’s Representative will return (1) copy to the Contractor after review.

1.5 SAMPLES

A. Provide samples to illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship, and to establish standards by which completed work may be judged.

B. The Contractor shall submit (2) samples to the Owner’s Representative and (1) will be

returned to the Contractor after review. 1.6 CERTIFICATIONS

A. Provide certifications as required by various technical sections on the Contractor's letterhead stationary. Certifications shall be identified to this Project, dated and bear Contractor's signature in the same format used for the Owner/Contractor agreement.

B. Clearly identify the materials referenced and state that the material and the intended

installation methods, where applicable, are in compliance with the Contract Documents. Attach manufacturer's affidavits where applicable.

C. The Contractor shall submit (1) original and (1) copies to the CEI. The CEI will return (1)

sets to the Contractor after review. 1.7 THE CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Before making submittals to the Owner’s Representative, review each submittal, make changes or notations as necessary to conform to the Contract Documents, identify such review with review stamp and forward reviewed submittal with comments to the Owner’s Representative for review. Return submittals not meeting Contract requirements to subcontractors and do not forward such submittals to the Owner’s Representative.

B. Submit catalog sheets, product data, shop drawings and where specified, submit calculations,

material samples, color chips or charts, test data, warranties and guarantees all at the same time for each submittal item.

C. Verify field measurements and product catalog numbers or similar data. D. Clearly identify on the submittal and transmittal to the Owner’s Representative in writing of

deviations in submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents. E. After the Owner’s Representative’s review, distribute copies with one copy to be maintained

at the Project Site for reference use and other copies distributed to suppliers and fabricators.

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 SUBMITTALS 01301-4

F. Do not begin the Work which requires submittals until return of submittals with the Owner’s Representative’s stamp and initials indicating review.

G. The Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by the

Owner’s Representative’s review of submittals. H. The Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittals from requirements of the Contract

Documents is not relieved by the Owner’s Representative’s review of submittals unless the Owner’s Representative gives written acceptance of specific deviations.

1.8 THE ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES

A. The Owner’s Representative will review submittals with reasonable promptness, checking only for conformance with the design compliance of the Project and compliance with information given in the Contract Documents.

B. The Owner’s Representative will make changes or notations directly on the submittal, identify

such review with his review stamp, and return the submittal to the Contractor. C. The Owner’s Representative will return to the Contractor, without review, all submittals not

bearing the Contractor's review stamp or not showing it has been reviewed by the Contractor. D. The Owner’s Representative will forward submittals to the Contractor and retain one copy for

the Owner. The Contractor shall distribute copies including other copies distributed to suppliers and fabricators. The Contractor shall supply copies of reviewed submittals to the County's Inspector in sufficient quantity to allow proper coordination of the Contract.

~~~~~~~~~~

END OF SECTION 01301

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS 01385-1

SECTION 01385

DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS


A. Section includes:

1. Requirement for Daily Construction Reports by each Contractor. 2. Scheduled submission times for Daily Construction Reports.

1.2 FORM AND CONTENT OF DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports shall be submitted by each and every Contractor performing work on the project. Forms to be used will be furnished by the Project Engineer at the preconstruction meeting. Items to be addressed on the Report are:

1. Title of Project 2. Name of Contractor 3. Date and day of Report information. For example, you performed work on Thursday,

April 18, 1991, so you would therefore use “Thursday, 4/18/91.” This holds true even if you did not complete filling out the Report until Friday, 4/19/91.

4. Contract designation. 5. Note any major Shipments received on that particular day. 6. Note major equipment used that day. 7. Note manpower used, and designate what trades. For example, if you were the

mechanical contractor, you would also list how many insulators, pipefitters, etc., that you were also managing, even if they were subcontractors. In addition, list the names of the subcontractors that were on-site that day.

8. Note any deficiencies in your work, and corrective actions taken to resolve the

deficiencies. 9. Note any safety violations discovered, whether or not caused by your forces. 10. Provide a full description of work performed that day, and any problems or unusual

conditions discovered. 11. Report is to be signed by the authorized representative of the contractor, and should

the signature not be legible, print the name of the signer next to the signature. 1.3 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTING DAILY REPORTS

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORTS 01385-2

A. Daily Reports are to be submitted at the designated location described in the pre-construction

meeting. Contractors are to submit the original of their report, and should keep a copy for their records. The Project Engineer photocopying facilities are not to be used in the reproduction for submission of the reports.

B. Submit Daily Reports no later than 9:00am the day following the day of the work described in

that particular report. No exceptions to this rule will be accepted. Should contractor fail to comply with these instructions, the contractor’s payment application for the following month will be held in abeyance until such time the contractor properly submits the delinquent reports.

~~~~~~~~~~ END OF SECTION 01385

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION 01395-1

SECTION 01395

REQUEST FOR INFORMATION

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Notification to the Director of Engineering Services in the event of field conflicts or if errors or omissions are found in the Contract Documents.

B. Utilization of Request for Information form.

1.2 FORM AND CONTENT OF REQUEST FOR INFORMATION REPORTS

A. All field conflicts, and errors or omissions in the Contract Documents shall be brought to the attention of the Director of Engineering Services immediately. If clarifications are necessary, a completed Request for Information form is to be conveyed to the Director of Engineering Services. The RFI is a tool established to provide expedient clarifications of contract drawings, specifications or field conflicts. It is not meant to be a substitute for direct verbal communication.

B. In completing the RFI form, the contractor should propose a solution to the field conflict and

enter same on the form in sufficient detail necessary for the Director of Engineering Services to confirm the contractor's proposed solution. The contractor should also include any proposed change in contract price, if necessary, with the solution he proposes.

C. If omissions or errors are noted in the Contract Documents, a completed RFI form should be

submitted to the Director of Engineering Services identifying the omission or error. D. The contractor is also required to identify all other trade work which is affected by the

conflict, omission or error, and all trade work which will be affected by the proposed solution. 1.3 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION PROCEDURE

A. The RFI form is included in this Section for the contractor's use before and during the project. The form may be faxed to the Monroe County Engineering Department for a faster response at (305) 295-4321; however, the original must be mailed to the Monroe County Engineering Department before a response can be given.

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION 01395-2

From: To:

Phone: Fax: Phone: (305) 295-4329 Fax: (305) 295-4321

Project Name: Receipt Logged:

Submitted By: Date: Dwg/Spec No./Revision/Detail/Sect. No.

Drawing No.

Subject:

Problem & suggested solution:

Engineering Dept. ReviewSolution:

~~~~~~~~ END OF SECTION 01395

Monroe County Engineering 1100 Simonton Street Key West, Florida 33040

CR 905 Bike Lanes

7/17/13 POST-BID SUBSTITUTIONS 01630-1

SECTION 01630

POST-BID SUBSTITUTIONS


A. Section includes: Post-bid substitutions 1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Base Bid shall be in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. After the end of the bidding period, substitution requests will be considered only in the case

of:

1. Product unavailability

2. Other conditions beyond the control of the Contractor.

C. Submit a separate request for each substitution. Support each request with the following information:

1. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with requirements stated in Contract Documents:

a. Product identification, including manufacturer's name and address.

b. Manufacturer's literature, identifying:

1. Product description.

2. Reference standards.

3. Performance and test data.

c. Samples, as applicable.

d. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used and date of each installation.

2. Itemized comparison of the proposed substitution with product specified, listing

significant variations.

3. Data relating to changes in construction schedule.

4. Effects of substitution on separate contracts.

5. List of changes required in other work or products.

6. Accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product specified.

a. Amount of net change to Contract Sum.

7. Designation of required license fees or royalties.

8. Designation of availability of maintenance services, sources of replacement materials.

D. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when:

CR 905 Bike Lanes


1. A substitution is indicated or implied on shop drawings or product data submittals without a formal request from Bidder.

2. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.

3. In judgment of the Director of Engineering Services the substitution request does not include adequate information necessary for a complete evaluation.

4. Requested directly by a subcontractor or supplier.

E. Do not order or install substitute products without written acceptance of the Director of Engineering Services.

F. Director of Engineering Services will determine acceptability of proposed substitutions.

G. No verbal or written approvals other than by Change Order will be valid. 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION

A. In making formal request for substitution the Contractor represents that:

1. The proposed product has been investigated and it has been determined that it is equivalent to or superior in all respects to the product specified.

2. The same warranties or bonds will be provided for the substitute product as for the product specified.

3. Coordination and installation of the accepted substitution into the Work will be accomplished and changes as may be required for the Work to be complete will be accomplished.

4. Claims for additional costs caused by substitution which may subsequently become apparent will be waived by the Contractor.

5. Complete cost data is attached and includes related costs under the Contract, but not:

a. Costs under separate contracts. 1.4 POST-BID SUBSTITUTION FORM

A. The form is attached to this section.

B. Substitutions will be considered only when the attached form is completed and included with the submittal with back-up data.

CR 905 Bike Lanes


POST-BID SUBSTITUTIONS FORM To: Director of Engineering Services

Monroe County Engineering Dept. 1100 Simonton Street Key West, Fl. 33040

We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above project: DRAWING NO. DRAWING NAME SPEC. SEC. SPEC. NAME PARAGRAPH SPECIFIED ITEM

Proposed Substitution: Attach complete information on changes to Drawing and/or Specifications, which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. Submit with request necessary samples and substantiation data to prove equal quality and performance to that which is specified. Clearly mark manufacturer's literature to indicate equality in performance. The undersigned certifies that the function, appearance and quality are of equal performance and assumes liability for equal performance, equal design and compatibility with adjacent materials. Submitted By: Signature Title Firm Address Telephone Date Signature shall be by person having authority to legally bind his firm to the above terms. Failure to provide legally binding signature will result in retraction of approval. For use by the Director of Engineering Services:

CR 905 Bike Lanes


_____ Approved _____ Not Approved _____ Approved as noted _____ Insufficient data received By Date Fill in Blanks Below: A. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on Drawings? Yes _____ No _____ If yes, clearly indicate changes.

B. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs

caused by the requested substitution? Yes _____ No _____ If no, fully explain:

C. What effect does substitution have on other Contracts or other trades? D. What effect does substitution have on construction schedule? E. Manufacturer's warranties of the proposed and specified items are: _____ Same _____ Different. Explain:

F. Reason for Request:

G. Itemized comparison of specified item(s) with the proposed substitution; list significant variations: H. This substitution will amount to a credit or extra cost to the Owner of:

Dollars ($______________). I. Designation of maintenance services and sources: (Attach additional sheets if required.)

~~~~~~~~~~ END OF SECTION 01630

Technical Specifications

Contractor is to utilize all applicable sections from the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction 2013 . Section 101 Mobilization Section 102 Maintenance of Traffic Section 104 Prevention, Control and Abatement of Erosion and Water Pollution Section 110 Clearing and Grubbing Section 120 Excavation and Embankment Section 125 Excavation for Structures and Pipe Section 285 Optional Base Course

Section 334 Superpave Asphalt Concrete Section 339 Miscellaneous Asphalt Pavement

Section 520 Concrete Gutter Curb Elements and Traffic Separators Section 536 Guardrail Section 550 Fencing Section 570 Performance Turf, Sod Section 700 Highway Signing Section 710 Painted Pavement Markings Section 711 Thermoplastic Traffic Stripes and Markings

SECTION 101MOBILIZATION

101-1 Description. Perform preparatory work and operations in mobilizing for beginning work on the project, including, but not limited to, those operations necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the project site and for the establishment of temporary offices, buildings, safety equipment and first aid supplies, and sanitary and other facilities. Include the costs of bonds and any required insurance and any other preconstruction expense necessary for the start of the work, excluding the cost of construction materials.

101-2 Basis of Payment. 101-2.1 When a Separate Item is Included in the Proposal: When the proposal includes a separate item of payment for this work, the work and incidental costs specified as being covered under this Section will be paid for at the Contract lump sum price for the item of Mobilization. Payment will be made under:

Item No. 101- 1- Mobilization -lump sum. 101-2.2 Partial Payments: When the proposal includes a separate pay item for Mobilization and the Notice to Proceed has been issued, partial payments will be made in accordance with the following: For contracts of 120 contract days duration or less, partial payment will be made at 50% of the bid price per month for the first two months. For contracts in excess of 120 contract days duration, partial payment will be made at 25% of the bid price per month for the first four months. In no event shall more than 50% of the bid price be paid prior to commencing construction on the project site. Total partial payments for Mobilization on any project, including when more than one project or job is included in the Contract, will be limited to 10% of the original Contract amount for that project. Any remaining amount will be paid upon completion of all work on the Contract. Retainage, as specified in 9-5, will be applied to all partial payments. Partial payments made on this item will in no way act to preclude or limit any of the provisions for partial payments otherwise provided for by the Contract. 101-2.3 When No Separate Item is Included in the Proposal: When the proposal does not include a separate item for Mobilization, all work and incidental costs specified as being covered under this Section will be included for payment under the several scheduled items of the overall Contract, and no separate payment will be made therefore.

SECTION 102 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC

102-1 Description. Maintain traffic within the limits of the project for the duration of the construction period, including any temporary suspensions of the work. Construct and maintain detours. Provide facilities for access to residences, businesses, etc., along the project. Furnish, install and maintain traffic control and safety devices during construction. Furnish and install work zone pavement markings for maintenance of traffic (MOT) in construction areas. Provide any other special requirements for safe and expeditious movement of traffic specified in the Plans. MOT includes all facilities, devices and operations as required for safety and convenience of the public within the work zone. Do not maintain traffic over those portions of the project where no work is to be accomplished or where construction operations will not affect existing roads. Do not obstruct or create a hazard to any traffic during the performance of the work, and repair any damage to existing pavement open to traffic. Include the cost of any work that is necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents under the MOT pay item, when there is not a pay item provided.

102-2 Materials. Meet the following requirements:

Bituminous Adhesive ..........................................Section 970 Temporary Retroreflective Pavement Markers…Section 990 Paint ................................................................…Section 971 Removable Tape .................................................Section 990 Glass Spheres ......................................................Section 971 Temporary Traffic Control Device Materials .....Section 990 Retroreflective and Nonreflective Sheeting for Temporary Traffic Control Devices ..............Section 994

102-2.1 Temporary Traffic Control Devices: Use only the materials meeting the requirements of Section 990, Section 994, Design Standards and the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD).

102-2.2 Detour: Provide all materials for the construction and maintenance of all detours.

102-2.3 Commercial Materials for Driveway Maintenance: Provide materials of the type typically used for base, including recycled asphalt pavement material, and having stability and drainage properties that will provide a firm surface under wet conditions.

102-3 Specific Requirements. 102-3.1 Beginning Date of Contractor’s Responsibility: Maintain traffic starting the

day work begins on the project or on the first day Contract time is charged, whichever is earlier. 102-3.2 Worksite Traffic Supervisor: Provide a worksite traffic supervisor in

accordance with Section 105. Provide the worksite traffic supervisor with all equipment and materials needed to set up, take down, maintain traffic control, and handle traffic-related situations.

Ensure that the worksite traffic supervisor performs the following duties: 1. Performs on site direction of all traffic control on the project. 2. Is on site during all set up and take down, and performs a drive through inspection immediately after set up. 3. Is on site during all nighttime operations to ensure proper MOT. 4. Immediately corrects all safety deficiencies and does not permit minor deficiencies that are not immediate safety hazards to remain uncorrected for more than 24 hours. 5. Is available on a 24 hour per day basis and present within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation and is prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. 6. Conducts daily daytime and weekly nighttime inspections of projects with predominately daytime work activities, and daily nighttime and weekly daytime inspections of projects with predominantly nighttime work activities of all traffic control devices, traffic flow, pedestrian, bicyclist, and business accommodations. Advise the project personnel of the schedule of these inspections and give them the opportunity to join in the inspection as is deemed necessary. Submit a comprehensive weekly report, using the Department’s currently approved form, to the Engineer detailing the condition of all traffic control devices (including pavement markings) being used. Include assurances in the inspection report that pedestrians are accommodated with a safe, accessible travel path around work sites separated from mainline traffic in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Transportation Facilities, that existing or detoured bicyclist paths are being maintained satisfactorily throughout the project limits, and that existing businesses in work areas are being provided with adequate entrances for vehicular and pedestrian traffic during business hours. Have the worksite traffic supervisor sign the report and certify that all of the above issues are being handled in accordance with the Contract Documents. When deficiencies are found, the worksite traffic supervisor is to note such deficiencies and include the proposed corrective actions, including the date corrected. The Department may disqualify and remove from the project a worksite traffic supervisor who fails to comply with the provisions of this Section. The Department may temporarily suspend all activities, except traffic, erosion control and such other activities that are necessary for project maintenance and safety, for failure to comply with these provisions.

102-4 Alternative Traffic Control Plan. The Contractor may propose an alternative traffic control plan (TCP) to the plan presented in the Contract Documents. Have the Contractor’s Engineer of Record sign and seal the alternative plan. Prepare the TCP in conformance with and in the form outlined in the current version of the Department’s Plans Preparation Manual. Indicate in the plan a TCP for each phase of activities. Take responsibility for identifying and assessing any potential impacts to a utility that may be caused by the alternate TCP proposed by the Contractor, and notify the Department in writing of any such potential impacts to utilities. Engineer’s approval of the alternate TCP does not relieve the Contractor of sole responsibility for all utility impacts, costs, delays or damages, whether direct or indirect, resulting from Contractor initiated changes in the design or construction activities from those in the original Contract Specifications, Design Plans (including TCPs) or other Contract Documents and which effect a change in utility work different from that shown in the Utility Plans, joint project agreements or utility relocation schedules.

The Department reserves the right to reject any alternative TCP. Obtain the Engineer’s written approval before beginning work using an alternate TCP. The Engineer’s written approval is required for all modifications to the TCP. The Engineer will only allow changes to the TCP in an emergency without the proper documentation.

102-5 Traffic Control. 102-5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards are the minimum standards for the use in

the development of all TCPs. The MUTCD, Part VI is the minimum national standard for traffic control for highway construction, maintenance, and utility operations. Follow the basic principles and minimum standards contained in these documents for the design, application, installation, maintenance, and removal of all traffic control devices, warning devices and barriers which are necessary to protect the public and workers from hazards within the project limits.

102-5.2 Maintenance of Roadway Surfaces: Maintain all lanes that are being used for the MOT, including those on detours and temporary facilities, under all weather conditions. Keep the lanes reasonably free of dust, potholes and rutting. Provide the lanes with the drainage facilities necessary to maintain a smooth riding surface under all weather conditions.

102-5.3 Number of Traffic Lanes: Maintain one lane of traffic in each direction. Maintain two lanes of traffic in each direction at existing four (or more) lane cross roads, where necessary to avoid undue traffic congestion. Construct each lane used for MOT at least as wide as the traffic lanes existing in the area before commencement of construction. Do not allow traffic control and warning devices to encroach on lanes used for MOT. The Engineer may allow the Contractor to restrict traffic to one-way operation for short periods of time provided that the Contractor employs adequate means of traffic control and does not unreasonably delay traffic. When a construction activity requires restricting traffic to one-way operations, locate the flaggers within view of each other when possible. When visual contact between flaggers is not possible, equip them with 2-way radios, official, or pilot vehicles, or use traffic signals.

102-5.4 Crossings and Intersections: Provide and maintain adequate accommodations for intersecting and crossing traffic. Do not block or unduly restrict any road or street crossing the project unless approved by the Engineer. Before beginning any construction, provide the Engineer the names and phone numbers of persons that can be contacted when signal operation malfunctions.

102-5.5 Access for Residences and Businesses: Provide continuous access to all residences and all places of business.

102-5.6 Protection of the Work from Injury by Traffic: Where traffic would be injurious to a base, surface course, or structure constructed as a part of the work, maintain all traffic outside the limits of such areas until the potential for injury no longer exists.

102-5.7 Flagger: Provide trained flaggers in accordance with Section 105. 102-5.8 Conflicting Pavement Markings: Where the lane use or where normal vehicle or pedestrian paths are altered during construction, remove all pavement markings (paint, tape, thermoplastic, raised pavement markers, etc.) that will conflict with the adjusted vehicle or pedestrian paths. Use of paint to cover conflicting pavement markings is prohibited. Remove conflicting pavement markings using a method that will not damage the surface texture of the pavement and which will eliminate the previous marking pattern regardless of weather and light conditions.

Remove all pavement markings that will be in conflict with “next phase of operation” vehicle pedestrian paths as described above, before opening to vehicle traffic or use by pedestrians. Cost for removing conflicting pavement markings (paint, tape, thermoplastic, raised pavement markers, etc.) to be included in Maintenance of Traffic, Lump Sum.

102-5.9 Vehicle and Equipment Visibility: Equip all pickups and automobiles used on the project with a minimum of one Class 2 amber or white warning light that meets the Society of Automotive Engineers Recommended Practice SAE J595, dated November 1, 2008, or SAE J845, dated December 1, 2007, and incorporated herein by reference. Existing lights that meet SAE J845, dated March, 1992, or SAE J1318, dated April, 1986, may be used to its end of service life. Lights should be unobstructed by ancillary vehicle equipment such as ladders, racks or booms. If the light is obstructed, additional lights will be required. The lights shall be operating when a vehicle is in a work area where a potential hazard exists, when operating the vehicle at less than the average speed for the facility while performing work activities, making frequent stops or called for in the Plans or Design Standards. Equip all other vehicles and equipment with a minimum of 4 square feet of retroreflective sheeting or flashing lights. To avoid distraction to motorists, do not operate the lights on the vehicles or equipment when the vehicles are outside the clear zone or behind a barrier.

102-5.10 No Waiver of Liability: Conduct operations in such a manner that no undue hazard results due to the requirements of this Article. The procedures and policies described herein in no way acts as a waiver of any terms of the liability of the Contractor or his surety.

102-6 Detours. 102-6.1 General: Construct and maintain detour facilities wherever it becomes necessary

to divert traffic from any existing roadway or bridge, or wherever construction operations block the flow of traffic.

102-6.2 Construction: Plan, construct, and maintain detours for the safe passage of traffic in all conditions of weather. Provide the detour with all facilities necessary to meet this requirement. Where pedestrian facilities are detoured, blocked or closed during the work, provide safe alternate accessible routes through or around the work zone meeting the requirements of the ADA Standards for Transportation Facilities. When the Plans call for the Department to furnish detour bridge components, construct the pile bents in accordance with the Plans, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Submit a letter with the following: company name, phone number, office address, project contact person, project number, detour bridge type, bridge length, span length, location and usage time frames, to the Engineer at least 30 calendar days before the intended pick-up date, to obtain the storage facility location and list of components for the project. Upon receipt of letter, the Engineer will, within ten calendar days provide an approved material list to the Contractor and the appropriate Department storage yard. Provide a letter with an original company seal, identifying the representative with authority to pick up components, to the Engineer at least 10 calendar days before the proposed pick-up date. The Department is not obligated to load the bridge components without this notice. Take responsibility and sign for each item loaded at the time of issuance.

Provide timber dunnage, and transport the bridge components from the designated storage facility to the job site. Unload, erect, and maintain the bridge, then dismantle the bridge and load and return the components to the designated storage facility. Notify the Engineer in writing at least 10 calendar days before returning the components. Include in this notice the name of the Contractor’s representative authorized to sign for return of the bridge components. The yard supervisor is not obligated to unload the bridge components without this notice. The Department will provide equipment and an operator at the Department’s storage facility to assist in loading and unloading the bridge components. Furnish all other labor and equipment required for loading and unloading the components. The Departments representative will record all bridge components issued or returned on the Detour Bridge Issue and Credit Ticket. The tickets must be signed by a Department and a Contractor representative, after loading or unloading each truck to document the quantity and type of bridging issued or returned. Bind together all bridge components to be returned in accordance with the instructions given by the storage facility. The yard supervisor will repack components that are not packed in compliance with these instructions. Upon request, written packing instructions will be made available to the Contractor, before dismantling of the bridge for return to the Department’s storage facility. Assume responsibility for any shortage or damage to the bridge components. Monies due the Contractor will be reduced at the rate of $35.00 per hour plus materials for repacking, repairs or replacement of bridge components. The skid resistance of open steel grid decking on the detour bridge may decrease gradually after opening the bridge to traffic. The Department will furnish a pneumatic floor scabbler machine for roughening the roadway surface of the detour bridge decking. Provide an air compressor at the job site with 200 cubic foot per minute capacity, 90 psi air pressure for the power supply of the machine, and an operator. Transport the scabbler machine to and from the Department’s structures shop. Repair any damage to the scabbler machine caused by operations at no expense to the Department. Perform scabbling when determined necessary by the Engineer. The Department will pay for the cost of scabbling as Unforeseeable Work in accordance with 4-4. Return the bridge components to the designated storage facility beginning no later than 10 calendar days after the date the detour bridge is no longer needed, the date the new bridge is placed in service, or the date Contract Time expires, whichever is earliest. Return the detour bridging at an average of not less than 200 feet per week. Upon failure to return the bridge components to the Department within the time specified, compensate the Department for the bridge components not returned at the rate of $5.00 per 10 feet, per day, per bridge, for single lane; and $10.00 per 10 feet, per day, per bridge, for dual lane until the bridge components are returned to the Department.

102-6.3 Construction Methods: Select and use construction methods and materials that provide a stable and safe detour facility. Construct the detour facility to have sufficient durability to remain in good condition, supplemented by maintenance, for the entire period that the detour is required.

102-6.4 Removal of Detours: Remove detours when they are no longer needed and before the Contract is completed. Take ownership of all materials from the detour and dispose of

them, except for the materials on loan from the Department with the stipulation that they are returned.

102-6.5 Detours Over Existing Roads and Streets: When the Department specifies that traffic be detoured over roads or streets outside the project area, do not maintain such roads or streets. However, maintain all signs and other devices placed for the purpose of the detour.

102-6.6 Operation of Existing Movable Bridges: The Department will maintain and operate existing moveable bridges that are to be removed by the Contractor until such time as they are closed to traffic. During this period, make immediate repairs of any damage to such structures caused by use or operations related to the work at no expense to the Department, but do not provide routine repairs or maintenance. In the event that use or operations result in damage to a bridge requiring repairs, give such repairs top priority to any equipment, material, or labor available.

102-7 Traffic Control Officer. Provide uniformed law enforcement officers, including marked law enforcement vehicles, to assist in controlling and directing traffic in the work zone when the following types of work is necessary on projects: 1. Directing traffic/overriding the signal in a signalized intersection. 2. When Design Standards, Index No. 619 is used on freeway facilities (interstates, toll roads, and expressways) at nighttime for work within the travel lane. 3. When Design Standards, Index No. 655 Traffic Pacing for overhead work is called for in the Plans or approved by the Engineer. 4. When pulling conductor/cable above an open traffic lane on limited access facilities, when called for in the Plans or approved by the Engineer. 5. When Design Standards, Index No. 625 Temporary Road Closure 5 Minutes or Less is used.

102-8 Driveway Maintenance. 102-8.1 General: Ensure that each residence and business has safe, stable, and

reasonable access. 102-8.2 Construction Methods: Place, level, manipulate, compact, and maintain the

material, to the extent appropriate for the intended use. As permanent driveway construction is accomplished at a particular location, the Contractor may salvage and reuse previously placed materials that are suitable for reuse on other driveways.

102-9 Temporary Traffic Control Devices. 102-9.1 Installation and Maintenance: Install and maintain temporary traffic control

devices as detailed in the Plans, Index 600 of the Design Standards and when applicable, in accordance with the approved vendor drawings, as provided on the Department’s Qualified Products List (QPL) or the Department’s Approved Products List (APL). Erect the required temporary traffic control devices to prevent any hazardous conditions and in conjunction with any necessary traffic re-routing to protect the traveling public, workers, and to safeguard the work area. Use only those devices that are on the QPL or the APL. Immediately remove or cover any devices that do not apply to existing conditions. All temporary traffic control devices must meet the requirements of National Cooperative Highway Research Program Report 350 (NCHRP 350) or the Manual for Assessing

Safety Hardware 2009 (MASH) and current FHWA directives. Manufacturers seeking evaluation must furnish certified test reports showing that their product meets all test requirements set forth by NCHRP 350 or the MASH. Manufacturers seeking evaluation of Category I devices for inclusion on the QPL shall include the manufacturer’s self-certification letter. Manufacturer’s seeking evaluation of Category II and Category III devices for inclusion on the QPL shall include the FHWA WZ numbered acceptance letter with attachments and vendor drawings of the device in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to distinguish between this and similar devices. For devices requiring field assembly or special site preparation, vendor drawings shall include all field assembly details and technical information necessary for proper application and installation and must be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State of Florida. Manufacturers seeking evaluation of Category IV devices for inclusion on the QPL or APL must comply with the requirements of Section 990 and include detailed vendor drawings of the device along with technical information necessary for proper application, field assembly and installation. Ensure that the QPL or APL number is permanently marked on the device at a readily visible location. Sheeting used on devices is exempt from this marking requirement. Notify the Engineer of any scheduled operation which will affect traffic patterns or safety sufficiently in advance of commencing such operation to permit his review of the plan for the proposed installation of temporary traffic control devices. Ensure an employee is assigned the responsibility of maintaining the position and condition of all temporary traffic control devices throughout the duration of the Contract. Keep the Engineer advised at all times of the identification and means of contacting this employee on a 24 hour basis. Keep temporary traffic control devices in the correct position, properly directed, clearly visible and clean, at all times. Ensure that all traffic control devices meet acceptable standards as outlined in American Traffic Safety Services Association (ATSSA) “Quality Guidelines for Temporary Traffic Control Devices and Features”. Immediately repair, replace or clean damaged, defaced or dirty devices.

102-9.2 Work Zone Signs: Provide signs in accordance with the Plans and Design Standards. Meet the requirements of 700-2.5 and 990-8 Use only approved systems, which includes sign support posts or stands and attachment hardware (nuts, bolts, clamps, brackets, braces, etc.), meeting the vendor requirements specified on the QPL drawings.

Attach the sign to the sign support using hardware meeting the manufacturer’s recommendations and as specified in the Design Standards.

Provide Federal Highway Administration’s (FHWA) accepted sign substrate for use with accepted sign stands on the National Highway System (NHS) under the provisions of the NCHRP Report 350 “Recommended Procedures for the Safety Performance Evaluation of Highway Features.”

102-9.3 Business Signs: Provide and place signs in accordance with the Plans and Design Standards, Index No. 600 series. Furnish signs having retroreflective sheeting meeting the requirements of Section 990.

102-9.4 High Intensity Flashing Lights: Furnish Type B lights in accordance with the Plans and Design Standards.

102-9.5 Warning/Channelizing Devices: Furnish warning/channelizing devices in accordance with the Plans and Design Standards.

102-9.5.1 Retroreflective Collars for Traffic Cones: Use collars for traffic cones listed on the QPL that meet the requirements of Section 990. Use cone collars at night designed to properly fit the taper of the cone when installed. Place the upper 6 inch collar a uniform 3-1/2 inches distance from the top of the cone and the lower 4 inch collar a uniform 2 inches distance below the bottom of the upper 6 inch collar. Ensure that the collars are capable of being removed for temporary use or attached permanently to the cone in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide a white sheeting having a smooth outer surface and that has the property of a retroreflector over its entire surface.

102-9.5.2 Barrier Wall (Temporary): Furnish, install, maintain, remove and relocate a temporary barrier wall in accordance with the Plans. Ensure that temporary concrete barrier wall for use on roadway sections, complies with Design Standards, Index Nos. 412, 415 or 414 as specified in the Plans. Ensure that temporary concrete barrier wall for use on bridge and wall sections, complies with Design Standards, Index No 414 as specified in the Plans. Ensure that temporary water filled barrier wall used on roadway sections meets the NCHRP Report 350 criteria or the MASH and is listed on the QPL. Barriers meeting the requirements of Design Standards, Index Nos. 412, 415 or temporary water filled barriers on the QPL will not be accepted as an alternate to barriers meeting the requirements of Design Standards, Index No. 414.

102-9.5.3 Glare Screen (Temporary): Use temporary glare screens listed on the QPL that meet the requirements of Section 990. Furnish, install, maintain, remove and relocate glare screen systems in conjunction with temporary barrier wall at locations identified in the Plans. Ensure the anchorage of the glare screen to the barrier is capable of safely resisting an equivalent tensile load of 600 pounds per foot of glare screen, with a requirement to use a minimum of three fasteners per barrier section. When glare screen is utilized on temporary barrier wall, warning lights will not be required.

102-9.6 Temporary Crash Cushion (Redirective/Gating): Furnish, install, maintain and subsequently remove temporary crash cushions in accordance with the details and notes shown in the Plans, the Design Standards, and requirements of the pre-approved alternatives listed on the QPL. Maintain the crash cushions until their authorized removal. Repair all attachment scars to permanent structures and pavements after crash cushion removal. Make necessary repairs due to defective material, work, or Contractor operations at no cost to the Department. Restore crash cushions damaged by the traveling public within 24 hours after notification as authorized by the Engineer.

102-9.7 Guardrail (Temporary): Furnish guardrail (temporary) in accordance with the Plans and Design Standards. Meet the requirements of Section 536.

102-9.8 Arrow Board: Furnish arrow boards that meet the requirements of Section 990 as required by the Plans and Design Standards to advise approaching traffic of lane closures or shoulder work. Type B arrow boards may be used on low to intermediate speed (0 mph to 50 mph) facilities or for maintenance or moving operations on any speed facility. Type C arrow boards shall be used for all other operations on high-speed (50 mph and greater) facilities and may be substituted for Type B arrow boards on any speed facility.

102-9.9 Portable Changeable Message Sign (PCMS): Furnish PCMSs that meet the requirements of Section 990 as required by the Plans and Design Standards to supplement other temporary traffic control devices used in work zones.

A truck mounted PCMS may be used as a stand alone MOT device only when used for accident or incident management situations as defined in the MUTCD and is listed on the APL.

102-9.10 Portable Regulatory Signs (PRS): Furnish PRSs that meet the requirements of 990 as required by the Plans and Design Standards. Activate portable regulatory signs only during active work activities and deactivate when no work is being performed.

102-9.11 Radar Speed Display Unit (RSDU): Furnish RSDUs that meet the requirements of Section 990 as required by the Plans and Design Standards to inform motorists of the posted speed and their actual speed. Activate the radar speed display unit only during active work activities and deactivate when no work is being performed.

102-9.12 Temporary Signalization and Maintenance: Provide temporary signalization and maintenance at existing, temporary, and new intersections including but not limited to the following: (1) Installation of temporary poles and span wire assemblies as shown in the Plans, (2) Temporary portable traffic signals as shown in the Plans, (3) Adding or shifting signal heads, (4) Trouble calls, (5) Maintaining intersection and coordination timing and preemption devices. Restore any loss of operation within 12 hours after notification. Provide traffic signal equipment that meets the requirements of the Design Standards and 603-2. The Engineer may approve used signal equipment if it is in acceptable condition. Replacement components for traffic signal cabinet assemblies will be provided by the maintaining agency.

102-9.13 Temporary Traffic Detection and Maintenance: Provide temporary traffic detection and maintenance at existing, temporary, and new signalized intersections. Provide temporary traffic detection equipment listed on the APL. Restore any loss of detection within 12 hours. Ensure 90% accuracy per signal phase, measured at the initial installation and after any lane shifts, by comparing sample data collected from the detection system with ground truth data collected by human observation. Collect the sample and ground truth data for a minimum of five minutes during a peak and five minutes during an off-peak period with a minimum three detections for each signal phase. Perform the test in the presence of the Engineer.

102-9.14 Truck Mounted Attenuators and Trailer Mounted Attenuators: Furnish, install and maintain only those attenuators that meet the requirements of NCHRP 350 or the MASH. Use truck mounted attenuators or trailer mounted attenuators, when called for in the Design Standards. Use attenuators listed on the QPL. When attenuators are called for, use either a truck mounted attenuator or a trailer mounted attenuator system designed and installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Equip the attenuator cartridge with lights and reflectors in compliance with applicable Florida motor vehicle laws, including turn signals, dual tail lights, and brake lights.

Ensure that lights are visible in both the raised and lowered positions if the unit is capable of being raised. Ensure that the complete unit is painted DOT yellow (Fed. Std. 595 b, No. 13538). Stripe the rear facing of the cartridge in the operating position with the alternating 6 inch white and 6 inch safety orange 45 degree striping to form an inverted “V” at the center of the unit and slope down and toward the outside of the unit, in both directions from the center. In the raised position, place at least the same square footage of striping on the bottom of the cartridge as placed on the rear facing cartridge in the open position. Use Type III retroreflectorized sheeting for striping. Attenuators will not be paid for separately. Include the cost of the truck with either a truck mounted attenuator or a trailer mounted attenuator in MOT Lump Sum. Payment includes all costs, including furnishing, maintaining and removal when no longer required, and all materials, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals required for attenuator maintenance.

102-9.15 Temporary Raised Rumble Strip Sets: When called for in the Plans, furnish, install, maintain, remove, and reinstall temporary raised rumble strip sets. Install the temporary raised rumble strip sets per the manufacturer’s recommendations and in accordance with Design Standards, Index No. 600. The temporary raised rumble strip may be either a removable polymer striping tape or a molded engineered polymer material.

102-9.16 Automated Flagger Assistance Devices (AFAD): Furnish, install, maintain, remove and relocate AFADs in accordance with the Plans and Design Standards. Position AFADs where they are clearly visible to oncoming traffic and out of the lane of traffic. The devices may be operated either by a single flagger at one end of the traffic control zone, from a central location, or by a separate flagger near each device’s location. AFADs may be either a remotely controlled Stop/Slow AFAD mounted on either a trailer or a movable cart system, or a remotely controlled Red/Yellow Lens AFAD. AFADs will not be paid for separately. AFADs may be used as a supplement or an alternate to flaggers in accordance with Index 603. Include the cost for AFADs in Maintenance of Traffic Lump Sum.

102-9.17 Temporary Lane Separator: Furnish, install, maintain, remove and relocate temporary lane separator in accordance with the Plans and Design Standards, Index No 600. Anchor the portable temporary lane separator with a removable anchor bolt. Use epoxy on bridge decks where anchoring is not allowed. Remove the epoxy from the bridge deck by hydroblasting or other method approved by the Engineer.

102-10 Work Zone Pavement Marking. 102-10.1 Description: Furnish and install work zone pavement markings for MOT in

construction areas and in close conformity with the lines and details shown in the Plans and Design Standards. Centerlines, lane lines, edge lines, stop bars and turn arrows will be required in work zones prior to opening the road to traffic. The most common types of work zone pavement markings are painted pavement markings and removable tape. Other types of work zone pavement markings may be identified in the Plans.

102.10.2 Painted Pavement Markings:

102-10.2.1 General: Use painted pavement markings meeting the requirements of Section 710. Use standard waterborne paint unless otherwise identified in the Plans or approved by the Engineer.

102-10.3 Removable Tape:102-10.3.1 General: Use removable tape listed on the QPL and meeting the

requirements of 990-4. 102-10.3.2 Application: Apply removable tape with a mechanical applicator to provide pavement lines that are neat, accurate and uniform. Equip the mechanical applicator with a film cut-off device and with measuring devices that automatically and accumulatively measure the length of each line placed within an accuracy tolerance of plus or minus 2%. Ensure removable tape adheres to the road surface. Removable tape may be placed by hand on short sections, 500 feet or less, if it is done in a neat accurate manner.

102-10.3.3 Retroreflectivity: Apply white and yellow traffic stripes and markings that will attain an initial retroreflectivity of not less than 300 mcd/lx·m2 for white and contrast markings and not less than 250 mcd/lx·m2 for yellow markings. Black portions of contrast tapes and black masking tapes must be non-reflective and have a reflectance of less than 5 mcd/lx m2. At the end of the six month service life, the retroreflectance of white and yellow removable tape shall not be less than 150 mcd/lx·m2. 102-10.3.4 Removability: Provide removable tape capable of being removed from bituminous concrete and portland cement concrete pavement intact or in substantially large strips, either manually or by a mechanical roll-up device, at temperatures above 40ºF, without the use of heat, solvents, grinding or blasting.

102-10.4 Temporary Retroreflective Pavement Markers (RPM’s): Use markers listed on the QPL and meeting the requirements of 990-5. Apply all markers in accordance with the Design Standards, Index No. 600, prior to opening the road to traffic. Replace markers any time after installation when more than three consecutive markers fail or are missing, at no expense to the Department, in a timely manner, as directed by the Engineer.

102-11 Method of Measurement. 102-11.1 General: Devices installed/used on the project on any calendar day or portion

thereof, within the allowable Contract Time, including time extensions which may be granted, will be paid for at the Contract unit price for the applicable pay item, except those paid for as Lump Sum.

102-11.2 Traffic Control Officers: The quantity to be paid for will be at the Contract unit price per hour (4 hour minimum) for the actual number of officers certified to be on the project site, including any law enforcement vehicles and all other direct and indirect costs. Payment will be made only for those traffic control officers specified in the Plans and authorized by the Engineer.

102-11.3 Special Detours: When a detour facility is specifically detailed in the Plans, or is otherwise described or detailed as a special item, and an item for separate payment is included in the proposal, the work of constructing, maintaining, and subsequently removing such detour facilities will be paid for separately. Traffic control devices, warning devices, barriers, signing, and pavement markings for special detours will also be paid for separately. When the Plans show more than one detour, each detour will be paid for separately, at the Contract lump sum price for each. Where a separate item for a specific detour facility is included in the proposal, payment will be made under special detour.

102-11.4 Arrow Board: The quantity to be paid at the contract unit price will be for the number of arrow boards certified as installed/used on the project on any calendar day or portion thereof within the contract time.

102-11.5 Work Zone Signs: The number of temporary post-mounted signs (temporary regulatory, warning and guide) certified as installed/used on the project will be paid for at the Contract unit price for work zone signs. When multiple signs are located on single or multiple posts, each sign panel will be paid individually. Signs greater than 20 square feet and detailed in the Plans will be paid for under Lump Sum MOT. Temporary portable signs (excluding mesh signs) and vehicular mounted signs will be included for payment under work zone signs, only if used in accordance with the Design Standards.

102-11.6. Business Signs: The number of business signs certified as installed/used on the project will be paid for at the Contract unit price for business signs.

102-11.7 High Intensity Flashing Lights: The number of high intensity flashing lights (Type B) certified as installed/used on the project will be paid for at the Contract unit price for high intensity flashing lights (temporary - Type B).

102-11.8 Channelizing Devices: The number of Type I, Type II, direction indicator barricade, Type III, vertical panel, drum and longitudinal channelizing devices certified as installed/used on the project meeting the requirements of Design Standards, Index No. 600 and have been properly maintained will be paid for at the Contract unit prices for barricade (temporary). Payment will be made for each channelizing device that is used to delineate trailer mounted devices. Payment will be made for channelizing devices delineating portable changeable message signs during the period beginning 14 working days before Contract Time begins as authorized by the Engineer.

102-11.9 Barrier Wall (Temporary): The Contract unit price for barrier wall (temporary) will be full compensation for furnishing, installing, maintaining, and removing the barrier wall. When called for, the Contract unit price for barrier wall (temporary/relocate) will be full compensation for relocating the barrier. The certified quantity to be paid for will be determined by the number of sections times the nominal length of each section.

102-11.10 Lights, Temporary, Barrier Wall Mount: The number of Type C steady burn lights, mounted on barrier wall, certified as installed/used on the project, meeting the requirements of the Design Standards and have been properly maintained will be paid for at the Contract unit price for lights temporary, barrier wall mount.

102-11.11 Glare Screen (Temporary): The certified quantity to be paid for will be determined by the number of sections times the nominal length of each section.

102-11.12 Temporary Crash Cushions:102-11.12.1 Redirective: The quantity to be paid for will be the number of

temporary crash cushions (redirective) certified as installed/used and maintained on the project, including object marker.

102-11.12.2 Gating: The quantity to be paid for will be the number of temporary crash cushions (gating) certified as installed/used and maintained on the project, including object marker.

102-11.13 Temporary Guardrail: The quantity to be paid for will be the length, in feet, of temporary guardrail constructed and certified as installed/used on the project. The length of a run of guardrail will be determined as a multiple of the nominal panel lengths.

102-11.14 Advance Warning Arrow Panel: The quantity to be paid at the Contract unit price will be for the number of advance warning arrow panels certified as installed/used on the project on any calendar day or portion thereof within the contract time.

102-11.15 Portable Changeable Message Sign: The quantity to be paid at the Contract unit price will be for the number of portable changeable message signs certified as installed/used on the project on any calendar day or portion thereof within the contract time. Payment will be made for each portable changeable message sign that is used during the period beginning fourteen working days before Contract Time begins as authorized by the Engineer.

102-11.16 Portable Regulatory Signs: The quantity to be paid for will be the number of portable regulatory signs certified as installed/used on the project on any calendar day or portion thereof within the Contract time, will be paid for the Contract unit price for portable regulatory sign.

102-11.17 Radar Speed Display Unit: The quantity to be paid for will be the number of radar speed display units certified as installed/used on the project on any calendar day or portion thereof within the Contract Time, will be paid for the Contract unit price for radar speed display unit.

102-11.18 Temporary Signalization and Maintenance: For existing intersections, the quantity to be paid for will be the number of signalized intersections per day for the full duration of the Contract. For temporary intersections, the quantity to be paid for will be the number of signalized intersections per day for the duration of the temporary intersection. No separate payment will be made for temporary signalization and maintenance at new intersections.

102-11.19 Temporary Traffic Detection and Maintenance: For existing intersections, the quantity to be paid for will be the number of signalized intersections per day beginning the day Contract Time begins and ending the day the permanent detection is operational and the final lane configuration is in place. For temporary and new intersections, the quantity to be paid for will be the number of signalized intersections per day beginning the day the temporary detection is functional and ending the day: the permanent detection is operational and the final lane configuration is in place for a new intersection; or, when the detection is removed for a temporary intersection.

102-11.20 Work Zone Pavement Markings: The quantities, furnished and installed, to be paid for will be the length of skip and solid pavement markings, and the area of pavement markings placed as follows: (a) The total transverse distance, in feet, of skip pavement marking authorized and acceptably applied. The length of actual applied line will depend on the skip ratio of the material used. Measurement will be the distance from the beginning of the first stripe to the end of the last stripe with proper deductions made for unpainted intervals as determined by plan dimensions or stations, subject to 9-1.3. (b) The net length, in feet, of solid pavement marking authorized and acceptably applied. (c) The number of directional arrows or pavement messages authorized and acceptably applied. (d) The number of temporary RPM’s authorized and acceptably applied. 102-11.21 Temporary Raised Rumble Strips: The quantity to be paid for will be the number of temporary raised rumble strip sets certified as installed/used on the project on any calendar day or portion thereof within the Contract Time.

102-11.22 Temporary Lane Separator: The quantity of temporary lane separator to be paid for will be plan quantity, in feet, including drainage gaps, completed and accepted.

102-12 Submittals. 102-12.1 Submittal Instructions: Prepare a certification of quantities, using the Department’s current approved form, for certified MOT payment items for each project in the Contract. Submit the certification of quantities to the Engineer. The Department will not pay for any disputed items until the Engineer approves the certification of quantities.

102-12.2 Contractor’s Certification of Quantities: Request payment by submitting a certification of quantities no later than Twelve O’clock noon Monday after the estimate cut-off date or as directed by the Engineer, based on the amount of work done or completed. Ensure the certification consists of the following: (a) Contract Number, FPID Number, Certification Number, Certification Date and the period that the certification represents. (b) The basis for arriving at the amount of the progress certification, less payments previously made and less an amount previously retained or withheld. The basis will include a detail breakdown provided on the certification of items of payment in accordance with 102-13. After the initial setup of the MOT items and counts, the interval for recording the counts will be made weekly on the certification sheet unless there is a change. This change will be documented on the day of occurrence. Some items may necessitate a daily interval of recording the counts.

102-13 Basis of Payment. 102-13.1 Maintenance of Traffic (General Work): When an item of work is included

in the proposal, price and payment will be full compensation for all work and costs specified under this Section except as may be specifically covered for payment under other items.

102-13.2 Traffic Control Officers: Price and payment will be full compensation for the services of the traffic control officers.

102-13.3 Special Detours: Price and payment will be full compensation for providing all detour facilities shown in the Plans and all costs incurred in carrying out all requirements of this Section for general MOT within the limits of the detour, as shown in the Plans.

102-13.4 Commercial Materials for Driveway Maintenance: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work and materials specified for this item, including specifically all required shaping and maintaining of driveways.

102-13.5 Work Zone Signs: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work and materials for furnishing signs, supports and necessary hardware, installation, relocating, maintaining and removing signs.

102-13.6. Business Signs: Price and payment will be full compensation for all materials and labor required for furnishing, installing, relocating, maintaining, and removing the signs as well as the cost of installing any logos provided by business owners.

102-13.7 High Intensity Warning Lights: Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing, installing, operating, relocating, maintaining and removing high intensity flashing lights (Type B).

102-13.8 Channelizing Devices: Prices and payment will be full compensation for furnishing, installing, relocating, maintaining and removing the channelizing devices, including the costs associated with attached warning lights as required.

102-13.9 Barrier Wall (Temporary): Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing, installing, maintaining, and removing the barrier. When called for, barrier wall (temporary) (relocate) will be full compensation for relocating the barrier.

102-13.10 Lights, Temporary, Barrier Wall Mount: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work and materials for furnishing, installing and maintaining the warning lights mounted on barrier wall. Payment will not be made for lights that are improperly placed or are not working.

102-13.11 Glare Screen (Temporary): Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing, installing, maintaining, and removing the glare screen certified as installed/used on the project. When called for, glare screen (relocate) will be full compensation for relocating the glare screen.

102-13.12 Temporary Crash Cushion (Redirective/Gating): Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing, installing, maintaining and subsequently removing such crash cushions. Payment for restoring damaged crash cushions will be the manufacturer’s/distributor’s invoice price for the new materials/parts plus 20% markup. The 20% markup is compensation for all necessary work including; but not limited to, labor, equipment, supplies and profit, as authorized by the Engineer. Additional MOT required for the repair of the crash cushion will be paid for under the appropriate MOT pay item.

102-13.13 Temporary Guardrail: Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing all materials required for a complete installation, including end anchorage assemblies and any end connections to other structures and for installing, maintaining and removing guardrail.

102-13.14 Arrow Board: Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing, installing, operating, relocating, maintaining and removing arrow boards.

102-13.15 Portable Changeable Message Sign: Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing, installing, operating, relocating, maintaining and removing portable changeable message signs.

102-13.16 Portable Regulatory Signs: Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing, installing, relocating, maintaining and removing a completely functioning system as described in these Specifications portable regulatory signs. Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing, installing, operating, relocating, maintaining and removing portable regulatory signs. Payment will include all labor, materials, incidentals, repairs and any actions necessary to operate and maintain the unit at all times that work is being performed or traffic is being affected by construction and/or MOT operations.

102-13.17 Radar Speed Display Unit: Price and payment will be made only for a completely functioning system as described in these specifications. Payment will include all labor, hardware, accessories, signs, and incidental items necessary for a complete system. Payment will include any measurements needed to insure that the unit conforms to all specification requirements. Payment will include all labor, materials, incidentals, repairs and any actions necessary to operate and maintain the unit at all times that work is being performed or traffic is being affected by construction and/or MOT operations. Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing, installing, operating, relocating, maintaining and removing radar speed display unit.

102-13.18 Temporary Signalization and Maintenance: Price and payment will constitute full compensation for furnishing, installing, operating, maintaining and removing temporary traffic control signals including all equipment and components necessary to provide an operable traffic signal. Payment will be withheld for each day at each intersection where the temporary signalization is not operational within 12 hours after notification.

102-13.19 Temporary Traffic Detection and Maintenance: Price and payment will constitute full compensation for furnishing, installing, operating, maintaining and removing temporary traffic detection including all equipment and components necessary to provide an acceptable signalized intersection. Take ownership of all equipment and components. Payment will be withheld for each day at each intersection where the temporary detection is not operational within 12 hours after notification. 102-13.20 Temporary Raised Rumble Strips: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work and materials described in this Section, including all cleaning and preparing of surfaces, disposal of all debris, furnishing of all materials, application, curing, removal, reinstalling and protection of all items, protection of traffic, furnishing of all tools, machines and equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.

102-13.21 Work Zone Pavement Markings: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified including, all cleaning and preparing of surfaces, furnishing of all materials, application, curing and protection of all items, protection of traffic, furnishing of all tools, machines and equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Final payment will be withheld until all deficiencies are corrected. Removable tape may be substituted for work zone paint at no additional cost to the Department. Payment for temporary RPMs used to supplement line markings will be paid for under temporary retroreflective pavement markers. Install these markers as detailed in the Design Standards.

102-13.22 Temporary Lane Separator: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section.

102-13.23 Payment Items: Payment will be made under:

Item No. 102- 1- Maintenance of Traffic - lump sum. Item No. 102- 2- Special Detour - lump sum. Item No. 102- 3- Commercial Material for Driveway Maintenance - per

cubic yard. Item No. 102- 14- Traffic Control Officer - per hour. Item No. 102- 60- Work Zone Sign - per each per day. Item No. 102- 61- Business Sign - each. Item No. 102- 71- Barrier Wall - per foot. Item No. 102- 75- Temporary Lane Separator - per foot Item No. 102- 94- Glare Screen - per foot. Item No. 102- 73- Guardrail (Temporary) - per foot. Item No. 102- 74- Barricade (Temporary) - per each per day. Item No. 102- 76- Arrow Board - per each per day. Item No. 102- 77- High Intensity Flashing Lights (Temporary - Type B) - per

each per day. Item No. 102- 78- Temporary Retroreflective Pavement Markers - each. Item No. 102- 79- Lights, Temporary, Barrier Wall Mount - per each per day.

Item No. 102- 81- Crash Cushion (Gating) (Temporary) - per location. Item No. 102- 89- Crash Cushion (Redirective) (Temporary) - per location. Item No. 102- 99- Portable Changeable Message Sign (Temporary) - per each

per day. Item No. 102-104- Temporary Signalization and Maintenance - per

intersection per day. Item No. 102-107- Temporary Traffic Detection and Maintenance - per

intersection per day. Item No. 102-150- Portable Regulatory Sign - per each per day. Item No. 102-150- Radar Speed Display Unit - per each per day. Item No. 102-910- Temporary Raised Rumble Strip Set - per set per day Item No. 102-911- Removable Tape (White/Black) - per foot. Item No. 102-912- Removable Tape (Yellow) - per foot. Item No. 710- Painted Pavement Markings. Item No. 711- Thermoplastic Traffic Stripes and Markings.

SECTION 104PREVENTION, CONTROL, AND ABATEMENT OF

EROSION AND WATER POLLUTION

104-1 Description. Provide erosion control measures on the project and in areas outside the right-of-way where work is accomplished in conjunction with the project, so as to prevent pollution of water, detrimental effects to public or private property adjacent to the project right-of-way and damage to work on the project. Construct and maintain temporary erosion control features or, where practical, construct and maintain permanent erosion control features as shown in the Plans or as may be directed by the Engineer.

104-2 General. Coordinate the installation of temporary erosion control features with the construction of the permanent erosion control features to the extent necessary to ensure economical, effective, and continuous control of erosion and water pollution throughout the life of the Contract. Due to unanticipated conditions, the Engineer may direct the use of control features or methods other than those included in the original Contract. In such event, the Department will pay for this additional work as unforeseeable work.

104-3 Control of Contractor’s Operations Which May Result in Water Pollution. Prevent pollution of streams, canals, lakes, reservoirs, and other water impoundments with fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, or other harmful materials. Also, conduct and schedule operations to avoid or otherwise minimize pollution or siltation of such water impoundments, and to avoid interference with movement of migratory fish. Do not dump any residue from dust collectors or washers into any live stream.

Restrict construction operations in rivers, streams, lakes, tidal waters, reservoirs, canals, and other water impoundments to those areas where it is necessary to perform filling or excavation to accomplish the work shown in the Plans and to those areas which must be entered to construct temporary or permanent structures. As soon as conditions permit, promptly clear rivers, streams, and impoundments of all obstructions placed therein or caused by construction operations. Do not frequently ford live streams with construction equipment. Wherever an appreciable number of stream crossings are necessary at any one location, use a temporary bridge or other structure.

Except as necessary for construction, do not deposit excavated material in rivers, streams, canals, or impoundments, or in a position close enough thereto, to be washed away by high water or runoff. Where pumps are used to remove highly turbid waters from enclosed construction areas such as cofferdams or forms, treat the water by one or more of the following methods prior to discharge into State waters: pumping into grassed swales or appropriate vegetated areas or sediment basins, or confined by an appropriate enclosure such as turbidity barriers when other methods are not considered appropriate. Do not disturb lands or waters outside the limits of construction as staked, except as authorized by the Engineer.

Obtain the Engineer’s approval for the location of, and method of operation in, borrow pits, material pits, and disposal areas furnished for waste material from the project (other than commercially operated sources) such that erosion during and after completion of the work will not result in probability of detrimental siltation or water pollution.

104-4 Materials for Temporary Erosion Control. The Engineer will not require testing of materials used in construction of temporary

erosion control features other than as provided for geotextile fabric in 985-3 unless such material is to be incorporated into the completed project. When no testing is required, the Engineer will base acceptance on visual inspection. The Contractor may use new or used materials for the construction of temporary silt fence, staked turbidity barriers, and floating turbidity barrier not to be incorporated into the completed project, subject to the approval of the Engineer.

104-5 Preconstruction Requirements. At the Preconstruction Conference, provide to the Department an Erosion Control Plan meeting the requirements or special conditions of all permits authorizing project construction. If no permits are required or the approved permits do not contain special conditions or specifically address erosion and water pollution, the project Erosion Control Plan will be governed by 7-1.1, 7-2.2, 7-8.1, 7-8.2, and Section 104. When a DEP generic permit is issued, the Contractor’s Erosion Control Plan shall be prepared to accompany the Department’s Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP). Ensure the Erosion Control Plan includes procedures to control off-site tracking of soil by vehicles and construction equipment and a procedure for cleanup and reporting of non-storm water discharges, such as contaminated groundwater or accidental spills. Do not begin any soil disturbing activities until Department approval of the Contractor’s Erosion Control Plan, including required signed certification statements.

Failure to sign any required documents or certification statements will be considered a default of the Contract. Any soil disturbing activities performed without the required signed documents or certification statements may be considered a violation of the DEP Generic Permit. When the SWPPP is required, prepare the Erosion Control Plan in accordance with the planned sequence of operations and present in a format acceptable to the Department. The Erosion Control Plan shall describe, but not be limited to, the following items or activities: (1) For each phase of construction operations or activities, supply the following information: (a) Locations of all erosion control devices (b) Types of all erosion control devices (c) Estimated time erosion control devices will be in operation (d) Monitoring schedules for maintenance of erosion control devices (e) Methods of maintaining erosion control devices (f) Containment or removal methods for pollutants or hazardous wastes (2) The name and telephone number of the person responsible for monitoring and maintaining the erosion control devices. (3) Submit for approval the Erosion Control Plans meeting paragraphs 3a, 3b, or 3c below:

(a) Projects permitted by the Southwest Florida Water Management District (SWFWMD), require the following: Submit a copy of the Erosion Control Plan to the Engineer for review and to the appropriate SWFWMD Office for review and approval. Include the SWFWMD permit number on all submitted data or correspondence. The Contractor may schedule a meeting with the appropriate SWFWMD Office to discuss his Erosion Control Plan in detail, to expedite the review and approval process. Advise the Engineer of the time and place of any meetings scheduled with SWFWMD. Do not begin construction activities until the Erosion Control Plan receives written approval from both SWFWMD and the Engineer. (b) Projects permitted by the South Florida Water Management District or the St. Johns River Water Management District, require the following: Obtain the Engineer’s approval of the Erosion Control Plan. Do not begin construction activities until the Erosion Control Plan receives written approval from the Engineer. (c) Projects authorized by permitting agencies other than the Water Management Districts or projects for which no permits are required require the following: The Engineer will review and approve the Contractor’s Erosion Control Plan. Do not begin construction activities until the Erosion Control Plan receives written approval from the Engineer. Comply with the approved Erosion Control Plan.

104-6 Construction Requirements.104-6.1 Limitation of Exposure of Erodible Earth: The Engineer may limit the surface

areas of unprotected erodible earth exposed by the construction operation and may direct the Contractor to provide erosion or pollution control measures to prevent contamination of any river, stream, lake, tidal waters, reservoir, canal, or other water impoundments or to prevent detrimental effects on property outside the project right-of-way or damage to the project. Limit the area in which excavation and filling operations are being performed so that it does not exceed the capacity to keep the finish grading, turf, sod, and other such permanent erosion control measures current in accordance with the accepted schedule. Do not allow the surface area of erodible earth that clearing and grubbing operations or excavation and filling operations expose to exceed 750,000 square feet without specific prior approval by the Engineer. This limitation applies separately to clearing and grubbing operations and excavation and filling operations. The Engineer may increase or decrease the amount of surface area the Contractor may expose at any one time.

104-6.2 Incorporation of Erosion and Sediment Control Features: Incorporate permanent erosion control features into the project at the earliest practical time. Use temporary erosion and sediment control features found in the State of Florida Erosion and Sediment Control Designer and Reviewer Manual (E&SC Manual) to correct conditions that develop during construction which were not foreseen at the time of design, to control erosion and sediment prior to the time it is practical to construct permanent control features, or to provide immediate temporary control of erosion and sediment that develops during normal construction operations,

which are not associated with permanent erosion control features on the project. An electronic version of the E&SC Manual can be found at the following URL:

http://www.dot.state.fl.us/specificationsoffice/Implemented/URLinSpecs/Files/FLErosionSedimentManual.pdf Install all sediment control devices in a timely manner to ensure the control of sediment and the protection of lakes, streams, gulf or ocean waters, or any wetlands associated therewith and to any adjacent property outside the right-of-way as required. At sites where exposure to such sensitive areas is prevalent, complete the installation of any sediment control device prior to the commencement of any earthwork. After installation of sediment control devices, repair portions of any devices damaged at no expense to the Department. The Engineer may authorize temporary erosion and sediment control features when finished soil layer is specified in the Contract and the limited availability of that material from the grading operations will prevent scheduled progress of the work or damage the permanent erosion control features.

104-6.3 Scheduling of Successive Operations: Schedule operations such that the area of unprotected erodible earth exposed at any one time is not larger than the minimum area necessary for efficient construction operations, and the duration of exposure of uncompleted construction to the elements is as short as practicable. Schedule and perform clearing and grubbing so that grading operations can follow immediately thereafter. Schedule and perform grading operations so that permanent erosion control features can follow immediately thereafter if conditions on the project permit.

104-6.4 Details for Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control Features: 104-6.4.1 General: Use temporary erosion, sediment and water pollution control features found in the E&SC Manual. These features consist of, but are not limited to, temporary turf, rolled erosion control products, sediment containment systems, runoff control structures, sediment barriers, inlet protection systems, silt fences, turbidity barriers, and chemical treatment. For design details for some of these items, refer to the Design Standards and E&SC Manual. 104-6.4.2 Temporary Turf: The Engineer may designate certain areas of turf or sod constructed in accordance with Section 570 as temporary erosion control features. For areas not defined as sod, constructing temporary turf by seeding only is not an option for temporary erosion control under this Section. The Engineer may waive the turf establishment requirements of Section 570 for areas with temporary turf that will not be a part of the permanent construction. 104-6.4.3 Runoff Control Structures: Construct runoff control structures in accordance with the details shown in the Plans, the E&SC Manual, or as may be approved as suitable to adequately perform the intended function. 104-6.4.4 Sediment Containment Systems: Construct sediment containment systems in accordance with the details shown in the Plans, the E&SC Manual, or as may be approved as suitable to adequately perform the intended function. Clean out sediment containment systems as necessary in accordance with the Plans or as directed. 104-6.4.5 Sediment Barriers: Provide and install sediment barriers according to details shown in the Plans, as directed by the Engineer, or as shown in the E&SC Manual to protect against downstream accumulation of sediment. Sediment Barriers include, but are not limited to synthetic bales, silt fence, fiber logs and geosynthetic barriers. Reusable barriers that have had sediment deposits removed may be reinstalled on the project as approved by the Engineer. 104-6.4.6 Silt Fence:

104-6.4.6.1 General: Furnish, install, maintain, and remove silt fences, in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, these Specifications, the details as shown in the Plans, the Design Standards, and the E&SC Manual. 104-6.4.6.2 Materials and Installation: Use a geotextile fabric made from woven or nonwoven fabric, meeting the physical requirements of Section 985 according to those applications for erosion control. Choose the type and size of posts, wire mesh reinforcement (if required), and method of installation. Do not use products which have a separate layer of plastic mesh or netting. Provide a durable and effective silt fence that controls sediment comparable to the Design Standards and the E&SC Manual. Erect silt fence at upland locations, across ditchlines and at temporary locations shown in the Plans or approved by the Engineer where continuous construction activities change the natural contour and drainage runoff. Do not attach silt fence to existing trees unless approved by the Engineer. 104-6.4.6.3 Inspection and Maintenance: Inspect all silt fences immediately after each rainfall and at least daily during prolonged rainfall. Immediately correct any deficiencies. In addition, make a daily review of the location of silt fences in areas where construction activities have changed the natural contour and drainage runoff to ensure that the silt fences are properly located for effectiveness. Where deficiencies exist, install additional silt fences as directed by the Engineer. Remove sediment deposits when the deposit reaches approximately 1/2 of the volume capacity of the silt fence or as directed by the Engineer. Dress any sediment deposits remaining in place after the silt fence is no longer required to conform with the finished grade, and prepare and seed them in accordance with Section 570. 104-6.4.7 Floating Turbidity Barriers and Staked Turbidity Barriers: Install, maintain, and remove turbidity barriers to contain turbidity that may occur as the result of dredging, filling, or other construction activities which may cause turbidity to occur in the waters of the State. The Contractor may need to deploy turbidity barriers around isolated areas of concern such as seagrass beds, coral communities, etc. both within as well as outside the right-of-way limits. The Engineer will identify such areas. Place the barriers prior to the commencement of any work that could impact the area of concern. Install the barriers in accordance with the details shown in the Plans or as approved by the Engineer. Ensure that the type barrier used and the deployment and maintenance of the barrier will minimize dispersion of turbid waters from the construction site. The Engineer may approve alternate methods or materials. Operate turbidity barriers in such a manner to avoid or minimize the degradation of the water quality of the surrounding waters and minimize damage to areas where floating barriers installed. 104-6.4.8 Inlet Protection System: Furnish and install inlet protection systems as shown in the Plans, Design Standards and the E&SC Manual. 104-6.4.9 Rolled Erosion Control Products (RECPs): 104-6.4.9.1 General: Install RECPs in locations where temporary protection from erosion is needed. Two situations occur that require artificial coverings. The two situations have differing material requirements, which are described below. (1) Use RECPs composed of natural or synthetic fiber mats, plastic sheeting, or netting as protection against erosion, when directed by the Engineer, during

temporary pauses in construction caused by inclement weather or other circumstances. Remove the material when construction resumes. (2) Use RECPs as erosion control blankets, at locations shown in the Plans, to facilitate plant growth while permanent grassing is being established. For the purpose described, use non-toxic, biodegradable, natural or synthetic woven fiber mats. Install erosion control blankets capable of sustaining a maximum design velocity of 6.5 ft/sec asdetermined from tests performed by Utah State University, Texas Transportation Institute or an independent testing laboratory approved by the Department. Furnish to the Engineer, two certified copies of manufacturers test reports showing that the erosion control blankets meet the requirements of this Specification. Certification must be attested, by a person having legal authority to bind the manufacturing company. Also, furnish two 4 by 8 inch samples for product identification. The manufacturers test records shall be made available to the Department upon request. Leave the material in place, as installed, to biodegrade.

104-6.4.10 Chemical Treatment: Provide chemical treatment in accordance with the E&SC Manual. Chemical treatment may be used to clarify turbid or sediment laden water that does not yet meet state water quality standards or as an amendment to other erosion prevention and sediment control products to aid in their performance. The contractor must provide all of the required toxicity testing information in accordance with the E&SC Manual to the Engineer for review and acceptance prior to using any chemical treatment on the project site.

104-6.5 Removal of Temporary Erosion Control Features: In general, remove or incorporate into the soil any temporary erosion control features existing at the time of construction of the permanent erosion control features in an area of the project in such a manner that no detrimental effect will result. The Engineer may direct that temporary features be left in place.

104-7 Maintenance of Erosion and Sediment Control Features.104-7.1 General: Provide routine maintenance of permanent and temporary erosion and

sediment control features, at no expense to the Department, until the project is complete and accepted. If reconstruction of such erosion and sediment control features is necessary due to the Contractor’s negligence or carelessness or, in the case of temporary erosion and sediment control features, failure by the Contractor to install permanent erosion control features as scheduled, the Contractor shall replace such erosion control features at no expense to the Department. If reconstruction of permanent or temporary erosion and sediment control features is necessary due to factors beyond the control of the Contractor, the Department will pay for replacement under the appropriate Contract pay item or items. Inspect all erosion and sediment control features at least once every seven calendar days and within 24 hours of the end of a storm of 0.50 inches or greater. Maintain all erosion control features as required in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan, Contractor’s Erosion Control Plan and as specified in the State of Florida Department of Environmental Protection Generic Permit for Stormwater Discharge from Large and Small Construction Activities.

104-8 Protection During Suspension of Contract Time. If it is necessary to suspend the construction operations for any appreciable length of time, shape the top of the earthwork in such a manner to permit runoff of rainwater, and construct earth berms along the top edges of embankments to intercept runoff water. Provide

temporary slope drains to carry runoff from cuts and embankments that are in the vicinity of rivers, streams, canals, lakes, and impoundments. Locate slope drains at intervals of approximately 500 feet, and stabilize them by paving or by covering with waterproof materials. Should such preventive measures fail, immediately take such other action as necessary to effectively prevent erosion and siltation. The Engineer may direct the Contractor to perform, during such suspensions of operations, any other erosion and sediment control work deemed necessary.

104-9 Method of Measurement.When separate items for temporary erosion control features are included in the Contract,

the quantities to be paid for will be: (1) the area, in square yards, of rolled erosion control products; (2) the length, in feet, of runoff control structures, measured along the surface of the work constructed; (3) the number of sediment containment systems constructed and accepted; (4) the number of sediment containment system cleanouts accomplished and accepted; (5) the length, in feet, of sediment barriers; (6) the length, in feet, of floating turbidity barrier; (7) the length, in feet, of staked turbidity barrier; (8) the number of inlet protection systems; (9) the area, in square yards, of chemical treatment.(10) the number of floc logs or drums of product for chemical treatment. Upon acceptance by the Engineer, the quantity of floating turbidity barriers, sediment barriers, staked turbidity barriers, and inlet protection devices will be paid for regardless of whether materials are new, used, or relocated from a previous installation on the project.

104-10 Basis of Payment. Prices and payments will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section,

including construction and routine maintenance of temporary erosion control features. Any additional costs resulting from compliance with the requirements of this Section, other than construction, routine maintenance, and removal of temporary erosion control features, will be included in the Contract unit prices for the item or items to which such costs are related. The work of performance turf designated as a temporary erosion control feature in accordance with 104-6.4.2 will be paid for under the appropriate pay items specified in Sections 570 and 580. Separate payment will not be made for the cost of constructing temporary earth berms along the edges of the roadways to prevent erosion during grading and subsequent operations. The Contractor shall include these costs in the Contract prices for grading items. Additional temporary erosion control features constructed as directed by the Engineer will be paid for as unforeseeable work. In case of repeated failure on the part of the Contractor to control erosion, pollution, or siltation, the Engineer reserves the right to employ outside assistance or to use the Department’s own forces to provide the necessary corrective measures. Any such costs incurred, including engineering costs, will be charged to the Contractor and appropriate deductions made from the monthly progress estimate. Payment will be made under:

Item No. 104- 1- Artificial Coverings/ Rolled Erosion Control Products - per square yard.

Item No. 104- 6- Slope Drains (Temporary)/ Runoff Control Structures - per foot.

Item No. 104- 7- Sediment Basins/ Containment Systems - each.Item No. 104- 9- Sediment Basin/ Containment system Cleanouts - each.Item No. 104- 10- Sediment Barriers – per foot Item No. 104- 11- Floating Turbidity Barrier - per foot. Item No. 104- 12- Staked Turbidity Barrier - per foot. Item No. 104- 18 Inlet Protection System – each.Item No. 104- 19 Chemical Treatment – per square yard. Item No. 104 – 20 Chemical Treatment (floc logs, drums of product) - each.

CLEARING CONSTRUCTION SITE

SECTION 110CLEARING AND GRUBBING

110-1 Description. Clear and grub within the areas of the roadway right-of-way and of borrow pits, sand-clay base material pits, lateral ditches, and any other areas shown in the Plans to be cleared and grubbed. Remove and dispose of all trees, stumps, roots and other such protruding objects, buildings, structures, appurtenances, existing flexible asphalt pavement, and other facilities necessary to prepare the area for the proposed construction. Remove and dispose of all product and debris not required to be salvaged or not required to complete the construction.

Also, perform certain miscellaneous work the Engineer considers necessary for the complete preparation of the overall project site, as follows: (a) Plug any water wells that are encountered within the right-of-way and that are to be abandoned. (b) Level the terrain outside the limits of construction for purposes of facilitating maintenance and other post-construction operations in accordance with 110-10.3. (c) Trim trees and shrubs within the project right-of-way that are identified in the Contract Documents.

Meet the requirements for such miscellaneous work as specified in 110-10.

110-2 Standard Clearing and Grubbing.110-2.1 Work Included: Completely remove and dispose of all buildings, timber, brush,

stumps, roots, rubbish, debris, and all other obstructions resting on or protruding through the surface of the existing ground and the surface of excavated areas, and all other structures and obstructions necessary to be removed and for which other items of the Contract do not specify the removal thereof, including septic tanks, building foundations, and pipes. Perform Standard Clearing and Grubbing within the following areas: (a) All areas where excavation is to be done, including borrow pits, lateral ditches, right-of-way ditches, etc. (b) All areas where roadway embankments will be constructed. (c) All areas where structures will be constructed, including pipe culverts and other pipe lines.

110-2.2 Depths of Removal of Roots, Stumps, and Other Debris: In all areas where excavation is to be performed, or roadway embankments are to be constructed, remove roots and other debris to a depth of 12 inches below the ground surface. Remove roots and other debris from all excavated material to be used in the construction of roadway embankment or roadway base. Plow the surface to a depth of at least 6 inches, and remove all roots thereby exposed to a depth of at least 12 inches. Completely remove and dispose of all stumps within the roadway right-of-way. Remove all roots, etc., protruding through or appearing on the surface of the completed excavation within the roadway area and for structures, to a depth of at least 12 inches below the finished excavation surface.

Remove or cut off all stumps, roots, etc., below the surface of the completed excavation in borrow pits, material pits, and lateral ditches. In borrow and material pits, do not perform any clearing or grubbing within 3 feet inside the right-of-way line. Within all other areas where Standard Clearing and Grubbing is to be performed remove roots and other debris projecting through or appearing on the surface of the original ground to a depth of 12 inches below the surface, but do not plow or harrow these areas.

110-2.3 Trees to Remain: As an exception to the above provisions, where so directed by the Engineer, trim, protect, and leave standing desirable trees within the roadway area. Trim branches of trees extending over the area occupied by the roadway as directed, to give a clear height of 16 feet above the roadway.

110-2.4 Boulders: Remove any boulders encountered in the roadway excavation (other than as permitted under the provisions of 120-7.2) or found on the surface of the ground. When approved by the Engineer place boulders in neat piles inside the right of way. The Contractor may stockpile boulders encountered in Department-furnished borrow areas, which are not suitable for use in the embankment construction, within the borrow area.

110-3 Selective Clearing and Grubbing. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all vegetation, obstructions, etc., as provided above except that, where so elected, the Contractor may cut roots, etc., flush with the ground surface. Completely remove and dispose of stumps. Entirely remove undergrowth except in specific areas designated by the Engineer to remain for aesthetic purposes. Trim, protect, and leave standing desirable trees, with the exception of such trees as the Engineer may designate to be removed in order to facilitate right-of-way maintenance. Remove undesirable or damaged trees as so designated by the Engineer. Perform Selective Clearing and Grubbing only in areas so designated in the Plans.

110-4 Protection of Property Remaining in Place. Protect and do not displace property obstructions which are to remain in place, such as buildings, sewers, drains, water or gas pipes, conduits, poles, walls, posts, bridges, etc.

110-5 Removal of Buildings. 110-5.1 Parts to be Removed: Completely remove all parts of the buildings, including

utilities, plumbing, foundations, floors, basements, steps, connecting concrete sidewalks or other pavement, septic tanks, and any other appurtenances, by any practical manner which is not detrimental to other property and improvements. Remove utilities to the point of connection to the utility authority’s cut-in. After removing the sewer connections to the point of cut-in, construct a concrete plug at the cut-in point, as directed by the Engineer, except where the utility owners may elect to perform their own plugging. Contact the appropriate utility companies prior to removal of any part of the building to ensure disconnection of services.

110-5.2 Removal by Others: Where buildings within the area to be cleared and grubbed are so specified to be removed by others, remove and dispose of any foundations, curtain walls, concrete floors, basements or other foundation parts which might be left in place after such removal of buildings by others.

110-6 Removal of Existing Structures.110-6.1 Structures to be Removed: Remove and dispose of the materials from existing

structures. Remove the following: (1) those structures, or portions of structures, shown in the Plans to be removed; (2) those structures, or portions of structures, found within the limits of the area to be cleared and grubbed, and directed by the Engineer to be removed; (3) those structures, or portion of structures, which are necessary to be removed in order to construct new structures; and (4) other appurtenances or obstructions which may be designated in the Contract Documents as to be included in an item of payment for the work under this Article. Provide detailed schedule information to the Engineer 15 working days prior to the commencement of any demolition or renovation of any structures, even if asbestos is not found on the project, for the Engineer’s use in notifying the Department of Environmental Protection (DEP) on DEP Form 62-257.900(1) “Notice of Asbestos Renovation or Demolition”.

110-6.2 Method of Removal: 110-6.2.1 General: Remove the structures in such a way so as to leave no obstructions to any proposed new structures or to any waterways. Pull, cut off, or break off pilings to the requirements of the permit or other Contract Documents, or if not specified, not less than 2 feet below the finish ground line. In the event that the Plans indicate channel excavation to be done by others, consider the finish ground line as the limits of such excavation. For materials which are to remain the property of the Department or are to be salvaged for use in temporary structures, avoid damage to such materials, and entirely remove all bolts, nails, etc. from timbers to be so salvaged. Mark structural steel members for identification as directed. 110-6.2.2 Removal of Steel Members With Hazardous Coatings: Provide to the Engineer for approval, a copy of the “Contractor’s Lead in Construction Compliance Program” from the firm actually removing and disposing of these steel members before anymembers are disturbed. Vacuum power tool clean any coated steel member to bare metal as defined by SSPC-SP11 a minimum of 4 inches either side of any area to be heated (torch cutting, sawing, grinding, etc.) in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.354. Abrasive blasting is prohibited. Provide air supplied respirators in accordance with 29 CFR 1926.62 and 29 CFR 1910.134.

110-6.3 Partial Removal of Bridges: On concrete bridges to be partially removed and widened, remove concrete by manually or mechanically operated pavement breakers, by concrete saws, by chipping hammers, or by hydro-demolition methods. Do not use explosives. Where concrete is to be removed to neat lines, use concrete saws or hydro-demolition methods capable of providing a reasonably uniform cleavage face. If the equipment used will not provide a uniform cut without surface spalling, first score the outlines of the work with small trenches or grooves. For all demolition methods, submit for review and approval of the Engineer, a demolition plan that describes the method of removal, equipment to be used, types of rebar splices or couplers, and method of straightening or cutting rebars. In addition, for hydro-demolition, describe the method for control of water or slurry runoff and measures for safe containment of concrete fragments that are thrown out by the hydro-demolition machine. 110-6.4 Authority of U.S. Coast Guard: For structures in navigable waters, when constructing the project under authority of a U.S. Coast Guard permit, the U.S. Coast Guard may inspect and approve the work to remove any existing structures involved therein, prior to acceptance by the Department.

110-6.5 Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM) Not Identified Prior to the Work: When encountering or exposing any condition indicating the presence of asbestos, cease operations immediately in the vicinity and notify the Engineer. Make every effort to minimize the disturbance of the ACM. Immediately provide for the health and safety of all workers at the job site and make provisions necessary for the health and safety of the public that may be exposed to any potentially hazardous conditions. Provisions shall meet all applicable laws, rules or regulations covering hazardous conditions and will be in a manner commensurate with the gravity of the conditions. The Engineer will notify the District Contamination Assessment Coordinator who will coordinate selecting and tasking the Department’s Asbestos Contractor or Contamination Assessment/Remediation Contractor (CAR). Provide access to the potential contamination area. Preliminary investigation by the Asbestos/CAR Contractor will determine the course of action necessary for site security and the steps necessary to resolve the contamination issue. The Asbestos/CAR Contractor will delineate the contamination area(s), any staging or holding area required. Coordinate with the Asbestos/CAR Contractor and the Engineer to develop a work plan that will provide the Asbestos/CAR Contractor’s operations schedule with projected completion dates for the final resolution of the contamination issue. The Asbestos/CAR Contractor will maintain jurisdiction over activities inside any outlined contaminated areas and any associated staging holding areas. The Asbestos/CAR Contractor will be responsible for the health and safety of workers within the delineated areas. Provide continuous access to these areas for the Asbestos/CAR Contractor and representatives of regulatory or enforcement agencies having jurisdiction. Both Contractors will use the schedule as a basis for planning the completion of both work efforts. The Engineer may grant the Contract Time extensions according to the provisions of 8-7.3.2. Cooperate with the Asbestos/CAR Contractor to expedite integration of the Asbestos/CAR Contractor’s operations into the construction project. The Prime Contractor is not expected to engage in routine construction activities involving asbestos containing materials. Adjustments to quantities or to Contract unit prices will be made according to work additions or reductions on the part of the Prime Contractor in accordance with 4-3. The Engineer will direct the Prime Contractor when operations may resume in the affected area.

110-7 Removal of Existing Pavement. Remove and dispose of existing rigid portland cement concrete pavement, sidewalk, slope pavement, ditch pavement, curb, and curb and gutter etc., where shown in the Plans or ordered by the Engineer to be removed or where required because of the construction operations. Retaining walls, drainage structures and flexible asphalt pavement are not included in the work under this Article.

110-8 Ownership of Materials.Except as may be otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall

take ownership of all buildings, structures, appurtenances, and other materials removed by him and shall dispose of them in accordance with 110-9.

110-9 Disposal of Materials. 110-9.1 General: Either stack materials designated to remain the property of the

Department in neat piles within the right-of-way or load onto the Department’s vehicles. Dispose of timber, stumps, brush, roots, rubbish, and other objectionable material resulting from clearing and grubbing in areas and by methods meeting the applicable requirements of all Local, State and Federal regulations. Do not block waterways by the disposal of debris.

110-9.2 Burning Debris: Where burning of such materials is permitted, perform all such burning in accordance with the applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations. Perform all burning at locations where trees and shrubs adjacent to the cleared area will not be harmed.

110-9.3 Timber and Crops: The Contractor may sell any merchantable timber, fruit trees, and crops that are cleared under the operations of clearing and grubbing for his own benefit, subject to the provisions of 7-1.2, which may require that the timber, fruit trees, or crops be burned at or near the site of their removal, as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor is liable for any claims which may arise pursuant to the provisions of this Subarticle.

110-9.4 Disposal of Treated Wood: Treated wood, including that which comes from bridge channel fender systems, must be handled and disposed of properly during removal. Treated wood should not be cut or otherwise mechanically altered in a manner that would generate dust or particles without proper respiratory and dermal protection. The treated wood must be disposed of in at least a lined solid waste facility or through recycling/reuse. Treated wood shall not be disposed by burning or placement in a construction and demolition (C&D) debris landfill. All compensation for the cost of removal and disposal of treated wood will be included in the Cost of Removal of Existing Structures.

110-9.5 Hazardous Materials/Waste: Handle, transport and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with all Local, State and Federal requirements including the following: a. SSPC Guide 7 b. Federal Water Pollution Control Act, and c. Resource Conservation and Recover Act (RCRA). Accept responsibility for the collection, sampling, classification, packaging, labeling, accumulation time, storage, manifesting, transportation, treatment and disposal of hazardous waste, both solid and liquid. Separate all solid and liquid waste and collect all liquids used at hygiene stations and handle as hazardous materials/waste. Obtain written approval from the Engineer for all hazardous materials/waste stabilization methods before implementation. Obtain an EPA/FDEP Hazardous Waste Identification Number (EPA/FDEP ID Number) before transporting and/or disposal of any hazardous materials/waste. List the Department as the generator of all hazardous materials/waste. Submit the following for the Engineers’ approval before transporting, treatment or disposal of any hazardous materials/waste: a. Name, address and qualifications of the transporter, b. Name, address and qualifications of the treatment facility, c. Proposed treatment and/or disposal of all Hazardous Materials/Waste. Transport all hazardous materials/waste in accordance with applicable 40 CFR 263 Standards. Provide a copy of all completed Hazardous Materials/Waste manifest/bills of lading to the Engineer within 21 days of each shipment. 110-9.5.1 Steel Members With Hazardous Coating: Dispose of steel members with hazardous coating in one of the following manners:

(a) Deliver the steel members and other hazardous waste to a licensed recycling or treatment facility capable of processing steel members with hazardous coating. (b) Deliver the steel members with hazardous coating to a site designated by the Engineer for use as an offshore artificial reef. Deliver any other hazardous materials/waste to a licensed hazardous materials/waste recycling treatment facility. Dismantle and/or cut steel members to meet the required dimensions of the recycling facility, treatment facility or offshore artificial reef agency. All compensation for the cost of removal and disposal of hazardous materials/waste will be included in the Cost of Removal of Existing Structures. 110-9.5.2 Certification of Compliance: Furnish two copies of Certification of Compliance from the firm actually removing and disposing of the hazardous materials/waste stipulating, the hazardous materials/waste has been handled, transported and disposed of in accordance with this Specification. The Certification of Compliance shall be attested to by a person having legal authority to bind the company. Maintain all records required by this Specification and ensure these records are available to the Department upon request.

110-10 Miscellaneous Operations.110-10.1 Water Wells Required to be Plugged: Fill or plug all water wells within the

right-of-way, including areas of borrow pits and lateral ditches, that are not to remain in service, in accordance with applicable Water Management District rules or the Department of Environmental Protection regulations. Cut off the casing of cased wells at least 12 inches below the ground line or 12 inches below the elevation of the finished excavation surface, whichever is lower. Water wells, as referred to herein, are defined either as artesian or non-artesian, as follows: (a) An artesian well is an artificial hole in the ground from which water supplies may be obtained and which penetrates any water-bearing rock, the water in which is raised to the surface by natural flow or which rises to an elevation above the top of the water-bearing bed. Artesian wells are further defined to include all holes drilled as a source of water that penetrate any water-bearing beds that are a part of the artesian water system of Florida, as determined by representatives of the applicable Water Management District. (b) A non-artesian (water-table) well is a well in which the source of water is an unconfined aquifer. The water in a non-artesian well does not rise above the source bed. When the Plans do not indicate whether a non-flowing well is artesian or non-artesian, obtain this information from the Engineer.

110-10.2 Landscape Areas: When certain areas of the right-of-way, outside of the limits of construction, are shown in the Plans or designated by the Engineer to be landscaped, either under the construction Contract or at a later time, remove undesirable trees, stumps, undergrowth, and vegetation, as directed, and preserve and trim natural growth and trees as directed by the Engineer.

110-10.3 Leveling Terrain: Within the areas between the limits of construction and the outer limits of clearing and grubbing, fill all holes and other depressions, and cut down all mounds and ridges. Make the area of a sufficient uniform contour so that the Department’s subsequent mowing and cutting operations are not hindered by irregularity of terrain. Perform this work regardless of whether the irregularities were the result of construction operations or existed originally.

110-10.4 Mailboxes: When the Contract Documents require furnishing and installing mailboxes, permit each owner to remove the existing mailbox. Work with the Local Postmaster to develop a method of temporary mail service for the period between removal and installation of the new mailboxes. Install the mailboxes in accordance with the Design Standards.

110-11 Method of Measurement.110-11.1 Clearing and Grubbing: When direct payment is provided in the Contract, the

quantity to be paid for will be the lump sum quantity. 110-11.2 Removal of Existing Structures: When direct payment is provided in the

Contract, the quantity to be paid for will be the lump sum quantity or quantities for the specific structures removed, as designated.

110-11.3 Removal of Existing Pavement: Payment for removal of flexible asphalt pavement is included in the Lump Sum price for Clearing and Grubbing. When a separate item for Removal of Existing Pavement is provided, the quantity to be paid for will be the number of square yards of existing pavement of the types listed in 110-7, acceptably removed and disposed of, as specified. The quantity will be determined by actual measurement along the surface of the pavement before its removal. Measurements for appurtenances which have irregular surface configurations, such as curb and gutter, steps, and ditch pavement, will be the area as projected to an approximate horizontal plane. Where the removal of pavement areas is necessary only for the construction of box culverts, pipe culverts, storm sewers, inlets, manholes, etc., these areas will not be included in the measurements.

110-11.4 Plugging Water Wells: When direct payment is provided in the Contract, the quantity to be paid for will be the number of water wells plugged, for each type of well (artesian or non-artesian).

110-11.5 Mailboxes: When direct payment is provided in the Contract, the quantity to be paid for will be the number of mailboxes acceptably furnished and installed.

110-11.6 Delivery of Salvageable Material to the Department When direct payment is provided in the Contract, the quantity to be paid for will be the Lump Sum quantity for delivery of salvageable materials to the Department as indicated in the Plans.

110-11.7 General: In each case, except as provided below, where no item of separate payment for such work is included in the proposal, all costs of such work will be included in the various scheduled items in the Contract, or under specific items as specified herein below or elsewhere in the Contract.

110-12 Basis of Payment. 110-12.1 Clearing and Grubbing: 110-12.1.1 Lump Sum Payment: Price and payment will be full compensation for all clearing and grubbing required for the roadway right-of-way and for lateral ditches, channel changes, or other outfall areas, and any other clearing and grubbing indicated, or required for the construction of the entire project, including all necessary hauling, furnishing equipment, equipment operation, furnishing any areas required for disposal of debris, leveling of terrain and the landscaping work of trimming, etc., as specified herein, except for any areas designated to be paid for separately or to be specifically included in the costs of other work under the Contract. Where construction easements are specified in the Plans and the limits of clearing and grubbing for such easements are dependent upon the final construction

requirements, no adjustment will be made in the lump sum price and payment, either over or under, for variations from the limits of the easement defined in the Plans. 110-12.1.2 When No Direct Payment is Provided: When no item for clearing and grubbing is included in the proposal, the Contractor shall include the cost of any work of clearing and grubbing which is necessary for the proper construction of the project in the Contract price for the structure or other item of work for which such clearing and grubbing is required. The Contractor shall include the cost of all clearing and grubbing which might be necessary in pits or areas from which base material is obtained in the Contract price for the base in which such material is used. The clearing and grubbing of areas for obtaining stabilizing materials, where required only for the purpose of obtaining materials for stabilizing, will not be paid for separately.

110-12.2 Removal of Existing Structures: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work of removal and disposal of the designated structures. When direct payment for the removal of existing structures is not provided in the proposal, the Contractor shall include the cost of removing all structures in the Contract price for clearing and grubbing or, if no item of clearing and grubbing is included, in the compensation for the other items covering the new structure being constructed.

110-12.3 Removal of Existing Pavement: Price and payment will be full compensation for performing and completing all the work of removal and satisfactory disposal. When no separate item for this work is provided and no applicable item of excavation or embankment covering such work (as provided in 120-13.1) is included, the Contractor shall include the costs of this work in the Contract price for the item of clearing and grubbing or for the pipe or other structure for which the pavement removal is required.

110-12.4 Plugging Water Wells: Price and payment will be full compensation for each type of well acceptably plugged. If a water well requiring plugging is encountered and the Contract contains no price for plugging wells of that specific type, the plugging of such well will be paid for as unforeseeable work.

110-12.5 Mailboxes: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work and materials required, including supports and numbers.

110-12.6 Delivery of Salvageable Material to the Department: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work required for delivery of the materials to the Department.

110-12.7 Payment Items: Payment will be made under: Item No. 110- 1- Clearing and Grubbing - lump sum. Item No. 110- 3- Removal of Existing Structures - lump sum. Item No. 110- 4- Removal of Existing Pavement - per square yard. Item No. 110- 5- Plugging Water Wells (Artesian) - each.Item No. 110- 6- Plugging Water Wells (Non-Artesian) - each.Item No. 110- 7- Mailbox (Furnish and Install) - each.Item No. 110- 86- Delivery of Salvageable Material to FDOT - lump sum.

EARTHWORK AND RELATED OPERATIONS

SECTION 120EXCAVATION AND EMBANKMENT

120-1 Description.120-1.1 General: Excavate and construct embankments as required for the roadway,

ditches, channel changes and borrow material. Use suitable excavated material or authorized borrow to prepare subgrades and foundations. Construct embankments in accordance with Standard Index 505. Compact and dress excavated areas and embankments. For excavation and backfilling of structures, comply with the requirements of Section 125. Excavate material for clearing and grubbing in accordance with the requirements of Section 110. Material displaced by the storm sewer or drainage structure system is not included in the earthwork quantities shown in the Plans.

120-1.2 Unidentified Areas of Contamination: When encountering or exposing any abnormal condition indicating the presence of contaminated materials, cease operations immediately in the vicinity and notify the Engineer. The presence of tanks or barrels; discolored earth, metal, wood, ground water, etc.; visible fumes; abnormal odors; excessively hot earth; smoke; or other conditions that appear abnormal may indicate the presence of contaminated materials and must be treated with extreme caution. Make every effort to minimize the spread of contamination into uncontaminated areas. Immediately provide for the health and safety of all workers at the job site and make provisions necessary for the health and safety of the public that may be exposed to any potentially hazardous conditions. Ensure provisions adhere to all applicable laws, rules or regulations covering potentially hazardous conditions and will be in a manner commensurate with the gravity of the conditions. The Engineer will notify the District Contamination Impact Coordinator (DCIC) who will coordinate selecting and tasking the Department’s Contamination Assessment/Remediation Contractor (CAR). Provide access to the potentially contaminated area. Preliminary investigation by the CAR Contractor will determine the course of action necessary for site security and the steps necessary under applicable laws, rules, and regulations for additional assessment and/or remediation work to resolve the contamination issue. The CAR Contractor will delineate the contamination area(s), any staging or holding area required, and, in cooperation with the Prime Contractor and Engineer, develop a work plan that will provide the CAR Contractor’s operations schedule with projected completion dates for the final resolution of the contamination issue. The CAR Contractor will maintain jurisdiction over activities inside any outlined contaminated areas and any associated staging holding areas. The CAR Contractor will be responsible for the health and safety of workers within the delineated areas. Provide continuous access to these areas for the CAR Contractor and representatives of regulatory or enforcement agencies having jurisdiction. Both Contractors will use the schedule as a basis for planning the completion of both work efforts. The Engineer may grant the Contract Time extensions according to the provisions of 8-7.3.2. Cooperate with the CAR Contractor to expedite integration of the CAR Contractor’s operations into the construction project. The Prime Contractor is not expected to

engage in routine construction activities, such as excavating, grading, or any type of soil manipulation, or any construction processes required if handling of contaminated soil, surface water or ground water is involved. All routine construction activities requiring the handling of contaminated soil, surfacewater or groundwater will be by the CAR Contractor. Adjustments to quantities or to Contract unit prices will be made according to work additions or reductions on the part of the Prime Contractor in accordance with 4-3. The Engineer will direct the Prime Contractor when operations may resume in the affected area.

120-2 Classifications of Excavation. 120-2.1 General: The Department may classify excavation specified under this Section

for payment as any of the following: (1) Regular Excavation, (2) Subsoil Excavation, (3) Lateral Ditch Excavation, and (4) Channel Excavation. If the proposal does not show Subsoil Excavation or Lateral Ditch Excavation as separate items of payment, include such excavation under the item of Regular Excavation. If the proposal shows Lateral Ditch Excavation as a separate item of payment, but does not show Channel Excavation as a separate item of payment, include such excavation under the item of Lateral Ditch Excavation. Otherwise, include Channel Excavation under the item of Regular Excavation.

120-2.2 Regular Excavation: Regular Excavation includes roadway excavation and borrow excavation, as defined below for each. 120-2.2.1 Roadway Excavation: Roadway Excavation consists of the excavation and the utilization or disposal of all materials necessary for the construction of the roadway, ditches, channel changes, etc., except as may be specifically shown to be paid for separately and that portion of the lateral ditches within the limits of the roadway right-of-way as shown in the Plans. 120-2.2.2 Borrow Excavation: Borrow Excavation consists of the excavation and utilization of material from authorized borrow pits, including only material that is suitable for the construction of roadway embankments or of other embankments covered by the Contract. A Cost Savings Initiative Proposal submittal based on using borrow material from within the project limits will not be considered.

120-2.3 Subsoil Excavation: Subsoil Excavation consists of the excavation and disposal of muck, clay, rock, or any other material that is unsuitable in its original position and that is excavated below the finished grading template. For stabilized bases and sand bituminous road mixes, consider the finished grading template as the top of the finished base, shoulders and slopes. For all other bases and rigid pavement, consider the finished grading template as the finished shoulder and slope lines and bottom of completed base or rigid pavement. For pond and ditches that identify the placement of a blanket material, consider the finished grading template as the bottom of the blanket material. Subsoil Excavation also consists of the excavation of all suitable material within the above limits as necessary to excavate the unsuitable material. Consider the limits of Subsoil Excavation indicated in the Plans as being particularly variable, in accordance with the field conditions actually encountered. The quantity of material required to replace the excavated material and to raise the elevation of the roadway to the bottom of the template will be paid for under Embankment or Borrow Excavation (Truck Measure).

120-2.4 Lateral Ditch Excavation: Lateral Ditch Excavation consists of all excavation of inlet and outlet ditches to structures and roadway, changes in channels of streams, and ditches

parallel to the roadway right-of-way. Dress lateral ditches to the grade and cross-section shown in the Plans.

120-2.5 Channel Excavation: Channel Excavation consists of the excavation and satisfactory disposal of all materials from the limits of the channel as shown in the Plans.

120-3 Preliminary Soils Investigations. When the Plans contain the results of a soil survey, do not assume such data is a guarantee of the depth, extent, or character of material present.

120-4 Removal of Unsuitable Materials and Existing Roads. 120-4.1 Subsoil Excavation: Where muck, rock, clay, or other material within the limits

of the roadway is unsuitable in its original position, excavate such material to the cross-sections shown in the Plans or indicated by the Engineer, and backfill with suitable material. Shape backfill material to the required cross-sections. Where the removal of plastic soils below the finished earthwork grade is required, meet a construction tolerance, from the lines shown in the plans as the removal limits, of plus or minus 0.2 feet in depth and plus or minus 6 inches (each side) in width.

120-4.2 Construction over Existing Old Road: Where a new roadway is to be constructed over an old one, plow or scarify the old road, and break it up full width, regardless of height of fill. If the Plans provide that paving materials may be incorporated into the fill, distribute such material in a manner so as not to create voids. Recompact the old road meeting the requirements of 120-10.2.

120-4.3 Obliterating Old Road: Where the Plans call for obliteration of portions of an old road outside of the proposed new roadway, obliterate such sections of the old road by grading to fill ditches and to restore approximately the original contour of the ground or a contour which produces a pleasing appearance.

120-5 Disposal of Surplus and Unsuitable Material. 120-5.1 Ownership of Excavated Materials: Dispose of surplus and excavated

materials as shown in the Plans or, if the Plans do not indicate the method of disposal, take ownership of the materials and dispose of them outside the right-of-way.

120-5.2 Disposal of Muck on Side Slopes: As an exception to the provisions of 120-5. 1, when approved by the Engineer, in rural undeveloped areas, the Contractor may place muck (A-8 material) on the slopes, or store it alongside the roadway, provided there is a clear distance of at least 6 feet between the roadway grading limits and the muck, and the Contractor dresses the muck to present a neat appearance. In addition, the Contractor may also dispose of this material by placing it on the slopes in developed areas where, in the opinion of the Engineer, this will result in an aesthetically pleasing appearance and will have no detrimental effect on the adjacent developments. Where the Engineer permits the disposal of muck or other unsuitable material inside the right-of-way limits, do not place such material in a manner which will impede the inflow or outfall of any channel or side ditches. The Engineer will determine the limits adjacent to channels within which such materials may be disposed.

120-5.3 Disposal of Paving Materials: Unless otherwise noted, take ownership of paving materials, such as paving brick, asphalt block, concrete slab, sidewalk, curb and gutter, etc., excavated in the removal of existing pavements, and dispose of them outside the right-of-way. If the materials are to remain the property of the Department, place them in neat piles as directed. Existing limerock base that is removed may be incorporated in the stabilized portion of

the subgrade. If the construction sequence will allow, incorporate all existing limerock base into the project as allowed by the Contract Documents.

120-5.4 Disposal Areas: Where the Contract Documents require disposal of excavated materials outside the right-of-way, and the disposal area is not indicated in the Contract Documents, furnish the disposal area without additional compensation. Provide areas for disposal of removed paving materials out of sight of the project and at least 300 feet from the nearest roadway right-of-way line of any State-maintained road. If the materials are buried, disregard the 300 foot limitation.

120-6 Borrow. 120-6.1 Materials for Borrow: Do not open borrow pits until the Engineer has approved

their location. Do not provide borrow materials that are polluted as defined in Chapter 376 of the Florida Statutes (oil of any kind and in any form, gasoline, pesticides, ammonia, chlorine, and derivatives thereof, excluding liquefied petroleum gas) in concentrations above any local, State, or Federal standards. Prior to placing any borrow material that is the product of soil incineration, provide the Engineer with a copy of the Certificate of Materials Recycling and Post Burn Analysis showing that the material is below all allowable pollutant concentrations. 120-6.2 Furnishing of Borrow Areas: To obtain the Engineer’s approval to use an off-site construction activity area that involves excavation such as a borrow pit or local aggregate pit, request in writing, a review for -cultural resources involvement. Send the request to the Division of Historical Resources (DHR), Department of State, State Historic Preservation Officer, Tallahassee,FL. As a minimum, include in the request the Project Identification Number, the County, a description of the property with Township, Range, Section, etc., the dimensions of the area to be affected, and a location map. Do not start any work at the off-site construction activity area prior to receiving clearance from the DHR that no additional research is warranted. For certain locations, the DHR will require a Cultural Resources Assessment Survey before approval can be granted. When this is required, secure professional archaeological services to complete an historical and archaeological survey report. Submit the report to the DHR with a copy to the Department. The Engineer will determine final approval or rejection of off-site construction activity areas based on input from the DHR. Before receiving approval or before use of borrow areas, obtain written clearance from the engineer concerning compliance with the Federal Endangered Species Act and other Wildlife Regulations as specified in 7-1.4 and Section 4(f) of the USDOT Act as specified in 7-1.8. The Department will adjust Contract Time in accordance with 8-7 for any suspension of operations required to comply with this Article. The Department will not accept any monetary claims due to delays or loss of off-site construction activity areas. Except where the Plans specifically call for the use of a particular borrow or dredging area, the Contractor may substitute borrow or dredging areas of his own choosing provided: (1) the Engineer determines the materials from such areas meet the Department’s standards and other requirements for stability for use in the particular sections of the work in which it is to be placed, and (2) the Contractor absorbs any increase in hauling or other costs. Stake the corners of the proposed borrow area and provide the necessary equipment along with an operator in order for the Engineer to investigate the borrow area. The Engineer will determine

test locations, collect samples, and perform tests to investigate the proposed borrow area based on soil strata and required soil properties. The Engineer will approve use of materials from the proposed area based on test results and project requirements. Final acceptance of materials will be based on Point of Use Test as described in 6-1.2.4. Before using any borrow material from any substitute areas, obtain the Engineer’s approval, in writing, for the use of the particular areas, and, where applicable, ensure that the Engineer has cross-sectioned the surface. Upon such written approval by the Engineer, consider the substitute areas as designated borrow areas. When furnishing the dredging or borrow areas, supply the Department with evidence that the necessary permits, rights, or waivers for the use of such areas have been secured. Do not excavate any part of a Contractor furnished borrow area which is less than 300 feet from the right-of-way of the project or any State Road until the Engineer has approved a plan for landscaping and restoring the disturbed area. Perform this landscaping and land restoration at no expense to the Department, prior to final acceptance of the project. Do not provide a borrow area closer than 25 feet to the right-of-way of any state road. In Department furnished borrow pits, do not excavate material within 5 feet of adjacent property lines. Upon completion of excavation, neatly shape, dress, grass, vegetate, landscape, and drain all exposed areas including haul roads, as necessary so as not to present an objectionable appearance. Meet the requirements of Section 104 when furnishing borrow areas, regardless of location.

120-6.3 Borrow Material for Shoulder Build-up: When so indicated in the Plans, furnish borrow material with a specific minimum bearing value, for building up of existing shoulders. Blend materials as necessary to achieve this specified minimum bearing value prior to placing the materials on the shoulders. Take samples of this borrow material at the pit or blended stockpile. Include all costs of providing a material with the required bearing value in the Contract unit price for borrow material. 120-6.4 Haul Routes for Borrow Pits: Provide and maintain, at no expense to the Department, all necessary roads for hauling the borrow material. Where borrow area haul roads or trails are used by others, do not cause such roads or trails to deteriorate in condition. Arrange for the use of all non-public haul routes crossing the property of any railroad. Incur any expense for the use of such haul routes. Establish haul routes which will direct construction vehicles away from developed areas when feasible, and keep noise from hauling operations to a minimum. Advise the Engineer in writing of all proposed haul routes. 120-6.5 Authorization for Use of Borrow: When the item of Borrow Excavation is included in the Contract, use borrow only when sufficient quantities of suitable material are not available from roadway and drainage excavation, to properly construct the embankment, subgrade, and shoulders, and to complete the backfilling of structures. Do not use borrow material until so ordered by the Engineer, and then only use material from approved borrow pits.

120-7 Materials for Embankment.120-7.1 Use of Materials Excavated From the Roadway and Appurtenances: Assume

responsibility for determining the suitability of excavated material for use on the project in accordance with the applicable Contract Documents. Consider the sequence of work and maintenance of traffic phasing in the determination of the availability of this material.

120-7.2 General Requirements for Embankment Materials: Construct embankments of acceptable material including reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP), reclaimed concrete aggregate (RCA) and portland cement concrete rubble, but containing no muck, stumps, roots, brush, vegetable matter, rubbish, reinforcement bar or other material that does not compact into a suitable and enduring roadbed. Do not use RAP or RCA in the top 3 feet of slopes and shoulders that are to be grassed or have other type of vegetation established. Remove all waste material designated as undesirable. Use material in embankment construction in accordance with plan details or as the Engineer directs. Complete the embankment using maximum particle sizes (in any dimension) as follows: In top 12 inches: 3 1/2 inches (in any dimension). 12 to 24 inches: 6 inches (in any dimension). In the depth below 24 inches: not to exceed 12 inches (in any dimension) or the compacted thickness of the layer being placed, whichever is less. Spread all material so that the larger particles are separated from each other to minimize voids between them during compaction. Compact around these rocks in accordance with 120-9.2. When and where approved by the Engineer, the Contractor may place larger rocks (not to exceed 18 inches in any dimension) outside the one to two slope and at least 4 feet or more below the bottom of the base. Compact around these rocks to a firmness equal to that of the supporting soil. Construct grassed embankment areas in accordance with 120-9.2.6. Where constructing embankments adjacent to bridge end bents or abutments, do not place rock larger than 3 1/2 inches in diameter within 3 feet of the location of any end-bent piling.

120-7.3 Materials Used at Pipes, Culverts, etc.: Construct embankments over and around pipes, culverts, and bridge foundations with selected materials.

120-8 Embankment Construction. 120-8.1 General: Construct embankments in sections of not less than 300 feet in length or for the full length of the embankment. Perform work in accordance with an approved Quality Control Plan meeting the requirements of 105-3. For construction of mainline pavement lanes, turn lanes, ramps, parking lots, concrete box culverts and retaining wall systems, a LOT is defined as a single lift of finished embankment not to exceed 500 feet. For construction of shoulder-only areas, bike/shared use paths, and sidewalks areas, a LOT is defined as 2,000 feet or one Day’s Production, whichever is greater. Isolated compaction operations will be considered as separate LOTS. For multiple phase construction, a LOT shall not extend beyond the limits of the phase. 120-8.2 Dry Fill Method: 120-8.2.1 General: Construct embankments to meet compaction requirements in Article 120-9 and in accordance with the acceptance program requirements in 120-10. Restrict the compacted thickness of the last embankment lift to 6 inches maximum. 120-8.2.1.1 For A-3, and A-2-4 Materials with up to 15% fines:Construct the embankment in successive layers with lifts up to a maximum compacted thickness of 12 inches. Ensure the percentage of fines passing the No. 200 US Standard sieve in the A-2-4 material does not exceed 15%.

120-8.2.1.2 For A-1, Plastic materials (As designated in Design Standard Index 505) and A-2-4 Materials with greater than 15% fines: Construct the embankment in successive layers with lifts up to a maximum compacted thickness of 6 inches. Alternately, for A-1, Plastic material and A-2-4 Materials with greater than 15% fines, construct embankments using thick lift construction in successive layers of not more than 12 inches compacted thickness, after having demonstrated with a successful test section, the possession and control of compacting equipment sufficient to achieve density required by 120-10.2 for the full depth of a thicker lift, and if the Engineer approves the compaction effort. Notify the Engineer prior to beginning construction of a test section. Construct a test section of the length of one full LOT. Perform five QC tests at random locations within the test section. All five QC tests and a Department Verification test must meet the density required by 120-10.2. Identify the test section with the compaction effort and soil classification in the Density Log Book. In case of a change in compaction effort or soil classification, failing QC test or when the QC tests cannot be verified, construct a new test section. The Contractor may elect to place material in 6 inches compacted thickness at any time. Construct all layers approximately parallel to the centerline profile of the road. The Engineer reserves the right to terminate the Contractor’s use of thick lift construction. Whenever the Engineer determines that the Contractor is not achieving satisfactory results, revert to the 6 inch compacted lifts. As far as practicable, distribute traffic over the work during the construction of embankments so as to cover the maximum area of the surface of each layer. Construct embankment in the dry whenever normal dewatering equipment and methods can accomplish the needed dewatering. 120-8.2.1.3 Equipment and Methods: Provide normal dewatering equipment including, but not limited to, surface pumps, sump pumps and trenching/digging machinery. Provide normal dewatering methods including, but not limited to, constructing shallow surface drainage trenches/ditches, using sand blankets, sumps and siphons. When normal dewatering does not adequately remove the water, the Engineer may require the embankment material to be placed in the water or on low swampy ground in accordance with 120-9.2.3. 120-8.2.2 Placing in Unstable Areas: Where depositing the material in water, or on low swampy ground that will not support the weight of hauling equipment, construct the embankment by dumping successive loads in a uniformly distributed layer of a thickness not greater than necessary to support the hauling equipment while placing subsequent layers. Once sufficient material has been placed so that the hauling equipment can be supported, construct the remaining portion of the embankment in layers in accordance with the applicable provisions of 120-9.2.2 and 120-9.2.4. 120-8.2.3 Placing on Steep Slopes: When constructing an embankment on a hillside sloping more than 20 degrees from the horizontal, before starting the fill, deeply plow or cut into steps the surface of the original ground on which the embankment is to be placed. 120-8.2.4 Placing Outside Standard Minimum Slope: Where material that is unsuitable for normal embankment construction is to be used in the embankment outside the standard minimum slope (approximately one to two), place such material in layers of not more than 18 inches in thickness, measured loose. The Contractor may also place material which is suitable for normal embankment, outside such standard minimum slope, in 18 inch layers.

Maintain a constant thickness for suitable material placed within and outside the standard minimum slope, unless placing in a separate operation. 120-8.3 Hydraulic Method: 120-8.3.1 Method of Placing: When the hydraulic method is used, as far as practicable, place all dredged material in its final position in the embankment by such method. Place and compact any dredged material that is rehandled, or moved and placed in its final position by any other method, as specified in 120-9.2. The Contractor may use baffles or any form of construction he may select provided the slopes of the embankments are not steeper than indicated in the Plans. Remove all timber used for temporary bulkheads or baffles from the embankment, and fill and thoroughly compact the holes thus formed. When placing fill on submerged land, construct dikes prior to beginning of dredging, and maintain the dikes throughout the dredging operation. 120-8.3.2 Excess Material: Do not use excess material placed outside the prescribed slopes, below the normal high-water level, to raise the fill. Remove only the portion of this material required for dressing the slopes. 120-8.3.3 Protection of Openings in Embankment: Leave openings in the embankments at the bridge sites. Remove any material which invades these openings or existing channels without additional compensation to provide the same depth of channel as existed before the construction of the embankment. Do not excavate or dredge any material within 200 feet of the toe of the proposed embankment. 120-8.4 Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) Method: 120-8.4.1 General: Use only RAP material: 1) stored at facilities with an approved Florida Department of Environmental Protection Stormwater permit; or, 2) transferred directly from a milling project to the Department project. Certify the source if RAP material is from an identifiable Department project. Do not use RAP material in the following areas: 1) Construction areas that are below the seasonal high groundwater table elevation; 2) MSE Wall backfill; 3) underneath MSE Walls or 4) The top 6 inches of embankment. Prior to placement, submit documentation to the Engineer for his approval, outlining the proposed location of the RAP material. 120-8.4.2 Soil and RAP Mixture: Place the RAP material at the location and spread uniformly, using approved methods to obtain a maximum layer thickness of 4 inches. Mix this 4 inches maximum layer of RAP with a loose soil layer of 8 to 10 inches thickness. After mixing, meet all Embankment Utilization requirements of Index 505 for the location used. Do not mix RAP in the uppermost 12 inches in order to comply with 120-8.2.1. The total RAP and other embankment material shall not exceed 12 inches per lift after mixing and compaction if the contractor can demonstrate that the density of the mixture can be achieved. Perform mixing using rotary tillers or other equipment meeting the approval of the Engineer. The Engineer will determine the order in which to spread the two materials. Mix both materials to the full depth. Ensure that the finished layer will have the thickness and shape required by the typical section. Demonstrate the feasibility of this construction method by successfully completing a 500-foot-long test section. For embankment construction, meet the requirements of 120-8. For compaction requirements of the soil and RAP mixture, meet the requirements of 120-9. 120-8.4.3 Alternate Soil and RAP Layer Construction: Construct soil in 6 to 12 inch compacted lifts and RAP in alternate layers with 6 inch maximum compacted lifts. Use soil with a minimum LBR value of 40 to prevent failure during compaction of the overlying RAP layer. Demonstrate the feasibility of this construction method by successfully completing a 500-

foot-long test section. For compaction requirements of both soil and RAP, meet the requirements of 120-9.

120-9 Compaction Requirements.120-9.1 Moisture Content: Compact the materials at a moisture content such that the

specified density can be attained. If necessary to attain the specified density, add water to the material, or lower the moisture content by manipulating the material or allowing it to dry, as is appropriate. 120-9.2 Compaction of Embankments: 120-9.2.1 General: Uniformly compact each layer, using equipment that will achieve the required density, and as compaction operations progress, shape and manipulate each layer as necessary to ensure uniform density throughout the embankment. 120-9.2.2 Compaction Over Unstable Foundations: Where the embankmentmaterial is deposited in water or on low swampy ground, and in a layer thicker than 12 inches (as provided in 120-8.2.2), compact the top 6 inches (compacted thickness) of such layer to the density as specified in 120-10.2. 120-9.2.3 Compaction Where Plastic Material Has Been Removed: Where unsuitable material is removed and the remaining surface is of the A-4, A-5, A-6, or A-7 Soil Groups (see AASHTO M-145), as determined by the Engineer, compact the surface of the excavated area by rolling with a sheepsfoot roller exerting a compression of at least 250 psi on the tamper feet, for the full width of the roadbed (subgrade and shoulders). Perform rolling before beginning any backfill, and continue until the roller feet do not penetrate the surface more than 1 inch. Do not perform such rolling where the remaining surface is below the normal water table and covered with water. Vary the procedure and equipment required for this operation at the discretion of the Engineer. 120-9.2.4 Compaction of Material To Be Used In Base, Pavement, or Stabilized Areas: Do not compact embankment material which will be incorporated into a pavement, base course, or stabilized subgrade, to be constructed as a part of the same Contract. 120-9.2.5 Compaction of Grassed Shoulder Areas: For the upper 6-inch layer of all shoulders which are to be grassed, since no specific density is required, compact only to the extent directed. 120-9.2.6 Compaction of Grassed Embankment Areas: For the outer layer of all embankments where plant growth will be established, do not compact. Leave this layer in a loose condition to a minimum depth of 6 inches for the subsequent seeding or planting operations. 120-9.3 Compaction for Pipes, Culverts, etc.: Compact the backfill of trenches to the densities specified for embankment or subgrade, as applicable, and in accordance with the requirements of 125-9.2. Thoroughly compact embankments over and around pipes, culverts, and bridges in a manner which will not place undue stress on the structures, and in accordance with the requirements of 125-9.2.

120-9.4 Compaction of Subgrade: If the Plans do not provide for stabilizing, compact the subgrade (as defined in 1-3) in both cuts and fills, to the density specified in 120-10.2. For undisturbed soils, do not apply density requirements where constructing narrow widening strips or paved shoulders 5 feet or less in width.

Where trenches for widening strips are not of sufficient width to permit the use of standard compaction equipment, perform compaction using vibratory rollers, trench rollers, or other type compaction equipment approved by the Engineer. Maintain the required density until the base or pavement is placed on the subgrade.

120-10 Acceptance Program.120-10.1 General Requirements:

120-10.1.1 Initial Equipment Comparison: Before initial production, perform a comparison test using the Quality Control, Verifications and Independent Assurance gauges. Unless the Engineer instructs, do not perform the initial equipment comparison more than once per project. When comparing the computed dry density of one nuclear gauge to a second gauge, ensure that the difference between the two computed dry densities does not exceed 2 lb/ft3

between gauges from the same manufacturer, and 3 lb/ft3

Perform a comparison analysis between the Quality Control nuclear gauge and the Verification nuclear gauge any time a nuclear gauge or repaired nuclear gauge is first brought to the project. Repair and replace any Quality Control gauge that does not compare favorably with the Verification gauge at any time during the remainder of the project. Calibrate all Quality Control gauges annually.

between gauges from different manufacturers. Repair or replace any Quality Control gauge that does not compare favorably with the IA gauge.

120-10.1.2 Initial Production Lot: Before construction of any other LOT, prepare a 500-foot initial control section consisting of one full LOT in accordance with the approved Quality Control Plan for the project. Notify the Engineer at least 24 hours prior to production of the initial control section. Perform all QC tests required in 120-10.1.4. When the initial Quality Control test results pass specifications, the Engineer will perform a Verification test to verify compliance with the specifications. Do not begin constructing another LOT until successfully completing the initial production LOT. The Engineer will notify the Contractor of the initial production lot approval within three working days after receiving the Contractor’s Quality Control data when test results meet the following conditions: Quality Control tests must meet the specifications. Verification test must meet the specifications. Difference between Quality Control and Verification computed Dry Density results shall meet the requirements of 120-10.1.1. If Verification test result fails the density requirements of 120-10.2, correct the areas of non-compliance. The Quality Control and Verification tests will then be repeated. The Engineer will reject the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan after three unsuccessful Verification attempts. Submit a revised Quality Control Plan to the Engineer for approval. 120-10.1.3 Density over 105%: When a QC computed dry density results in a value greater than 105% of the applicable Proctor maximum dry density, the Engineer will perform an Independent Verification density test within 5 feet. If the Independent Verification density results in a value greater than 105%, the Engineer will investigate the compaction methods, examine the applicable Standard Proctor Maximum Density and material description. The Engineer may collect and test an Independent Verification Standard Proctor Maximum Density sample for acceptance in accordance with the criteria of 120-10.2. 120-10.1.4 Quality Control Tests:

120-10.1.4.1 Standard Proctor Maximum Density Determination:Determine the Quality Control standard Proctor maximum density and optimum moisture content by sampling and testing the material in accordance with the specified test method listed in 120-10.2. 120-10.1.4.2 Density Testing Requirements: Ensure compliance to the requirements of 120-10.2 by Nuclear Density testing in accordance with FM 1-T 238. Determine the in-place moisture content for each density test. Use Florida Method FM 1-T 238, FM 5-507 (Determination of Moisture Content by Means of a Calcium Carbide Gas Pressure Moisture Tester), or ASTM D-4643 (Laboratory Determination of Moisture Content of Granular Soils By Use of a Microwave Oven) for moisture determination. 120-10.1.4.3 Soil Classification: Perform soil classification tests on the sample collected in 120-10.1.4.1, in accordance with AASHTO T-88. Classify soils in accordance with AASHTO M-145 in order to determine compliance with embankment utilization requirements. Unless required by the Engineer, do not test or classify materials for stabilized subgrade or base. 120-10.1.5 Department Verification: The Engineer will conduct a Verification test(s) in order to accept all materials and work associated with 120-10.1.4. The Engineer will verify the Quality Control results if they meet the Verification Comparison Criteria, otherwise the Engineer will implement Resolution procedures. The Engineer will select test locations, including Station, Offset, and Lift, using a Random Number generator based on the Lots under consideration. Each Verification test evaluates all work represented by the Quality Control testing completed in those LOTs. In addition to the Verification testing, the Engineer may perform additional Independent Verification (IV) testing. The Engineer will evaluate and act upon the IV test results in the same manner as Verification test results. When the project requires less than four Quality Control tests per material type, the Engineer reserves the right to accept the materials and work through visual inspection. 120-10.1.6 Reduced Testing Frequency: When no Resolution testing is required for 12 consecutive verified LOTs, or if required, the QC test data was upheld, reduce the QC density testing to one test every two LOTs by identifying the substantiating tests in the Density Log Book and notifying the Engineer in writing prior to starting reduced frequency of testing. Generate random numbers based on the two LOTs under consideration. When Quality Control test frequency is reduced to one every two LOTs, obtain the Engineer’s approval to place more than one LOT over an untested LOT. Assure similar compaction efforts for the untested LOTs. If the Verification test fails, and Quality Control test data is not upheld by Resolution testing, the Quality Control testing will revert to the original frequency of one Quality Control test per LOT. Do not apply reduced testing frequency in construction of shoulder-only areas, bike/shared use paths and sidewalks. 120-10.1.7 Payment for Resolution Tests: If the Resolution laboratory results compare favorably with the Quality Control results, the Department will pay for Resolution testing. No additional compensation, either monetary or time, will be made for the impacts of any such testing. If the Resolution laboratory results do not compare favorably with the Quality Control results, the costs of the Resolution testing will be deducted from monthly estimates. No additional time will be granted for the impacts of any such testing.

120-10.2 Acceptance Criteria: Obtain a minimum Quality Control (QC) density of 100% of the standard Proctor maximum density as determined by AASHTO T-99, Method C, with the following exceptions: 1) embankment constructed by the hydraulic method as specified in 120-8.3; 2) material placed outside the standard minimum slope as specified in 120-8.2.4; and 3) other areas specifically excluded herein. 120-10.3 Additional Requirements: 120-10.3.1 Frequency: Conduct QC sampling and testing at a minimum frequency listed in the table below. The Engineer will perform Verification sampling and tests at a minimum frequency listed in the table below.

Test Name Quality Control Verification

Verification of Shoulder-Only Areas,

Bike/Shared Use Paths, and Sidewalks

Standard Proctor Maximum Density One per soil type One per soil type One per soil type

Density One per LOT

One per four LOTS and for wet conditions, the first lift not affected by

water

One per two LOTs

Soil ClassificationOne per Standard Proctor Maximum

Density

One per Standard Proctor Maximum

Density

One per Standard Proctor Maximum

Density

120-10.3.2 Test Selection and Reporting: Determine test locations including Stations and offsets, using the random number generator approved by the Engineer. Do not use note pads or work sheets to record data for later transfer to the Density Log Book. Notify the Engineer upon successful completion of Quality Control testing on each LOT. 120-10.4 Verification Comparison Criteria and Resolution Procedures: 120-10.4.1 Standard Proctor Maximum Density Determination: The Engineer will verify the Quality Control results if the results compare within 4.5 lb/ft3

The Engineer will compare the Resolution Test results with the Quality Control test results. If all Resolution Test results are within 4.5 lb/ft

of the Verification test result. Otherwise, the Engineer will take one additional sample of material from the soil type in question. The State Materials Office or an AASHTO accredited laboratory designated by the State Materials Office will perform Resolution testing. The material will be sampled and tested in accordance with AASHTO T-99, Method C.

3 of the corresponding Quality Control test results, the Engineer will use the Quality Control test results for material acceptance purposes for each LOT with that soil type. If the Resolution Test result is not within 4.5 lb/ft3

120-10.4.2 Density Testing: When a Verification or Independent Verification density test fails the Acceptance Criteria, retest the site within a 5 feet radius and the following actions will be taken:

of the Contractor’s Quality Control test, the Verification Test result will be used for material acceptance purposes.

1. If the Quality Control retest meets the Acceptance Criteria and meets the 120-10.1.1 criteria when compared with the Verification or Independent Verification test, the Engineer will accept those LOTs. 2. If the Quality Control retest does not meet the Acceptance Criteria and compares favorably with the Verification or Independent Verification test, rework and retest the LOT. The Engineer will re-verify those LOTs. 3. If the Quality Control retest and the Verification or Independent Verification test do not compare favorably, complete a new comparison analysis as defined in 120-10.1.1. Once acceptable comparison is achieved, retest the LOTs. The Engineer will perform new verification testing. Acceptance testing will not begin on a new LOT until the Contractor has a gauge that meets the comparison requirements.

Record Quality Control test results in the density log book on approved Department forms provided by the Engineer. Submit the original, completed density log book to the Engineer at final acceptance. 120-10.4.3 Soil Classification: The Engineer will verify the Quality Control results if the Verification results identify matching soil classifications. Otherwise, the Engineer will take one additional sample of material from the soil type in question. The State Materials Office or an AASHTO accredited laboratory designated by the State Materials Office will perform Resolution testing. The material will be sampled and tested in accordance with AASHTO T-88. The Engineer will compare the Resolution Test results with the Quality Control test results. If the Resolution test matches the Quality Control classification, the Engineer will use the Quality Control classification for material acceptance purposes. If the Resolution Test result does not match the Contractor’s Quality Control classification, the Verification Test result will be used for material acceptance purposes.

120-11 Maintenance and Protection of Work. While construction is in progress, maintain adequate drainage for the roadbed at all times.

Maintain a shoulder at least 3 feet wide adjacent to all pavement or base construction in order to provide support for the edges. Maintain all earthwork construction throughout the life of the Contract, and take all reasonable precautions to prevent loss of material from the roadway due to the action of wind or water. Repair, at no expense to the Department, except as otherwise provided herein, any slides, washouts, settlement, subsidence, or other mishap which may occur prior to final acceptance of the work. Perform maintenance and protection of earthwork construction in accordance with Section 104.

Maintain all channels excavated as a part of the Contract work against natural shoaling or other encroachments to the lines, grades, and cross-sections shown in the Plans, until final acceptance of the project.

120-12 Construction.120-12.1 Construction Tolerances: Shape the surface of the earthwork to conform to

the lines, grades, and cross-sections shown in the Plans. In final shaping of the surface of earthwork, maintain a tolerance of 0.3 foot above or below the plan cross-section with the following exceptions: 1. Shape the surface of shoulders to within 0.1 foot of the plan cross-section.

2. Shape the earthwork to match adjacent pavement, curb, sidewalk, structures, etc. 3. Shape the bottom of ditches so that the ditch impounds no water. 4. When the work does not include construction of base or pavement, shape the entire roadbed (shoulder point to shoulder point) to within 0.1 foot above or below the plan cross-section. Ensure that the shoulder lines do not vary horizontally more than 0.3 foot from the true lines shown in the Plans. 120-12.2 Operations Adjacent to Pavement: Carefully dress areas adjacent to pavement areas to avoid damage to such pavement. Complete grassing of shoulder areas prior to placing the final wearing course. Do not manipulate any embankment material on a pavement surface. When shoulder dressing is underway adjacent to a pavement lane being used to maintain traffic, exercise extreme care to avoid interference with the safe movement of traffic.

120-13 Method of Measurement. 120-13.1 General: When payment for excavation is on a volumetric basis, the quantity to be paid for will be the volume, in cubic yards, calculated by the method of average end areas, unless the Engineer determines that another method of calculation will provide a more accurate result. The material will be measured in its original position by field survey or by photogrammetric means as designated by the Engineer, unless otherwise specified under the provisions for individual items. Where subsoil excavation extends outside the lines shown in the Plans or authorized by the Engineer including allowable tolerances, and the space is backfilled with material obtained in additional authorized roadway or borrow excavation, the net fill, plus shrinkage allowance, will be deducted from the quantity of roadway excavation or borrow excavation to be paid for, as applicable. The quantity of all material washed, blown, or placed beyond the authorized roadway cross-section will be determined by the Engineer and will be deducted from the quantity of roadway excavation or borrow excavation to be paid for, as applicable. Subsoil Excavation that extends outside the lines shown in the Plans or authorized by the Engineer including allowable tolerances will be deducted from the quantity to be paid for as subsoil excavation.

120-13.2 Roadway Excavation: The measurement will include only the net volume of material excavated between the original ground surface and the surface of the completed earthwork, except that the measurement will also include all unavoidable slides which may occur in connection with excavation classified as roadway excavation. The pay quantity will be the plan quantity provided that the excavation was accomplished in substantial compliance with the plan dimensions and subject to the provisions of 9-3.2 and 9-3.4. On designated 3-R Projects, regular excavation will be paid for at the Contract lump sum price provided that the excavation was accomplished in substantial compliance with the plan dimension.

120-13.3 Borrow Excavation: Measurement will be made on a loose volume basis, as measured in trucks or other hauling equipment at the point of dumping on the road. If measurement is made in vehicles, level the material to facilitate accurate measurement.

Unsuitable material excavated from borrow pits where truck measurement is provided for and from any borrow pits furnished by the Contractor, will not be included in the quantity of excavation to be paid for.

120-13.4 Lateral Ditch Excavation: The measurement will include only material excavated within the lines and grades indicated in the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. The measurement will include the full station-to-station length shown in the Plans or directed by the Engineer and acceptably completed. Excavation included for payment under Section 125 will not be included in this measurement. The pay quantity will be the plan quantity provided that the excavation was accomplished in substantial compliance with the plan dimensions and subject to the provisions of 9-3.2 and 9-3.4.

120-13.5 Channel Excavation: The measurement will include only material excavated within the lines and grades indicated in the Plans or in accordance with authorized plan changes. The measurement will include the full station-to-station length shown in the Plans including any authorized changes thereto. If shoaling occurs subsequent to excavation of a channel and the Engineer authorized the shoaled material to remain in place, the volume of any such material remaining within the limits of channel excavation shown in the Plans will be deducted from the measured quantity of channel excavation.

120-13.6 Subsoil Excavation: The measurement will include only material excavated within the lines and grades indicated in the Plans (including the tolerance permitted therefore) or as directed by the Engineer. When no item for subsoil excavation is shown in the proposal but subsoil excavation is subsequently determined to be necessary, such unanticipated subsoil excavation will be paid for as provided in 4-4.

120-13.7 Embankment: The quantity will be at the plan quantity. Where payment for embankment is not to be included in the payment for the excavation, and is to be paid for on a cubic yard basis for the item of embankment, the plan quantities to be paid for will be calculated by the method of average end areas unless the Engineer determines that another method of calculation will provide a more accurate result. The measurement will include only material actually placed above the original ground line, within the lines and grades indicated in the Plans or directed by the Engineer. The length used in the computations will be the station-to-station length actually constructed. The original ground line used in the computations will be as determined prior to placing of embankment subject to the provisions of 9-3.2, and no allowance will be made for subsidence of material below the surface of the original ground. If there are authorized changes in plan dimensions or if errors in plan quantities are detected, plan quantity will be adjusted as provided in 9-3.2. Where the work includes excavation of unsuitable material below the finished grading template or original ground line, whichever is lower as defined in 120-3.3, the original ground line is defined as the surface prior to beginning excavation, except that this surface is not outside the permissible tolerance of lines and grades for subsoil excavation as indicated in the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. Any overrun or underrun of plan quantity for subsoil excavation which results in a corresponding increase or decrease in embankment will be considered as an authorized plan change for adjustment purposes as defined in 9-3.2.2.

No payment will be made for embankment material used to replace unsuitable material excavated beyond the lines and grades shown in the Plans or ordered by the Engineer. In no case will payment be made for material allowed to run out of the embankment on a flatter slope than indicated on the cross-section. The Contractor shall make his own estimate on the volume of material actually required to obtain the pay section.

120-14 Basis of Payment. 120-14.1 General: Prices and payments for the various work items included in this

Section will be full compensation for all work described herein, including excavating, dredging, hauling, placing, and compacting; dressing the surface of the earthwork; maintaining and protecting the complete earthwork; and hauling. The Department will not allow extra compensation for any rehandling of materials. The Department will compensate for the cost of grassing or other permanent erosion control measures directed by the Engineer as provided in the Contract for similar items of roadway work. 120-14.2 Excavation: 120-14.2.1 Items of Payment: When no classification of material is indicated in the Plans, and bids are taken only on regular excavation, the total quantity of all excavation specified under this Section will be paid for at the Contract unit price for regular excavation. When separate classifications of excavation are shown in the proposal, the quantities of each of the various classes of materials so shown will be paid for at the Contract unit prices per cubic yard for regular excavation, lateral ditch excavation, subsoil excavation, and channel excavation, as applicable, and any of such classifications not so shown will be included under the item of regular excavation (except that if there is a classification for lateral ditch excavation shown and there is no classification for channel excavation, any channel excavation will be included under the item of lateral ditch excavation). As an exception, on designated projects, regular excavation will be paid for at the Contract lump sum price. 120-14.2.2 Basic Work Included in Payments: Prices and payments will be full compensation for all work described under this Section, except for any excavation, or embankment which is specified to be included for payment under other items. Such prices and payments will include hauling; any rehandling that may be necessary to accomplish final disposal as shown in the Plans; the dressing of shoulders, ditches and slopes; removal of trash, vegetation, etc., from the previously graded roadway where no item for clearing and grubbing is shown in the Plans; and compacting as required. 120-14.2.3 Additional Depth of Subsoil Excavation: Where subsoil excavation is made to a depth of 0 to 5 feet below the depth shown on the Contract Plans, such excavation will be paid for at the unit price bid. Where subsoil excavation is made to a depth greater than 5 feet, and up to 15 feet, deeper than the depth shown on the Contract Plans, such excavation will be paid for at the unit price bid plus 25% of such unit price. Additional extra depth, more than 15 feet below such plan depth, will be considered as a change in the character of the work and will be paid for as unforeseeable work. Where no subsoil excavation is shown in a particular location on the original plans, payment for extra depth of subsoil will begin 5 feet below the lowest elevation on the grading template.

120-14.2.4 Borrow Excavation: When the item of borrow excavation is included in the Contract, price and payment will also include the cost of furnishing the borrow areas and any necessary clearing and grubbing thereof, the removal of unsuitable material that it is necessary to excavate in order to obtain suitable borrow material, and also the costs incurred in complying with the provisions of 120-6.3. 120-14.2.5 Materials Excluded from Payment for the Excavation: No payment as excavation will be made for any excavation covered for payment under the item of embankment. No payment will be made for the excavation of any materials which are used for purposes other than those shown in the Plans or designated by the Engineer. No payment will be made for materials excavated outside the lines and grades given by the Engineer, unless specifically authorized by the Engineer; except that, in the operations of roadway excavation, all slides and falls of insecure masses of material beyond the regular slopes and not due to lack of precaution on the part of the Contractor will be paid for at the Contract unit price for the material involved. The removal of slides and falls of material classified as lateral ditch excavation or as subsoil excavation will not be paid for separately, but will be included in the Contract unit price for the pay quantity of these materials, measured as provided in 120-14. 120-14.3 Embankment: 120-14.3.1 General: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section, including all material for constructing the embankment; all excavating, dredging, pumping, placing and compacting of material for constructing the embankment complete; dressing of the surface of the roadway, maintenance and protection of the completed earthwork, and the removal of rubbish, vegetation, etc., from the roadway, where no clearing and grubbing of the area is specified in the Plans. Also, such price and payment, in each case, will specifically include all costs of any roadway, lateral ditch, or channel excavation, unless such excavation is specifically shown to be paid for separately, regardless of whether the materials are utilized in the embankment. 120-14.3.2 Excluded Material: No payment will be made for the removal of muck or overburden from the dredging or borrow areas. No payment will be made for embankment material used to replace muck or other unsuitable material excavated beyond the lines and grades shown in the Plans or ordered by the Engineer. 120-14.3.3 Clearing and Grubbing: No payment will be made for any clearing and grubbing of the borrow or dredging areas. Where no clearing and grubbing of such areas is specified in the Plans, the cost of any necessary clearing and grubbing will be included in the Contract unit or lump sum price for Embankment. 120-14.3.4 Cost of Permits, Rights, and Waivers: Where the Contractor provides borrow or dredging areas of his own choosing, the cost of securing the necessary permits, rights or waivers will be included in the Contract price for embankment.

120-14.4 Payment Items: Payment will be made under: Item No. 120- 1- Regular Excavation - per cubic yard. Item No. 120- 2- Borrow Excavation - per cubic yard. Item No. 120- 3- Lateral Ditch Excavation - per cubic yard. Item No. 120- 4- Subsoil Excavation - per cubic yard. Item No. 120- 5- Channel Excavation - per cubic yard. Item No. 120- 6- Embankment - per cubic yard.

Item No. 120- 71- Regular Excavation (3-R Projects) - lump sum.

SECTION 125 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES AND PIPE

125-1 Description. Excavate for bridge foundations, box culverts, pipe culverts, storm sewers and all other pipe lines, retaining walls, headwalls for pipe culverts and drains, catch basins, drop inlets, manholes, and similar structures. Construct and remove cofferdams, sheeting, bracing, etc.; pump or otherwise dewater foundations; remove and dispose of any existing structures or portions of structures not covered by other items in the Contract, including foundations, abutments, piers, wings, and all other materials, obstructions, etc., found necessary to clear the site for the proposed work; backfill, dispose of surplus material, and perform final cleaning, as may be necessary for the proper execution of the work. This Section does not include excavation for bases or pavements, curbs, curb and gutter, valley gutter, ditch pavement, or rubble gutter. Perform work in accordance with an approved Quality Control (QC) Plan meeting the requirements of 105-3. 125-1.1 Trench Excavation Safety System and Shoring, Special (Trench Excavation): When performing trench excavation in excess of 5 feet in depth, comply with the Occupational Safety and Health Administration’s (OSHA) trench safety standards, 29 C.F.R., s. 1926.650, Subpart P, and all subsequent revisions or updates adopted by the Department of Labor and Employment Security. Ensure that trench boxes are wide enough to accommodate compaction and density testing. Submission of bid and subsequent execution of the Contract will serve as certification that all trench excavation in excess of 5 feet in depth will be in compliance with Section 553.62, Florida Statutes. Consider all available geotechnical information available when designing the trench excavation safety system. Consider these and any more stringent trench safety standards as minimum Contract requirements.

125-2 Classification. Consider all materials excavated as unclassified and as excavation regardless of the material encountered.

125-3 Cofferdams. 125-3.1 Construction: 125-3.1.1 Methods: Construct all foundations by open excavation, and shore, brace, or protect the foundation openings with cofferdams. Provide cofferdams or cribs for foundation construction below the bottom of the footings. Provide sufficient clearance in the cofferdam interiors to permit construction of forms and inspection of their exteriors, and for pumping equipment. 125-3.1.2 Protection of Concrete: Construct cofferdams to protect green concrete against damage from a sudden rising of the water and to prevent damage by erosion. Do not leave timber or bracing in cofferdams or cribs that extend into the substructure masonry except where permitted in writing by the Engineer. 125-3.1.3 Placing in the Dry: For placing footings in the dry, the Engineer may require cofferdam sheeting to be driven to an elevation 6 feet below the elevation of the bottom

of the footings and require sufficient pumping equipment to dewater and maintain the cofferdam in a comparatively dry condition. 125-3.1.4 Working Drawings: For substructure work, submit drawings showing the proposed method of cofferdam construction and other details left to choice or not fully shown in the Plans. Obtain the Engineer’s approval of the type and clearance of cofferdams, insofar as such details affect the character of the finished work. For other details of design that do not affect the character of the finished work, assume responsibility for the successful construction of the work. Retain a Professional Engineer, registered in the State of Florida, to prepare the above construction drawing, and keep a signed and sealed copy on hand at the site at all times. On completion of the work, furnish the Department with as-built drawings on permanent reproducible material as noted in 5-1.4.1. 125-3.2 Removal: Unless otherwise provided, remove cofferdams or cribs, with all sheeting and bracing, after completion of the substructure without disturbing or marring the finished masonry.

125-4 Excavation. 125-4.1 Requirements for all Excavation: Excavate foundation pits to permit the placing of the full widths and lengths of footings shown in the Plans, with full horizontal beds. Do not round or undercut corners or edges of footings. Perform all excavation to foundation materials, satisfactory to the Engineer, regardless of the elevation shown in the Plans. Perform all excavation in stream beds to a depth at least 4 feet below the permanent bed of the stream, unless a firm footing can be established on solid rock before such depth is reached, and excavate to such additional depth as may be necessary to eliminate any danger of undermining. Wherever rock bottom is secured, excavate in such manner as to allow the solid rock to be exposed and prepared in horizontal beds for receiving the masonry. Remove all loose and disintegrated rock or thin strata. Have the Engineer inspect and approve all foundation excavations prior to placing masonry. 125-4.2 Earth Excavation: 125-4.2.1 Foundation Material other than the Rock: When masonry is to rest on an excavated surface other than rock, take special care to avoid disturbing the bottom of the excavation, and do not remove the final foundation material to grade until just before placing the masonry. In case the foundation material is soft or mucky, the Engineer may require excavation to a greater depth and to backfill to grade with approved material. 125-4.2.2 Foundation Piles: Where foundation piles are used, complete the excavation of each pit before driving the piles. After the driving is completed, remove all loose and displaced material, leaving a smooth, solid, and level bed to receive the masonry. 125-4.2.3 Removal of Obstructions: Remove boulders, logs, or any unforeseen obstacles encountered in excavating. Compensation will be in accordance with the requirements of 4-3.4. 125-4.3 Rock Excavation: Clean all rock and other hard foundation material, remove all loose material, and cut all rock to a firm surface. Either level, step vertically and horizontally, or serrate the rock, as may be directed by the Engineer. Clean out all seams, and fill them with concrete or mortar. 125-4.4 Pipe Trench Excavation: Excavate trenches for pipe culverts and storm sewers to the elevation of the bottom of the pipe and to a width sufficient to provide adequate working room. Remove soil not meeting the classification specified as suitable backfill material in 125-8.3.2.2, to a depth of 4 inches below the bottom of the pipe elevation. Remove rock,

boulders or other hard lumpy or unyielding material to a depth of 12 inches below the bottom of the pipe elevation. Remove muck or other soft material to a depth necessary to establish a firm foundation. Where the soils permit, ensure that the trench sides are vertical up to at least the mid-point of the pipe. For pipe lines placed above the natural ground line, place and compact the embankment, prior to excavation of the trench, to an elevation at least 2 feet above the top of the pipe and to a width equal to four pipe diameters, and then excavate the trench to the required grade. For pipe trenches utilizing trench boxes, ensure that the trench box used is of sufficient width to permit thorough tamping of bedding material under and around the pipes as specified in 125-8.1.6. Do not disturb the installed pipe and its embedment when moving trench boxes. Move the trench box carefully to avoid excavated wall displacement or damage. As the trench box is moved, fill any voids left by the trench box and continuously place and compact the backfill material adjacent to and all along the side of the trench box walls to fill any voids created by the trench box.

125-5 Preservation of Channel. 125-5.1 General: Unless shown in the Plans, do not excavate outside of caissons, cribs, cofferdams, or sheet piling, and do not disturb the natural stream bed adjacent to the structure. If excavating or dredging at the site of the structure before sinking caissons, cribs, or cofferdams, complete the foundation and backfill all such excavations to the original ground surface or other required elevation, with material satisfactory to the Engineer. 125-5.2 Removal of Excavated Materials: Do not allow materials that are deposited adjacent to the stream area to infiltrate the water areas. Leave the stream in its original condition.

125-6 Disposal of Surplus. Use suitable excavated materials for backfilling over or around the structure. Dispose of unsuitable materials. Meet the disposal requirements pertaining to water pollution contained in Section 104 and in 7-1.1.

125-7 Pumping. Pump from the interior of any foundation enclosure in such manner as to preclude the possibility of any portion of the concrete materials being carried away. Do not pump while placing concrete, or for a period of at least 24 hours thereafter, unless using a suitable pump separated from the concrete work by a watertight wall.

125-8 Backfilling. 125-8.1 General Requirements for Structures and Pipe: 125-8.1.1 General: Backfill in the dry whenever normal dewatering equipment and methods can accomplish the needed dewatering. A LOT is defined as one lift of backfill material placement, not to exceed 500 feet in length or a single run of pipe connecting two successive structures, whichever is less. Backfill for structures and plastic or metal pipe compacted in one operation will be considered as separate LOTs within the cover zone. Backfill around structures compacted separately from the pipe will be considered as separate LOTs. Backfill on each side of the pipe for the first lift will be considered a separate LOT. Backfill on opposite sides of the pipe for the remaining lifts will be considered separate LOTs, unless the

same compactive effort is applied. Same compactive effort is defined as the same type of equipment (make and model) making the same number of passes on both sides of the pipe. For multiple phase backfill, a LOT shall not extend beyond the limits of the phase. When placing backfill within trench box each lift of backfill is considered a LOT. Placement of backfill within trench box limits will be considered a complete operation before trench box is moved for next backfill operation. When the trench box is moved for next backfill operation this will start new LOTs for each lift. Follow the density testing frequency in 125-9.3.1. 125-8.1.2 Equipment and Methods: Provide normal dewatering equipment including, but not limited to, surface pumps, sump pumps, wellpoints and header pipe and trenching/digging machinery. Provide normal dewatering methods including, but not limited to, constructing shallow surface drainage trenches/ditches, using sand blankets, perforated pipe drains, sumps and siphons. 125-8.1.3 Backfill Materials: Backfill to the original ground surface or subgrade surface of openings made for structures, with a sufficient allowance for settlement. The Engineer may require that the material used for this backfill be obtained from a source entirely apart from the structure. Use only material accepted by the Engineer. Do not allow heavy construction equipment to cross over culvert or storm sewer pipes until placing and compacting backfill material to the finished earthwork grade or to an elevation at least 4 feet above the crown of the pipe. 125-8.1.4 Use of A-7 Material: In the backfilling of trenches, A-7 material may be used from a point 12 inches above the top of the pipe up to the elevation shown in the Design Standards as the elevation for undercutting of A-7 material. 125-8.1.5 Time of Placing Backfill: Do not place backfill against any masonry or concrete abutment, wingwall, or culvert until the Engineer has given permission to do so, and in no case until the masonry or concrete has been in place seven days or until the specified 28 day compressive strength occurs. 125-8.1.6 Placement and Compaction: Place the material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 inches compacted thickness, in depth above water level, behind abutments, wingwalls and end bents or end rest piers, under the haunches of the pipes and around box culverts and all structures including pipe culverts. When the backfill material is deposited in water, compact as specified in 125-8.2.5 and 125-8.3.4. The Contractor may elect to place material in thicker lifts of no more than 12 inches compacted thickness above the Soil Envelope if he can demonstrate with a successful test section that density can be achieved. Notify the Engineer prior to beginning construction of a test section. Construct a test section of the length of one LOT. Perform five QC tests at random locations within the test section. All five tests must meet the density required by 125-9.2 and be verified by the Department. Identify the test section with the compaction effort and soil classification in the Logbook. In case of a change in compaction effort or soil classification, construct a new test section. When a QC test fails the requirements of 125-9.2 or when the QC tests cannot be verified, construct a new test section. The Contractor may elect to place material in 6 inches compacted thickness at any time. 125-8.2 Additional Requirements for Structures Other than Pipe: 125-8.2.1 Density: Where the backfill material is deposited in water, obtain a 12 inch layer of comparatively dry material, thoroughly compacted by tamping, before verifying the layer and density requirements. Meet the requirements of 125-9.2.

125-8.2.2 Box Culverts: For box culverts over which pavement is to be constructed, compact around the structure to an elevation not less than 12 inches above the top of the structure, using rapid-striking mechanical tampers. 125-8.2.3 Other Limited Areas: Compact in other limited areas using mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers, until the cover over the structure is at least 12 inches thick. When hand tampers are used, deposit the materials in layers not more than 4 inches thick using hand tampers suitable for this purpose with a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Take special precautions to prevent any wedging action against the masonry, and step or terrace the slope bounding the excavation for abutments and wingwalls if required by the Engineer. 125-8.2.4 Culverts and Piers: Backfill around culverts and piers on both sides simultaneously to approximately the same elevation. 125-8.2.5 Compaction Under Wet Conditions: Where wet conditions do not permit the use of mechanical tampers, compact using hand tampers. Use only A-3 material for the hand tamped portions of the backfill. When the backfill has reached an elevation and condition such as to make the use of the mechanical tampers practical, perform mechanical tamping in such manner and to such extent as to transfer the compaction force into the sections previously tamped by hand. 125-8.3 Additional Requirements for Pipe 15 Inches Inside Diameter or Greater: 125-8.3.1 General: Trenches for pipe may have up to four zones that must be backfilled. Lowest Zone: The lowest zone is backfilled for deep undercuts up to within 4 inches of the bottom of the pipe. Bedding Zone: The zone above the lowest zone is the bedding zone. Usually it will be the backfill which is the 4 inches of soil below the bottom of the pipe. When rock or other hard material has been removed to place the pipe, the bedding zone will be the 12 inches of soil below the bottom of the pipe. Cover Zone: The next zone is backfill that is placed after the pipe has been laid and will be called the cover zone. This zone extends to 12 inches above the top of the pipe. The cover zone and the bedding zone are considered the Soil Envelope for the pipe. Top Zone: The top zone extends from 12 inches above the top of the pipe to the base or final grade. 125-8.3.2 Material: 125-8.3.2.1 Lowest Zone: Backfill areas undercut below the bedding zone of a pipe with coarse sand, or other suitable granular material, obtained from the grading operations on the project, or a commercial material if no suitable material is available. 125-8.3.2.2 Soil Envelope: In both the bedding zone and the cover zone of the pipe, backfill with materials classified as A-1, A-2, or A-3. Material classified as A-4 may be used if the pipe is concrete pipe. 125-8.3.2.3 Top Zone: Backfill the area of the trench above the soil envelope of the pipe with materials allowed on Design Standards, Index No. 505. 125-8.3.3 Compaction: 125-8.3.3.1 Lowest Zone: Compact the soil in the lowest zone to approximately match the density of the soil in which the trench was cut.

125-8.3.3.2 Bedding Zone: If the trench was not undercut below the bottom of the pipe, loosen the soil in the bottom of the trench immediately below the approximate middle third of the outside diameter of the pipe. If the trench was undercut, place the bedding material and leave it in a loose condition below the middle third of the outside diameter of the pipe. Compact the outer portions to meet the density requirements of the acceptance criteria. Place the material in lifts no greater than 6 inches (compacted thickness). 125-8.3.3.3 Cover Zone: Before placing the cover zone material, lay pipe according to Section 430. Excavate for pipe bells before laying pipe. Place the material in 6 inch layers (compacted thickness), evenly deposited on both sides of the pipe, and compact with mechanical tampers suitable for this purpose. Hand tamp material below the pipe haunch that cannot be reached by mechanical tampers. Meet the requirements of in 125-9.2. 125-8.3.3.4 Top Zone: Place the material in layers not to exceed 12 inches in compacted thickness. Meet the requirements of the density acceptance criteria. 125-8.3.4 Backfill Under Wet Conditions: Where wet conditions are such that dewatering by normal pumping methods would not be effective, the procedure outlined below may be used when specifically authorized by the Engineer in writing. The Department will pay for any select material which is not available from the grading as Unforeseeable Work. The Department will not pay for select material that might be used by the Contractor for his own convenience instead of dewatering. The Department will permit the use of granular material below the elevation at which mechanical tampers would be effective, but only material classified as A-3. Place and compact the material using timbers or hand tampers until the backfill reaches an elevation such that its moisture content will permit the use of mechanical tampers. When the backfill has reached such elevation, use normally acceptable backfill material. Compact the material using mechanical tampers in such manner and to such extent as to transfer the compacting force into the material previously tamped by hand. The Department will permit the use of coarse aggregate below the elevation at which mechanical tampers would be effective. Use coarse aggregate as specified in Section 901 for Aggregate Size Number 89, 8, 78, 7, 68, 6, or 57. Place the coarse aggregate such that it will be stable and firm. Fully wrap the aggregate with a layer of Type D-4 filter fabric, as specified on Design Standards, Index No. 199. Do not place coarse aggregate within 4 feet of the ends of the trench or ditch. Use normally accepted backfill material at the ends.

125-9 Acceptance Program. 125-9.1 General Requirements: Meet the requirements of 120-10, except replace the requirements of 120-10.1.6 with 125-9.1.1, 120-10.2 with 125-9.2, 120-10.3 with 125-9.3, and 120-10.4 with 125-10. 125-9.1.1 Reduced Testing Frequency: When no resolution testing is required for six consecutive LOTs, or if required, the QC test data was upheld, reduce the QC density testing to one test every two Lots by identifying the substantiating tests in the Density Log Book and notifying the Engineer in writing prior to starting reduced frequency of testing. Generate random numbers based on the two LOTs under consideration. When QC test frequency is reduced to one every two LOTs, obtain the Engineer’s approval to place more than one LOT over an untested LOT. Assure similar compaction efforts for the untested sections. If the Verification test fails, and QC test data is not upheld by Resolution testing the QC testing will revert to the original frequency.

125-9.2 Acceptance Criteria: 125-9.2.1 Density: Obtain a minimum QC density in any LOT of 100% of the Standard Proctor maximum density as determined by AASHTO T99, Method C, or the requirements of 125-8.3.3.1 when applicable. For metal and plastic pipe, compact the backfill in the cover zone to a density of at least 95% of the Standard Proctor maximum density as determined by AASHTO T99, Method C. 125-9.2.2 Exceptions to Structures and Pipe Density Requirements: Compact the backfill to a firmness approximately equal to that of the soil next to the pipe trench in locations outside the plane described by a two (horizontal) to one (vertical) slope downward from the roadway shoulder line or the back of curb as applicable. Apply 125-9.2.1 when compacting side-drain pipe backfill under driveways serving a property that is not a single residential lot. 125-9.3 Additional Requirements: 125-9.3.1 Frequency: Conduct QC Standard Proctor maximum density sampling and testing at a minimum frequency of one test per soil type. The verification test will be at a minimum of one test per soil type:

Test Name Quality Control Verification Standard Proctor

Maximum Density One per soil type One per soil type

Density One per LOT One per four consecutive LOTs and for wet conditions, the first

lift not affected by water

Soil Classification One per Standard Proctor Maximum density

One per Standard Proctor Maximum density

125-10 Verification Comparison Criteria and Resolution Procedures. 125-10.1 Standard Proctor Maximum Density Determination: The Engineer will verify the QC results if the results compare within �4.5 PCF of the verification test result. Otherwise, the Engineer will take one additional sample of material from the soil type in question. The State Materials Office or an AASHTO accredited laboratory designated by the State Materials Office will perform resolution testing. The material will be sampled and tested in accordance with AASHTO T99, Method C. The Engineer will compare the resolution test result with the QC test results. If the resolution test result is within� 4.5 PCF of the corresponding QC test results, the Engineer will use the QC test results for material acceptance purposes for each LOT with that soil type. If the resolution test result is not within� 4.5 PCF of the Contractor’s QC test, the verification test result will be used for material acceptance purposes. 125-10.2 Density Testing: When a verification or independent verification density test fails the acceptance criteria, retest the site within a 5 feet radius and the following actions will be taken: 1. If the QC retest meets the acceptance criteria and compares favorably with the verification or independent verification test, the Engineer will accept those LOTs. 2. If the QC retest does not meet the acceptance criteria and compares favorably with the verification or independent verification test, rework and retest the LOT. The Engineer will re-verify those LOTs.

3. If the QC retest and the verification or independent verification test do not compare favorably, complete a new equipment-comparison analysis as defined in 120-10.1.2. Once acceptable comparison is achieved, retest the LOTs. The Engineer will perform new verification testing. Acceptance testing will not begin on a new LOT until the Contractor has a gauge that meets the comparison requirements. 125-10.3 Soil Classification: Meet the requirements of 120-10.4.3.

125-11 Site Restoration. Wherever the existing site is disturbed solely for the purpose of constructing or removing box culverts, pipe culverts, storm sewers, inlets, manholes, etc., completely replace and restore the site to the Engineer’s satisfaction, without additional compensation.

125-12 Cleaning Up. Upon completion of the work, leave the structure and all adjacent areas in a neat and presentable condition, clear up all temporary structures, rubbish and surplus materials and leave the space under the structure unobstructed and in such shape that drift will not collect nor scour or be induced. Pile all material from existing structures that have been removed neatly on the bank, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Pull false work piling unless the Engineer permits it to be cut or broken off in which case it will be cut or broken off at least 2 feet below the ground line or stream bed.

125-13 Method of Measurement. When direct payment for excavation for structures is provided in the proposal, and such payment is on a unit basis, such excavation will be measured in its original position by the cross-section method to determine the amount of material. The cubic yard volume of excavation used as a basis of payment will then be that material actually removed below the original ground line or stream bed, but not including that shown in the Plans to be paid for either as regular excavation, subsoil excavation, lateral ditch excavation or channel excavation, or which is included in the item for grading, and except that no payment will be made for material removed in excavating for footings or foundations outside of an area which is bounded by vertical planes 12 inches outside of the limits of the footing and parallel thereto. For pipe trenches the width used to be in the calculation shall be the diameter of the pipe, plus 24 inches.

125-14 Basis of Payment. 125-14.1 When No Direct Payment Provided: When direct payment for excavation for structures is not provided for in the proposal, all work specified in this Section, other than as specified in 125-14.3 through 125-14.7, shall be included in the Contract price for the concrete or for other items covering the applicable structure. 125-14.2 Direct Payment: When direct payment for work under this Section is provided, the Contract price per cubic yard (measured as provided in 125-13), as shown in the proposal, shall be full compensation for all the work specified in this Section, except such work as is specifically stipulated to be paid for separately, in 125-14.3 through 125-14.7. 125-14.3 Excavation Below Plan Grade: When excavation of material below plan grade is called for in the Plans or authorized by the Engineer, and payment for Excavation for Structures is on a cubic yard basis, the material excavated below plan grade will be included in the measurement for this item.

Payment for the material used for the backfill will be made as specified in 125-14.7. 125-14.4 Strengthening Foundations: The work of strengthening the foundations (as provided in 125-4.2) shall be paid for as provided in 4-4, unless such work is covered by a bid item. 125-14.5 Backfilling for Additional Support: The work of providing additional support by backfilling with sand or other satisfactory material, where called for by the Engineer (as specified in 125-8), shall be paid for as provided in 4-4. 125-14.6 Removal and Replacement of Existing Pavement: For pavement, curb, etc., which is removed only in order to construct pipe culverts or storm sewers, as specified in 125-11, all costs of such removal and replacement shall be included in the costs of the pipe or other structure for which it is removed, unless otherwise provided for in the contract. 125-14.7 Removal and Replacement of Material Unsuitable for Backfill: When it cannot reasonably be anticipated from information contained in the Plans, that material excavated for the structure will be unsuitable for use as backfill, and such material proves to be unsuitable for this use, the work of disposing of such material away from the site will be paid for as Unforeseeable Work, and the work of bringing in substitute material for the backfill will be paid for as specified for the particular case shown below: (a) No additional payment will be made for backfill materials obtained from surplus material available from the normal excavation or grading operations. (b) When the necessary material is not available from the normal excavation or grading operations, and the Contract includes an item for borrow excavation, backfill material authorized to be obtained from designated borrow areas will be included in the volume of borrow excavation to be paid for. (c) When the necessary material is not available from the normal excavation or grading operations and no separate item for borrow excavation is included in the Contract, any backfill material obtained by increasing the volume of excavation within the roadway right of way will be measured and paid for as regular excavation subject to the provisions of 9-3.2.2. (d) When authorization is given for obtaining the material from outside the right of way and from other than designated borrow areas, such excavation will be paid for as unforeseeable work. (e) Where pipe bedding is provided, as specified in 125-8, by the use of select granular material, the quantity of such select material obtained either as commercial material or from material from the grading operations other than in the immediate vicinity of the pipe to be bedded, as authorized by the Engineer, will be paid for at the Contract price per cubic yard for select bedding material. No payment for this material will be made for material available from the excavation for the pipe culvert or from other material available from the grading operations at a location not sufficiently remote as to require loading on trucks. 125-14.8 Pay Items: Payment for the work under this Section, when provided for directly, shall be made under:

Item No. 125- 1- Excavation for Structures - per cubic yard. Item No. 125- 3- Select Bedding Material - per cubic yard.

SECTION 285OPTIONAL BASE COURSE

285-1 Description. Construct a base course composed of one of the optional materials shown on the typical cross-sections.

285-2 Materials. Meet the material requirements as specified in the Section covering the particular type of base to be constructed.

Graded Aggregate .............................................. Section 204 Asphalt ............................................................... Section 234 Limerock ............................................................ Section 911 Shell Base .......................................................... Section 913 Shell-Rock ....................................................... Section 913A Cemented Coquina ............................................. Section 915

285-3 Selection of Base Option. The Plans will include typical cross-sections indicating the various types of base construction (material and thickness) allowable. Select one base option as allowed for each typical cross-section shown in the Plans. Only one base option is permitted for each typical cross-section. Notify the Engineer in writing of the base option selected for each typical cross-section at least 45 calendar days prior to beginning placement of base material.

285-4 Construction Requirements. Construct the base in accordance with the Section covering the particular type of base to be constructed.

Limerock ............................................................ Section 200 Shell Base .......................................................... Section 200 Shell Rock .......................................................... Section 200 Cemented Coquina ............................................. Section 200 Graded Aggregate .............................................. Section 204 Asphalt ............................................................... Section 234

285-5 Variation in Earthwork Quantities. The Plans will identify the optional materials used by the Department for determining the earthwork quantities (Roadway Excavation, Borrow Excavation, Subsoil Excavation, Subsoil Earthwork, or Embankment). The Department will not revise the quantities, for those items having final pay based on plan quantity, to reflect any volumetric change caused by the Contractor’s selection of a different optional material.

285-6 Thickness Requirements. 285-6.1 Measurements: For non-asphalt bases, meet the requirements of 200-7.3.1.2. For subbases, meet the thickness requirements of 290-4.

The Engineer will determine the thickness of asphalt base courses in accordance with 234-8.1. 285-6.2 Correction of Deficient Areas: For non-asphalt bases, correct all areas of the completed base having a deficiency in thickness in excess of 1/2 inch by scarifying and adding additional base material. As an exception, if authorized by the Engineer, such areas may be left in place without correction and with no payment. For asphalt bases, correct all areas of deficient thickness in accordance with 234-8.

285-7 Calculation of Average Thickness of Base. For bases that are not mixed in place, the Engineer will determine the average thickness from the measurements specified in 285-6.1, calculated as follows; (a) When the measured thickness is more than 1/2 inch greater than the design thickness shown on the typical cross-section in the Plans, it will be considered as the design thickness plus 1/2 inch. (b) Average thickness will be calculated per typical cross-section for the entire job as a unit. (c) Any areas of base left in place with no payment will not be included in the calculations. (d) Where it is not possible through borings to distinguish the base materials from the underlying materials, the thickness of the base used in the measurement will be the design thickness. (e) For Superpave asphalt base course, the average spread rate of each course shall be constructed in compliance with 234-8.

285-8 Method of Measurement. The quantity to be paid for will be the plan quantity area in square yards, omitting any areas where under-thickness is in excess of the allowable tolerance as specified in 285-6. The pay area will be the surface area, determined as provided above, adjusted in accordance with the following formula:

)ThicknessPlan

7-285 perThicknessAverage Calculated( Area Surface= AreaPay

The pay area shall not exceed 105% of the surface area. There will be no adjustment of the pay area on the basis of thickness for base courses constructed utilizing mixed-in-place operations. For Superpave asphalt base course, the quantity to be paid for will be the plan quantity.

285-9 Basis of Payment. Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section, including tack coat between base layers, prime coat, cover material for prime coat, bituminous material used in bituminous plant mix, and cement used in soil-cement. Where the Plans include a typical cross-section which requires the construction of an asphalt base only, price adjustments for bituminous material provided for in 9-2.1.2 will apply to that typical cross-section. For typical cross-sections which permit the use of asphalt or other

materials for construction of an optional base, price adjustments for bituminous material provided for in 9-2.1.2 will not apply. Payment will be made under:

Item No. 285- 7- Optional Base - per square yard.

SECTION 334 SUPERPAVE ASPHALT CONCRETE

334-1 Description. 334-1.1 General: Construct a Superpave Asphalt Concrete pavement with the type of mixture specified in the Contract, or when offered as alternates, as selected. Superpave mixes are identified as Type SP-9.5, Type SP-12.5 or Type SP-19.0. Meet the requirements of Section 320 for plant and equipment. Meet the general construction requirements of Section 330, except as modified herein, including the provision for Quality Control (QC) Plans and Quality Control (QC) Systems as specified in Section 105. 334-1.2 Traffic Levels: The requirements for Type SP Asphalt Concrete mixtures are based on the design traffic level of the project, expressed in 18,000 pound Equivalent Single Axle Loads (ESAL’s). The five traffic levels are as shown in Table 334-1.

Table 334-1Superpave Traffic Levels

Traffic Level� Traffic Level (1x106 ESAL’s)�A� <0.3B� 0.3 to <3C� 3 to <10D� 10 to <30E� �30

The traffic levels for the project are as specified in the Contract. A Type SP mix one traffic level higher than the traffic level specified in the Contract may be substituted, at no cost to the Department (i.e. Traffic Level B may be substituted for Traffic Level A, etc.). 334-1.3 Gradation Classification: The Superpave mixes are classified as either coarse or fine, depending on the overall gradation of the mixture. Coarse and fine mixes are defined in 334-3.2.2. The equivalent AASHTO nominal maximum aggregate size Superpave mixes are as follows:

Type SP-9.5............................................................... 9.5 mm Type SP-12.5........................................................... 12.5 mm Type SP-19.0........................................................... 19.0 mm

334-1.4 Thickness: The total thickness of the Type SP asphalt layers will be the plan thickness as shown in the Contract Documents. Before paving, propose a thickness for each individual layer meeting the requirements of this specification, which when combined with other layers (as applicable) will equal the plan thickness. For construction purposes, the plan thickness and individual layer thickness will be converted to spread rate based on the maximum specific gravity of the asphalt mix being used, as well as the minimum density level, as shown in the following equation: Spread rate (lbs/yd2) = t x Gmm x 43.3 Where: t = Thickness (in.) (plan thickness or individual layer thickness) Gmm = Maximum specific gravity from the verified mix design

The weight of the mixture shall be determined as provided in 320-3.2. For target purposes only, spread rate calculations should be rounded to the nearest whole number. Note: Plan quantities are based on a Gmm of 2.540, corresponding to a spread rate of 110 lbs/yd2-in. Pay quantities will be based on the actual maximum specific gravity of the mix being used. 334-1.4.1 Layer Thicknesses - Fine Mixes: The allowable layer thicknesses for fine Type SP Asphalt Concrete mixtures are as follows:

Type SP-9.5................................................. 1 to 1-1/2 inches Type SP-12.5......................................... 1 1/2 to 2-1/2 inches Type SP-19.0..................................................... 2 to 3 inches

In addition to the minimum and maximum thickness requirements, the following restrictions are placed on fine mixes when used as a structural course: Type SP-9.5 - Limited to the top two structural layers, two layers maximum. Type SP-9.5 – May not be used on Traffic Level D and E applications. Type SP-19.0 - May not be used in the final (top) structural layer. 334-1.4.2 Layer Thicknesses - Coarse Mixes: The allowable layer thicknesses for coarse Type SP Asphalt Concrete mixtures are as follows:

Type SP-9.5................................................. 1-1/2 to 2 inches Type SP-12.5..................................................... 2 to 3 inches Type SP-19.0............................................... 3 to 3-1/2 inches

In addition to the minimum and maximum thickness requirements, the following restrictions are placed on coarse mixes when used as a structural course: Type SP-19.0 - May not be used in the final (top) structural layer. 334-1.4.3 Additional Requirements: The following requirements also apply to coarse and fine Type SP Asphalt Concrete mixtures: 1. A minimum 1-1/2 inch initial lift is required over an Asphalt Rubber Membrane Interlayer (ARMI). 2. When construction includes the paving of adjacent shoulders (less than or equal to 5 feet wide), the layer thickness for the upper pavement layer and shoulder must be the same and paved in a single pass, unless called for differently in the Contract Documents. 3. All overbuild layers must be fine Type SP Asphalt Concrete designed at the traffic level as stated in the Contract Documents. Use the minimum and maximum layer thicknesses as specified above unless called for differently in the Contract Documents. On variable thickness overbuild layers, the minimum and maximum allowable thicknesses will be as specified below, unless called for differently in the Contract Documents.

Type SP-9.5.................................................... 3/8 to 2 inches Type SP-12.5.................................................. 1/2 to 3 inches Type SP-19.0........................................ 1-1/2 to 3-1/2 inches

334-2 Materials. 334-2.1 General Requirements: Meet the material requirements specified in Division III. Specific references are as follows:

Superpave PG Asphalt Binder ..................................... 916-1 Coarse Aggregate ................................................Section 901 Fine Aggregate ....................................................Section 902

334-2.2 Superpave Asphalt Binder: Unless specified otherwise in the Contract, use a PG 67-22 asphalt binder. In addition, meet the requirements of 334-2.3. 334-2.3 Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) Material: 334-2.3.1 General requirements: RAP may be used as a component of the asphalt mixture subject to the following requirements: 1. When using a PG 76-22 Asphalt Binder, limit the amount of RAP material used in the mix to a maximum of 20% by weight of total aggregate. As an exception, amounts greater than 20% RAP by weight of total aggregate can be used if no more than 20% by weight of the total asphalt binder comes from the RAP material. 2. Assume full responsibility for the design, production and construction of asphalt mixes which incorporate RAP as a component material. 3. Use RAP from a Department approved stockpile or RAP that has a Department furnished Pavement Composition Data Sheet. 4. Provide stockpiled RAP material that is reasonably consistent in characteristics and contains no aggregate particles which are soft or conglomerates of fines. 5. Provide RAP material having a minimum average asphalt binder content of 4.0% by weight of RAP. As an exception, when using fractionated RAP, the minimum average asphalt binder content for the coarse portion of the RAP shall be 2.5% by weight of the coarse portion of the RAP. The coarse portion of the RAP shall be the portion of the RAP retained on the No. 4 sieve. The Engineer may sample the stockpiles to verify that this requirement is met. 334-2.3.2 Material Characterization for Mix Design: Assume responsibility for establishing the asphalt binder content, gradation, and bulk specific gravity (Gsb) of the RAP material based on a representative sampling of the material by roadway cores or stockpile samples. For roadway core samples, assume responsibility for the degradation that will occur during the milling operation. 334-2.3.3 RAP Stockpile Approval: Prior to the incorporation of RAP into the asphalt mixture, stockpile the RAP material and obtain approval for the stockpile by one of the following methods: 1. Continuous stockpile: When RAP is obtained from one or multiple sources and is either processed, blended, or fractionated, and stockpiled in a continuous manner, assure an adequate number of test results are obtained for stockpile approval. Test the RAP material for gradation and asphalt content at a minimum frequency of one sample per 1000 tons with a minimum of six test results. Test the RAP material for Gmm (for Gsb determination) at a minimum frequency of one sample per 5000 tons with a minimum of two test results. Based on visual inspection and a review of the test data, the Engineer will determine the suitability of the stockpiled material. In addition, address in the QC Plan the details and specifics of the processing, sampling, testing and actions to be taken. 2. Non-continuous single stockpile: When an individual stockpile is being constructed, obtain representative samples at random locations and test the RAP material for gradation and asphalt content at a minimum frequency of one sample per 1000 tons with a minimum of six test results. Test the RAP material for Gmm (for Gsb determination) at a minimum frequency of one sample per 5000 tons with a minimum of two test results. Based on visual inspection and a review of the test data, the Engineer will determine the suitability of the stockpiled material. Once the RAP stockpile has been approved, do not add additional material without prior approval of the Engineer.

Determine the asphalt binder content and gradation of the RAP material in accordance with FM 5-563 and FM 1-T 030, respectively. Establish the Gsb of the RAP material by using one of the following methods: a. Calculate the Gsb value based upon the effective specific gravity (Gse) of the RAP material, determined on the basis of the asphalt binder content and maximum specific gravity (Gmm) of the RAP material. The Engineer will approve the estimated asphalt binder absorption value used in the calculation. b. Measure the Gsb of the RAP aggregate, in accordance with FM 1-T 084 and FM 1-T 085. Obtain the aggregate by using a solvent extraction method. 334-2.3.4 Pavement Composition: When the Contract includes milling of the existing asphalt pavement, the Pavement Coring Report may be available on the Department’s website. 334-2.3.5 Asphalt Binder for Mixes with RAP: Select the appropriate asphalt binder grade based on Table 334-2. Obtain a sample of the mixture for the Engineer within the first 1,000 tons of production and at a continuing frequency of one sample per 4,000 tons of mix. The Engineer reserves the right to change the asphalt binder type and grade at design based on the characteristics of the RAP asphalt binder, and reserves the right to make changes during production.

Table 334-2Asphalt Binder Grade for Mixes Containing RAP

Percent RAP� Asphalt Binder Grade�0 - 15� PG 67-22�16 - 30� PG 58-22�

>30� PG 52-28� 334-2.4 Recycled Crushed Glass: Recycled crushed glass may be used as a component of the asphalt mixture subject to the following requirements: 1. Consider the recycled crushed glass a local material and meet all requirements specified in 902-6. 2. Limit the amount of recycled crushed glass to a maximum of 15% by weight of total aggregate. 3. Use an asphalt binder that contains a minimum of 0.5% anti-stripping agent by weight of binder. The antistrip additive shall be one of the products listed on the Qualified Products List (QPL). The antistrip additive shall be introduced into the asphalt binder by the supplier during loading. 4. Do not use recycled crushed glass in friction course mixtures or in structural course mixtures which are to be used as the final wearing surface.

334-3 General Composition of Mixture. 334-3.1 General: Compose the asphalt mixture using a combination of aggregate (coarse, fine or mixtures thereof), mineral filler, if required, and asphalt binder material. Size, grade and combine the aggregate fractions to meet the grading and physical properties of the mix design. Aggregates from various sources may be combined. 334-3.2 Mix Design:

334-3.2.1 General: Design the asphalt mixture in accordance with AASHTO R35-09, except as noted herein. Prior to the production of any asphalt mixture, submit the proposed mix design with supporting test data indicating compliance with all mix design criteria to the Engineer. For Traffic Level B through E mix designs, include representative samples of all component materials, including asphalt binder. Allow the State Materials Engineer a maximum of four weeks to either conditionally verify or reject the mix as designed. Do not use more than three mix designs per nominal maximum aggregate size per traffic level per binder grade per year, where the year starts at the Notice to Proceed. Exceeding this limitation will result in a maximum Composite Pay Factor of 1.00 as defined in 334-8.2 for all designs used beyond this limit. Warm mix technologies (additives, foaming techniques, etc.) listed on the Department’s website may be used in the production of the mix. The URL for obtaining this information, if available, is: http://www.dot.state.fl.us/Specificationsoffice/implemented/URLinSpecs/files/WarmMixAsphalt.pdf . The Engineer will consider any marked variations from original test data for a mix design or any evidence of inadequate field performance of a mix design as sufficient evidence that the properties of the mix design have changed, and the Engineer will no longer allow the use of the mix design. 334-3.2.2 Mixture Gradation Requirements: Combine the coarse and fine aggregate in proportions that will produce an asphalt mixture meeting all of the requirements defined in this specification and conform to the gradation requirements at design as defined in AASHTO M323-07, Table 3. Aggregates from various sources may be combined. 334-3.2.2.1 Mixture Gradation Classification: Plot the combined mixture gradation on an FHWA 0.45 Power Gradation Chart. Include the Control Points from AASHTO M323-07, Table-3, as well as the Primary Control Sieve (PCS) Control Point from AASHTO M323-07, Table 4. Coarse mixes are defined as having a combined aggregate gradation that passes below the primary control sieve control point and below the maximum density line for all sieve sizes smaller than the primary control sieve. Fine mixes are defined as having a gradation that passes above the primary control sieve control point and above the maximum density line for all sieve sizes smaller than the primary control sieve and larger than the No. 100 sieve. Use a fine mix for Traffic Levels A through C; use either a coarse mix or fine mix for Traffic Levels D and E. 334-3.2.3 Aggregate Consensus Properties: For Traffic Level C through E mixtures, meet the following consensus properties at design for the aggregate blend. Aggregate consensus properties do not apply to Traffic Level A and B mixtures. 334-3.2.3.1 Coarse Aggregate Angularity: When tested in accordance with ASTM D 5821, meet the percentage of fractured faces requirements specified in AASHTO M 323-07, Table 5. 334-3.2.3.2 Fine Aggregate Angularity: When tested in accordance with AASHTO T 304-11, Method A, meet the uncompacted void content of fine aggregate specified in AASHTO M 323-07, Table 5. 334-3.2.3.3 Flat and Elongated Particles: When tested in accordance with ASTM D 4791, (with the exception that the material passing the 3/8 inch sieve and retained on the No. 4 sieve shall be included), meet the requirements specified in AASHTO M 323-07,

Table 5. Measure the aggregate using the ratio of 5:1, comparing the length (longest dimension) to the thickness (shortest dimension) of the aggregate particles. 334-3.2.3.4 Sand Equivalent: When tested in accordance with AASHTO T 176-08, meet the sand equivalent requirements specified in AASHTO M 323-07, Table 5. 334-3.2.4 Gyratory Compaction: Compact the design mixture in accordance with AASHTO T 312-11, with the following exception: use the number of gyrations at Ndesign as defined in Table 334-3. Measure the inside diameter of gyratory molds in accordance with AASHTO T 312-11.

Table 334-3Gyratory Compaction Requirements

Traffic Level� Ndesign Number of Gyrations�A� 50�B� 65�C� 75�D� 100�E� 100�

334-3.2.5 Design Criteria: Meet the requirements for nominal maximum aggregate size as defined in AASHTO M 323-07, as well as for relative density, VMA, VFA, and dust-to-binder ratio as specified in AASHTO M 323-07, Table 6. Use a dust-to-binder ratio of 0.8 to 1.6 for coarse mixes. Ninitial and Nmaximum requirements are not applicable. 334-3.2.6 Moisture Susceptibility: 1. For Traffic Level A and B mixtures, use a liquid anti-strip additive, at a rate of 0.5% by weight of the asphalt binder. The anti-strip additive must be listed on the QPL. Other rates of anti-strip additive may be used upon approval of the Engineer. 2. For Traffic Level C through E mixtures, test 4 inch specimens in accordance with FM 1-T 283. Provide a mixture having a retained tensile strength ratio of at least 0.80 and a minimum tensile strength (unconditioned) of 100 psi. If necessary, add a liquid anti-stripping agent and/or hydrated lime (meeting the requirements of Section 337) in order to meet these criteria. The anti-strip additive must be listed on the QPL. 334-3.2.7 Additional Information: In addition to the requirements listed above, provide the following information with each proposed mix design submitted for verification: 1. The design traffic level and the design number of gyrations (Ndesign). 2. The source and description of the materials to be used. 3. The Department source number and the Department product code of the aggregate components furnished from a Department approved source. 4. The gradation and proportions of the raw materials as intended to be combined in the paving mixture. The gradation of the component materials shall be representative of the material at the time of use. Compensate for any change in aggregate gradation caused by handling and processing as necessary. 5. A single percentage of the combined mineral aggregate passing each specified sieve. Degradation of the aggregate due to processing (particularly material passing the No. 200 sieve) should be accounted for and identified.

6. The bulk specific gravity (Gsb) value for each individual aggregate and RAP component, as identified in the Department’s aggregate control program. 7. A single percentage of asphalt binder by weight of total mix intended to be incorporated in the completed mixture, shown to the nearest 0.1%. 8. A target temperature for the mixture at the plant (mixing temperature) and a target temperature for the mixture at the roadway (compaction temperature) in accordance with 320-6.3. Do not exceed a target temperature of 330°F for PG 76-22 asphalt binders, 320°F for ARB-12 asphalt binders, and 315°F for ARB-5 and unmodified asphalt binders. 9. Provide the physical properties achieved at four different asphalt binder contents. One of which must be at the optimum asphalt content, and must conform to all specified physical requirements. 10. The name of the CTQP Qualified Mix Designer. 11. The ignition oven calibration factor. 12. The warm mix technology, if used. 334-3.3 Mix Design Revisions: During production, the Contractor may request a target value revision to a mix design, subject to meeting the following requirements: (1) the target change falls within the limits defined in Table 334-4, (2) appropriate data exists demonstrating that the mix complies with production air voids specification criteria, and (3) the mixture gradation meets the basic gradation requirements defined in 334-3.2.2.

Table 334-4�Limits for Potential Adjustments to Mix Design Target Values�Characteristic� Limit from Original Mix Design

No. 8 sieve and Coarser ± 5.0%�No. 16 sieve� ± 4.0%�No. 30 sieve� ± 4.0%�No. 50 sieve� ± 3.0%�No. 100 sieve� � 3.0%�No. 200 sieve� � 1.0%�

Asphalt Binder Content (1) � 0.3% Each Component of Aggregate Blend (2) � 5.0 %

(1) Reductions to the asphalt binder content will not be permitted if the VMA during production is lower than 1.0% below the design criteria. (2) Revisions to FC-5 mixtures to be determined by the Engineer. Submit all requests for revisions to mix designs, along with supporting documentation, to the Engineer. In order to expedite the revision process, the request for revision or discussions on the possibility of a revision may be made verbally, but must be followed up by a written request. The verified mix design will remain in effect until the Engineer authorizes a change. In no case will the effective date of the revision be established earlier than the date of the first communication between the Contractor and the Engineer regarding the revision. A new design mix will be required if aggregate sources change, or for any substitution of an aggregate product with a different aggregate code, unless approved by the Engineer.

334-4 Contractor Process Control. Assume full responsibility for controlling all operations and processes such that the requirements of these Specifications are met at all times. Perform any tests necessary at the plant and roadway for process control purposes. Enter all Process Control test data into the Department’s Laboratory Information Management System (LIMS) database. The Engineer will not use these test results in the acceptance payment decision. Address in the QC Plan how Process Control failures will be handled. When a Process Control failure occurs, investigate, at a minimum, the production process, testing equipment and/or sampling methods to determine the cause of the failure, and make any necessary changes to assure compliance with these Specifications. Obtain a follow up sample immediately after corrective actions are taken to assess the adequacy of the corrections. In the event the follow-up Process Control sample also fails to meet Specification requirements, cease production of the asphalt mixture until the problem is adequately resolved to the satisfaction of the QC Manager.

334-5 Acceptance of the Mixture. 334-5.1 General: The mixture will be accepted at the plant with respect to gradation (P-8 and P-200), asphalt content (Pb), and volumetrics (volumetrics is defined as air voids at Ndesign). The mixture will be accepted on the roadway with respect to density of roadway cores. Acceptance will be on a LOT by LOT basis (for each mix design) based on tests of random samples obtained within each sublot taken at a frequency of one set of samples per sublot. A roadway LOT and a plant production LOT shall be the same. Acceptance of the mixture will be based on Contractor QC test results that have been verified by the Department. 334-5.1.1 Sampling and Testing Requirements: Obtain the samples in accordance with FM 1-T 168. Obtain samples at the plant of a sufficient quantity to be split into three smaller samples; one for QC, one for Verification and one for Resolution testing; each sample at approximately 35 pounds. The split samples for Verification testing and Resolution testing shall be reduced in size and stored in three boxes each. The approximate size of each box must be 12 inches x 8 inches x 4 inches. Provide, label and safely store sample boxes in a manner agreed upon by the Engineer for future testing. The asphalt content of the mixture will be determined in accordance with FM 5-563. The gradation of the recovered aggregate will be determined in accordance with FM 1-T 030. Volumetric testing will be in accordance with AASHTO T 312-11 and FM 1-T 209. Measure the inside diameter of gyratory molds in accordance with FM 5-585. Prior to testing volumetric samples, condition the test-sized sample for one hour, plus or minus five minutes, at the target roadway compaction temperature in a shallow, flat pan, such that the mixture temperature at the end of the one hour conditioning period is within plus or minus 20°F of the roadway compaction temperature. Test for roadway density in accordance with FM 1-T 166. 334-5.1.2 Acceptance Testing Exceptions: When the total combined quantity of hot mix asphalt for the project, as indicated in the Plans for Type SP and Type FC mixtures only, is less than 2000 tons, the Engineer will accept the mix on the basis of visual inspection. The Engineer may require the Contractor to run process control tests for informational purposes, as defined in 334-4, or may run independent verification tests to determine the acceptability of the material. Density testing for acceptance will not be performed on widening strips or shoulders with a width of 5 feet or less, open-graded friction courses, variable thickness overbuild courses, leveling courses, any asphalt layer placed on subgrade (regardless of type), miscellaneous asphalt pavement, shared use paths, crossovers, or any course with a specified

thickness less than 1 inch or a specified spread rate that converts to less than 1 inch as described in 334-1.4. Density testing for acceptance will not be performed on asphalt courses placed on bridge decks or approach slabs; compact these courses in static mode only per the requirements of 330-7.7. In addition, density testing for acceptance will not be performed on the following areas when they are less than 1,000 feet (continuous) in length: turning lanes, acceleration lanes, deceleration lanes, shoulders, parallel parking lanes or ramps. Do not perform density testing for acceptance in situations where the areas requiring density testing is less than 50 tons within a sublot. Density testing for acceptance will not be performed in intersections. The limits of the intersection will be from stop bar to stop bar for both the mainline and side streets. A random core location that occurs within the intersection shall be moved forward or backward from the intersection at the direction of the Engineer. Where density testing for acceptance is not required, compact these courses (with the exception of open-graded friction courses) in accordance with the rolling procedure (equipment and pattern) as approved by the Engineer or with Standard Rolling Procedure as specified in 330-7.2. In the event that the rolling procedure deviates from the procedure approved by the Engineer, or the Standard Rolling Procedure, placement of the mix shall be stopped. The density pay factor (as defined in 334-8.2) for areas not requiring density testing for acceptance will be paid at the same density pay factor as for the areas requiring density testing within the same LOT. If the entire LOT does not require density testing for acceptance, the LOT will be paid at a density pay factor of 1.00. 334-5.2 Full LOTs: Each LOT will be defined (as selected by the Contractor prior to the start of the LOT) as either (1) 2,000 tons, with each LOT subdivided into four equal sublots of 500 tons each, or (2) 4,000 tons, with each LOT subdivided into four equal sublots of 1,000 tons each. As an exception to this, the initial LOT of all new mix designs shall be defined as 2,000 tons, subdivided into four equal sublots of 500 tons each. Before the beginning of a LOT, the Engineer will develop a random sampling plan for each sublot and direct the Contractor on sample points, based on tonnage, for each sublot during construction. 334-5.3 Partial LOTs: A partial LOT is defined as a LOT size that is less than a full LOT. A partial LOT may occur due to the following: l. The completion of a given mix type or mix design on a project. 2. Closure of the LOT due to time. LOTs will be closed 30 calendar days after the start of the LOT. Time periods other than 30 calendar days may be used if agreed to by both the Engineer and the Contractor. 3. A LOT is terminated per 334-5.4.4. All partial LOTs will be evaluated based on the number of tests available, and will not be redefined. If a LOT is closed before the first plant random sample is obtained, then the LOT will be visually accepted by the Engineer and the LOT pay factor will be 1.00. 334-5.4 QC Sampling and Testing: Obtain all samples randomly as directed by the Engineer. Should the Engineer determine that the QC requirements are not being met or that unsatisfactory results are being obtained, or should any instances of falsification of test data occur, approval of the Contractor’s QC Plan will be suspended and production will be stopped. 334-5.4.1 Lost or Missing Verification/Resolution Samples: In the event that any of the Verification and/or Resolution samples that are in the custody of the Contractor are

lost, damaged, destroyed, or are otherwise unavailable for testing, the minimum possible pay factor for each quality characteristic as described in 334-8.2 will be applied to the entire LOT in question, unless called for otherwise by the Engineer. Specifically, if the LOT in question has more than two sublots, the pay factor for each quality characteristic will be 0.55. If the LOT has two or less sublots, the pay factor for each quality characteristic will be 0.80. In either event, the material in question will also be evaluated in accordance with 334-5.9.5. If any of the Verification and/or Resolution samples that are in the custody of the Department are lost, damaged, destroyed or are otherwise unavailable for testing, the corresponding QC test result will be considered verified, and payment will be based upon the Contractor’s data. 334-5.4.2 Plant Sampling and Testing Requirements: Obtain one random sample of mix per sublot in accordance with 334-5.1.1 as directed by the Engineer. Test the QC split sample for gradation, asphalt binder content and volumetrics in accordance with 334-5.1.1. Complete all QC testing within one working day from the time the samples were obtained. 334-5.4.3 Roadway Sampling and Testing Requirements: Obtain five 6 inch diameter roadway cores within 24 hours of placement at random locations as directed by the Engineer within each sublot. Test these QC samples for density (Gmb) in accordance with 334-5.1.1. Obtain a minimum of three cores per sublot at random locations as identified by the Engineer in situations where the sublot/LOT was closed or terminated before the random numbers were reached or where it is impractical to cut five cores per sublot. Do not obtain cores any closer than 12 inches from an unsupported edge. The Engineer may adjust randomly generated core locations for safety purposes or as the Engineer deems necessary. Maintain traffic during the coring operation; core the roadway, patch the core holes (within three days of coring); and trim the cores to the proper thickness prior to density testing.

Density for the sublot shall be based on the average value for the cores cut from the sublot with the target density being the maximum specific gravity (Gmm) of the sublot. Once the average density of a sublot has been determined, do not retest the samples unless approved by the Engineer. Ensure proper handling and storage of all cores until the LOT in question has been accepted. 334-5.4.4 Individual Test Tolerances for QC Testing: Terminate the LOT if any of the following QC failures occur: 1) An individual test result of a sublot for air voids does not meet the requirements of Table 334-5, 2) The average sublot density does not meet the requirements of Table 334-5, 3) Two consecutive test results within the same LOT for gradation or asphalt binder content do not meet the requirements of Table 334-5, 4) Two core densities for coarse mixes within a sublot are less than 91.00% of Gmm. When a LOT is terminated due to a QC failure, stop production of the mixture until the problem is resolved to the satisfaction of the QC Manager and/or Asphalt Plant Level II technician responsible for the decision to resume production after a QC failure, as identified in 105-8.6.4. In the event that it can be demonstrated that the problem can immediately be or already has been resolved, it will not be necessary to stop production. When a LOT is terminated, make all necessary changes to correct the problem. Do not resume production until appropriate corrections have been made. Inform the Engineer of the problem and corrections

made to correct the problem. After resuming production, sample and test the material to verify that the changes have corrected the problem. Summarize this information and provide it to the Engineer prior to the end of the work shift when production resumes. In the event that a QC failure is not addressed as defined above, the Engineer’s approval will be required prior to resuming production after any future QC failures. Address any material represented by a failing test result in accordance with 334-5.9.5. Any LOT terminated under this subarticle will be limited to a maximum Pay Factor of 1.00 (as defined in 334-8.2) for each quality characteristic. In the event that a Gmm test result differs by more than 0.040 from the mix design Gmm, investigate the causes of the discrepancy and report the findings and proposed actions to the Engineer.

Table 334-5�Master Production Range�

Characteristic� Tolerance (1)�Asphalt Binder Content (%) Target ±0.55�Passing No. 200 Sieve (%) Target ±1.50�

Air Voids (%) Coarse Graded 2.00 - 6.00�Air Voids (%) Fine Graded 2.30 – 6.00�

Density (% Gmm) (2)� �Coarse Graded (minimum) 93.00�Fine Graded (minimum) 90.00�

(1) Tolerances for sample size of n = 1 from the verified mix design(2) Based on an average of 5 randomly located cores 334-5.5 Verification Testing: In order to determine the validity of the Contractor’s QC test results prior to their use in the Acceptance decision, the Engineer will run verification tests. 334-5.5.1 Plant Testing: At the completion of each LOT, the Engineer will test a minimum of one Verification split sample randomly selected from the LOT. Results of the testing and analysis for the LOT will be made available to the Contractor within one working day from the time the LOT is completed. Verification samples shall be reheated at the target roadway compaction temperature for 1-1/2 hours, plus or minus 5 minutes, reduced to the appropriate testing size, and conditioned and tested as described in 334-5.1.1. In lieu of the 1-1/2 hours reheating procedure, the mixture may be reheated to within plus or minus 20°F of the roadway compaction temperature using a microwave oven. Stir the mixture as necessary during the reheating process to maintain temperature uniformity. Subsequently, condition and test the mixture as described in 334-5.1.1. The Verification test results will be compared with the QC test results based on the between-laboratory precision values shown in Table 334-6.

Table 334-6Between-Laboratory Precision Values

Property� Maximum Difference�Gmm� 0.016�

Gmb (gyratory compacted samples) 0.022�Gmb (roadway cores – fine graded mixture) 0.015

Table 334-6Between-Laboratory Precision Values

Property� Maximum Difference�Gmb (roadway cores – coarse graded mixture) 0.018

Pb� 0.44%�P-200� FM 1-T 030 (Figure 2)�P-8� FM 1-T 030 (Figure 2)�

If all of the specified mix characteristics compare favorably, then the LOT will be accepted, with payment based on the Contractor’s QC test data for the LOT. If any of the results do not compare favorably, then the Resolution samples from the LOT will be sent to the Resolution laboratory for testing, as described in 334-5.6. 334-5.5.2 Roadway Testing: At the completion of each LOT, the Engineer will determine the density (Gmb) of each core (previously tested by Quality Control) as described in 334-5.1.1 from the same sublot as the plant samples. For situations where roadway density is not required for the random sublot chosen, then another sublot shall be randomly chosen for roadway density cores only. Results of the testing and analysis for the LOT will be made available to the Contractor within one working day from the time the LOT is completed.

The individual Verification test results will be compared with individual QC test results by the Engineer based on the between-laboratory precision values given in Table 334-6. If each of the core test results compare favorably, then the LOT will be accepted with respect to density, with payment based on the Contractor’s QC test data for the LOT. If any of the results do not compare favorably, then the core samples from the LOT will be sent to the Resolution laboratory for testing as specified in 334-5.6. 334-5.6 Resolution System: 334-5.6.1 Plant Samples: In the event of an unfavorable comparison between the Contractor’s QC test results and the Engineer’s Verification test results on any of the properties identified in Table 334-6, the Resolution laboratory will test all of the split samples from the LOT for only the property (or properties) in question. Resolution samples shall be reheated at the target roadway compaction temperature for 1-1/2 hours, plus or minus 5 minutes, reduced to the appropriate testing size, and conditioned and tested as described in 334-5.1.1. In lieu of the 1-1/2 hours reheating procedure, the mixture may be reheated to within plus or minus 20°F of the roadway compaction temperature using a microwave oven. Stir the mixture as necessary during the reheating process to maintain temperature uniformity. Subsequently, condition and test the mixture as described in 334-5.1.1. 334-5.6.2 Roadway Samples: In the event of an unfavorable comparison between the Contractor’s QC test data and the Engineer’s Verification test data on the density results, the Resolution laboratory will test all of the cores from the LOT. Testing will be as described in 334-5.1.1. Any damaged roadway cores will not be included in the evaluation; replace damaged cores with additional cores at the direction of the Engineer. 334-5.6.3 Resolution Determination: The Resolution test results (for the property or properties in question) will be compared with the QC test results based on the between-laboratory precision values shown in Table 334-6.

If the Resolution laboratory results compare favorably with all of the QC results, then acceptance and payment for the LOT will be based on the QC results, and the Department will bear the costs associated with Resolution testing. No additional compensation, either monetary or time, will be made for the impacts of any such testing. If the Resolution laboratory results do not compare favorably with all of the QC results, then acceptance and payment for the LOT will be based on the Resolution test data for the LOT, and the costs of the Resolution testing will be deducted from monthly estimates. No additional time will be granted for the impacts of any such testing. In addition, in the event that the application of the Resolution test data results in a failure to meet the requirements of Table 334-5, address any material represented by the failing test result in accordance with 334-5.9.5.

In the event of an unfavorable comparison between the Resolution test results and QC test results, make the necessary adjustments to assure that future comparisons are favorable. 334-5.7 Independent Verification Testing: 334-5.7.1 Plant: The Contractor shall provide sample boxes and take samples as directed by the Engineer for Independent Verification testing. Obtain enough material for three complete sets of tests (two samples for Independent Verification testing by the Engineer and one sample for testing by the Contractor). If agreed upon by both the Engineer and the Contractor, only one sample for Independent Verification testing by the Engineer may be obtained. Independent Verification samples will be reheated at the target roadway compaction temperature for 1-1/2 hours, plus or minus 5 minutes, reduced to the appropriate testing size, and conditioned and tested as described in 334-5.1.1. The Contractor’s split sample, if tested immediately after sampling, shall be reduced to the appropriate testing size, and conditioned and tested as described in 334-5.1.1. If the Contractor’s sample is not tested immediately after sampling, then the sample shall be reheated at the target roadway compaction temperature for 1-1/2 hours, plus or minus 5 minutes, reduced to the appropriate testing size, and conditioned and tested as described in 334-5.1.1. For the Independent Verification and Contractor's samples, in lieu of the 1-1/2 hours reheating procedure, the mixture may be reheated to within plus or minus 20°F of the roadway compaction temperature using a microwave oven. Stir the mixture as necessary during the reheating process to maintain temperature uniformity. Subsequently, condition and test the mixture as described in 334-5.1.1. The Contractor’s test results shall be provided to the Engineer within one working day from the time the sample was obtained. If any of the Independent Verification test results do not meet the requirements of Table 334-5, then a comparison of the Independent Verification test results and the Contractor’s test results, if available, will be made. If a comparison of the Independent Verification test results and the Contractor’s test results meets the precision values of Table 334-6 for the material properties in question, or if the Contractor’s test results are not available, then the Independent Verification test results are considered verified and the Contractor shall cease production of the asphalt mixture until the problem is adequately resolved (to the satisfaction of the Engineer), unless it can be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the problem can immediately be (or already has been) resolved. Address any material represented by the failing test results in accordance with 334-5.9.5. If a comparison of the Independent Verification test results and the Contractor’s test results does not meet the precision values of Table 334-6 for the material properties in question, then the second Independent Verification sample shall be tested by the

Engineer for the material properties in question. If a comparison between the first and second Independent Verification test results does not meet the precision values of Table 334-6 for the material properties in question, then the first Independent Verification test results are considered unverified for the material properties in question and no action shall be taken. If a comparison between the first and second Independent Verification test results meets the precision values of Table 334-6 for the material properties in question, then the first Independent Verification sample is considered verified and the Contractor shall cease production of the asphalt mixture until the problem is adequately resolved (to the satisfaction of the Engineer), unless it can be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the problem can immediately be (or already has been) resolved. Address any material represented by the failing test results in accordance with 334-5.9.5. The Engineer has the option to use the Independent Verification sample for comparison testing as specified in 334-6. 334-5.7.2 Roadway: Obtain five 6 inch diameter roadway cores within 24 hours of placement, as directed by the Engineer, for Independent Verification testing. In situations where it is impractical to cut five cores per sublot, obtain a minimum of three cores per sublot at random locations, as identified by the Engineer. These independent cores will be obtained from the same LOTs and sublots as the Independent Verification Plant samples, or as directed by the Engineer. The density of these cores will be obtained as described in 334-5.1.1. If the average of the results for the sublot does not meet the requirements of Table 334-5 for density, cease production of the asphalt mixture until the problem is adequately resolved (to the satisfaction of the Engineer), unless it can be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the problem can immediately be (or already has been) resolved. Address any material represented by the failing test results in accordance with 334-5.9.5. 334-5.8 Surface Tolerance: The asphalt mixture will be accepted on the roadway with respect to surface tolerance in accordance with the applicable requirements of 330-9. 334-5.9 Minimum Acceptable Quality Levels: 334-5.9.1 Pay Factors Below 0.90: In the event that an individual pay factor for any quality characteristic of a LOT falls below 0.90, take steps to correct the situation and report the actions to the Engineer. In the event that the pay factor for the same quality characteristic for two consecutive LOTs is below 0.90, cease production of the asphalt mixture until the problem is adequately resolved (to the satisfaction of the Engineer), unless it can be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the problem can immediately be (or already has been) resolved. Actions taken must be approved by the Engineer before production resumes. 334-5.9.2 Composite Pay Factors Less Than 0.90 and Greater Than or Equal to 0.80: If the composite pay factor for the LOT is less than 0.90 and greater than or equal to 0.80, cease production of the asphalt mixture until the problem is adequately resolved (to the satisfaction of the Engineer), unless it can be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the problem can immediately be (or already has been) resolved. Actions taken must be approved by the Engineer before production resumes. 334-5.9.3 Composite Pay Factors Less Than 0.80 and Greater Than or Equal to 0.75: If the composite pay factor for the LOT is less than 0.80 and greater than or equal to 0.75, address the defective material in accordance with 334-5.9.5. 334-5.9.4 Composite Pay Factors Less Than 0.75: If the composite pay factor for the LOT is less than 0.75, remove and replace the defective LOT at no cost to the Department, or as approved by the Engineer.

334-5.9.5 Defective Material: Assume responsibility for removing and replacing all defective material placed on the project, at no cost to the Department. As an exception to the above and upon approval of the Engineer, obtain an engineering analysis by an independent laboratory (as approved by the Engineer) to determine the disposition of the material. The engineering analysis must be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Florida. The Engineer may determine that an engineering analysis is not necessary or may perform an engineering analysis to determine the disposition of the material. Any material that remains in place will be accepted with a composite pay factor as determined by 334-8, or as determined by the Engineer. If the defective material is due to a gradation, asphalt binder content or density failure, upon approval of the Engineer the Contractor may perform delineation tests on roadway cores in lieu of an engineering analysis to determine the limits of the defective material that may require removal and replacement. Prior to any delineation testing, all sampling locations shall be approved by the Engineer. All delineation sampling and testing shall be monitored and verified by the Engineer. For materials that are defective due to air voids, an engineering analysis is required. When evaluating defective material by engineering analysis or delineation testing, at a minimum, evaluate all material located between passing QC, Process Control or Independent Verification test results. Exceptions to this requirement shall be approved by the Engineer.

334-6 Comparison Testing. At the start of the project (unless waived by the Engineer) and at other times as determined necessary by the Engineer, provide split samples for comparison testing with the Engineer. The purpose of these tests is to verify that the testing equipment is functioning properly and that the testing procedures are being performed correctly. In the event that the Engineer determines that there is a problem with the Contractor’s testing equipment and/or testing procedures, immediately correct the problem to the Engineer’s satisfaction. In the event that the problem is not immediately corrected, cease production of the asphalt mixture until the problem is adequately resolved to the satisfaction of the Engineer. If so agreed to by both the Contractor and the Engineer, the split sample used for comparison testing may also be used for the QC sample. The split sample used for comparison testing must also meet the requirements for Independent Verification Testing described in 334-5.7.

334-7 Method of Measurement. For the work specified under this Section (including the pertinent provisions of

Sections 320 and 330), the quantity to be paid for will be the weight of the mixture, in tons. The pay quantity will be based on the project average spread rate, excluding overbuild, limited to a maximum of 105% of the spread rate determined in accordance with 334-1.4 or as set by the Engineer. The project average spread rate is calculated by totaling the arithmetic mean of the average daily spread rate values for each layer. The bid price for the asphalt mix will include the cost of the liquid asphalt or the asphalt recycling agent and the tack coat application as directed in 300-8. There will be no separate payment or unit price adjustment for the asphalt binder material in the asphalt mix. For the calculation of unit price adjustments of bituminous material, the average asphalt content will be

based on the percentage specified in 9-2.1.2. The weight will be determined as provided in 320-3.2 (including the provisions for the automatic recordation system). Prepare a Certification of Quantities, using the Department’s current approved form, for the certified Superpave asphalt concrete pay item. Submit this certification to the Engineer no later than Twelve O’clock noon Monday after the estimate cut-off or as directed by the Engineer, based on the quantity of asphalt produced and accepted on the roadway per Contract. The certification must include the Contract Number, FPID Number, Certification Number, Certification Date, period represented by Certification and the tons produced for each asphalt pay item.

334-8 Basis of Payment. 334-8.1 General: Price and payment will be full compensation for all the work specified under this Section (including the applicable requirements of Sections 320 and 330). For materials accepted in accordance with 334-5, based upon the quality of the material, a pay adjustment will be applied to the bid price of the material as determined on a LOT by LOT basis. The pay adjustment will be assessed by calculating a Pay Factor for the following individual quality characteristics: pavement density, air voids, asphalt binder content, and the percentage passing the No. 200 and No. 8 sieves. The pay adjustment will be computed by multiplying a Composite Pay Factor for the LOT by the bid price per ton. Perform all calculations using the latest version of the Department’s Asphalt Plant Worksheet. 334-8.2 Pay Factors: 334-8.2.1 Partial LOTs: For Partial LOTs where no random sample is obtained due to insufficient tonnage, a Composite Pay Factor of 1.00 shall be applied. 334-8.2.2 Two or Less Sublot Test Results: In the event that two or less sublot test results are available for a LOT, Pay Factors will be determined based on the Small Quantity Pay Table. The Small Quantity Pay Table and Pay Factor calculations are determined in accordance with the instructions contained within the Department’s Asphalt Plant Worksheet. 334-8.2.3 Three or More Sublot Test Results: When three or more sublot test results are available for a LOT, the variability-unknown, standard deviation method will be used to determine the estimated percentage of the LOT that is within the specification limits shown in Table 334-7. The Percent Within Limits (PWL) is determined in accordance with the instructions contained within the Department’s Asphalt Plant Worksheet.

Table 334-7Specification Limits

Quality Characteristic� Specification Limits�Passing No. 8 sieve (%) Target ± 3.1�

Passing No. 200 sieve (%) Target ± 1.0�Asphalt Content (%)� Target ± 0.40�

Air Voids - Coarse Mixes (%) 4.00 ± 1.40�Air Voids - Fine Mixes (%) 4.00 ± 1.20�

Density - Coarse Mixes (% of Gmm): 94.50 ± 1.30�Density - Fine Mixes (% of Gmm): 93.00 + 2.00, - 1.20 (1)�

Note (1): If the Engineer (or Contract Documents) limits compaction to the static mode only, or for all one-inch thick lifts, compaction shall be in the static mode. No vibratory mode in the vertical direction will be allowed. Other vibratory modes will be allowed, if approved by the Engineer. In either case, the specification limits will be as follows: 92.00 + 3.00, -1.20%of Gmm. No additional compensation, cost or time, shall be made.

334-8.2.3.1 Pay Factors (PF): Pay Factors will be calculated by using the following equation: Pay Factor = (55 + 0.5 x PWL) / 100 The PWL is determined in accordance with the instructions contained within the Department’s Asphalt Plant Worksheet. 334-8.3 Composite Pay Factor (CPF): A Composite Pay Factor for the LOT will be calculated based on the individual Pay Factors (PF) with the following weighting applied: 35% Density (D), 25% Air Voids (Va), 25% asphalt binder content (Pb), 10% Passing No. 200 (P-200) and 5% Passing No. 8 (P-8). Calculate the CPF by using the following formula: CPF = [(0.350 x PF D) + (0.250 x PF Va) + (0.250 x PF Pb) + (0.100 x PF P-200) + (0.050 x PF P-8)] Where the Pay Factor (PF) for each quality characteristic is determined in either 334-8.2.2 or 334-8.2.3, depending on the number of sublot tests. Note that the number after each multiplication will be rounded to the nearest 0.01. The pay adjustment shall be computed by multiplying the Composite Pay Factor for the LOT by the bid price per ton. 334-8.4 Payment: Payment will be made under:

Item No. 334- 1- Superpave Asphaltic Concrete - per ton.

SECTION 339MISCELLANEOUS ASPHALT PAVEMENT

339-1 Description.Construct asphalt pavement in areas where vehicular traffic does not travel, such as

pavement under guardrail, bicycle paths, median pavement, sidewalks, etc. Also, chemically treat the underlying soil to prevent plant growth.

339-2 Materials. For the pavement, use any plant-mixed hot bituminous mixture meeting the requirements of a mix design verified by the Engineer, except do not use open-graded friction course (FC-5). For bicycle paths, use a mixture that produces a finished pavement which will not distort or mar under bicycle or mower wheel loads. In general, the Engineer will accept the mixture on the basis of visual inspection with no further testing required.

339-3 Foundation and Soil Treatment.Shape the soil in areas where pavement is to be constructed, to a surface true to the lines,

grades and typical cross-sections shown in the Plans. Compact the soil to a firm state. Immediately before placing the pavement, uniformly apply a pre-emergent herbicide in accordance with the requirements of 7-1.7, to the foundation soil. Ensure that the herbicide carries an approved label for use under paved surfaces, and that herbicide is applied in accordance with directions on the label. Prevent damage to any adjacent vegetation during herbicide application. Replace, at no expense to the Department, any plants damaged as the result of soil treatment outside designatedareas.

339-4 Placing Mixture. Uniformly place the hot bituminous mixture by machine or hand methods at the rate of spread or dimensions indicated in the Plans or as otherwise directed by the Engineer. If posts are to be constructed within the pavement area, the Contractor may cut holes for installation through the completed pavement. After completing installation of posts and compaction of the backfill material, patch the area around each post with fresh hot bituminous mixture.

If directed by the Engineer, place miscellaneous asphalt pavement prior to placement of the final surface course.

339-5 Compacting Mixture. Uniformly compact the hot bituminous mixture with lightweight rollers or vibratory

compactors as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor may use hand tamps for compaction in areas which are inaccessible to other compaction equipment.

The Engineer will not require a specific density.

339-6 Surface Requirements. Provide a finished surface that is reasonably smooth, of uniform texture, and shaped so as to drain without ponding of water.

Upon completion of the pavement, shape the surface of the adjacent earth to match the pavement edges.

339-7 Method of Measurement. The quantity to be paid for will be the weight, in tons, determined by an electronic weighing system as described in 320-3.2. The pay quantity will be based on the average spread rate of the area shown in the Plans or authorized by the Engineer or dimensions for the project, limited to a maximum of 105% of the plan thickness quantity. For calculation, a weight of 100 lbs/yd2

Prepare a Certification of Quantities, using the Department’s current approved form, for the certified miscellaneous asphalt pavement pay item. Submit this certification to the Engineer no later than Twelve O’clock noon Monday after the estimate cut-off or as directed by the Engineer, based on the quantity of asphalt produced and accepted on the Contract. The certification must include the Contract Number, FPID Number, Certification Number, Certification Date, period represented by Certification and the tons produced for each asphalt pay item.

per inch thickness of asphalt will be used.

339-8 Basis of Payment. Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section, including shaping and compacting the foundation, soil sterilization treatment, furnishing of the bituminous material used in the mixture, and shaping of adjacent earth surfaces. Payment will be made under:

Item No. 339- 1- Miscellaneous Asphalt Pavement - per ton.

SECTION 520CONCRETE GUTTER, CURB ELEMENTS,

AND TRAFFIC SEPARATOR

520-1 Description. Construct portland cement concrete curb and gutter, concrete traffic separator, valley gutter, special concrete gutter, and any other types of concrete curb not specified in other Sections.

520-2 Materials. 520-2.1 Concrete: Use concrete meeting the requirements of Section 347. 520-2.2 Reinforcement: For all steel reinforcement required by the Plans, meet the requirements of Section 415. 520-2.3 Joint Materials: Meet the requirements of Section 932.

520-3 Forms. 520-3.1 Form Materials: Construct forms for this work of either wood or metal. Provide forms that are straight, free from warp or bends, and of sufficient strength, when staked, to resist the pressure of the concrete without deviation from line and grade. For all items constructed on a radius, use flexible forms. 520-3.2 Depth of Forms: Ensure that forms have a depth equal to the plan dimensions for the depth of concrete being deposited against them. 520-3.3 Machine Placement: The Contractor may place these items by machine methods with the approval of the Engineer provided that the Contractor consistently produces an acceptable finished product, true to line, grade, and cross section.

520-4 Excavation. Excavate to the required depth, and compact the foundation material upon which these items are to be placed as specified in 120-9.

520-5 Placing Concrete. Place the concrete in the forms, and tamp and spade it to prevent honeycombing, and until the top of the structure can be floated smooth and the edges rounded to the radius shown in the Plans.

520-6 Joints. 520-6.1 Contraction Joints: Except for machine placed items, the Contractor may form joints by using dummy joints (either formed or sawed) or by using sheet metal templates. If using sheet metal templates, ensure that they are of the dimensions, and are set to the lines, shown in the Plans. Hold templates firmly while placing the concrete. Leave templates in place until the concrete has set sufficiently to hold its shape, but remove them while the forms are still in place. Saw contraction joints, for machine placed items, unless the Engineer approves an alternate method. Saw the joints as soon as the concrete has hardened to the degree that excessive raveling will not occur and before uncontrolled shrinkage cracking begins.

Space contraction joints at intervals of 10 feet except where closure requires a lesser interval, but do not allow any section to be less than 4 feet in length. 520-6.2 Expansion Joints: Construct expansion joints at all inlets, at all radius points, and at other locations indicated in the Plans. Locate them at intervals of 500 feet between other expansion joints or ends of a run. Ensure that the joint is 1/2 inch in width.

520-7 Finishing. 520-7.1 Repair of Minor Defects: Remove the forms within 24 hours after placing the concrete, and then fill minor defects with mortar composed of one part portland cement and two parts fine aggregate. The Engineer will not allow plastering on the face of the curb. Remove and replace any rejected curb, curb and gutter, or valley gutter without additional compensation. 520-7.2 Final Finish: Finish all exposed surfaces while the concrete is still green. In general, the Engineer will only require a brush finish. For any surface areas, however, which are too rough or where other surface defects make additional finishing necessary, the Engineer may require the Contractor to rub the curb to a smooth surface with a soft brick or wood block, using water liberally. Also, if necessary to provide a suitable surface, the Engineer may require the Contractor to rub further, using thin grout or mortar.

520-8 Curing. 520-8.1 General: Continuously cure the concrete for a period of at least 72 hours. Commence curing after completely finishing and as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit application of the curing material without marring the surface. Immediately replace any curing material removed or damaged during the 72 hour period. After removing the forms, cure the surfaces exposed by placing a berm of moist earth against them or by any of the methods described below, for the remainder of the 72 hour curing period. 520-8.2 Wet Burlap Method: Place burlap, as specified in 925-1, over the entire exposed surface of the concrete, with sufficient extension beyond each side to ensure complete coverage. Overlap adjacent strips a minimum of 6 inches. Hold the burlap securely in place such that it will be in continuous contact with the concrete at all times, and do not allow any earth between the burlap surfaces at laps or between the burlap and the concrete. Saturate the burlap with water before placing it, and keep it thoroughly wet throughout the curing period. 520-8.3 Membrane Curing Compound Method: Apply clear membrane curing compound or white pigmented curing compound, as specified in 925-2, by a hand sprayer meeting the requirements of 350-3.10, in a single coat continuous film at a uniform coverage of at least one gallon per 200 square feet. Immediately recoat any cracks, checks, or other defects appearing in the coating. Thoroughly agitate the curing compound in the drum prior to application, and during application as necessary to prevent settlement of the pigment. 520-8.4 Polyethylene Sheeting Method: Place polyethylene sheeting, as specified in 925-3, over the entire exposed surface of the concrete, with sufficient extension beyond each side to ensure complete coverage. Overlap adjacent strips a minimum of 6 inches. Hold the sheeting securely in place and in continuous contact with the concrete at all times.

520-9 Backfilling and Compaction. After the concrete has set sufficiently, but not later than three days after pouring, refill the spaces in front and back of the curb to the required elevation with suitable material. Place and thoroughly compact the material in layers not thicker than 6 inches.

520-10 Surface Requirements. Test the gutter section of curb and gutter with a 10 foot straightedge laid parallel to the centerline of the roadway and while the concrete is still plastic. Perform straightedging along the edge of the gutter adjacent to the pavement or along other lines on the gutter cross-section, as directed by the Engineer. Immediately correct irregularities in excess of 1/4 inch.

520-11 Method of Measurement. For curb or curb and gutter, the quantity to be paid will be plan quantity, in feet, measured along the face of the completed and accepted curb or curb and gutter. For valley gutter or shoulder gutter, the quantity to be paid will be plan quantity, in feet, measured along the gutter line of the completed and accepted valley gutter or shoulder gutter. For concrete traffic separator of constant width, the quantity to be paid will be plan quantity, in feet, measured along the center of its width, completed and accepted, including the length of the nose. For concrete traffic separator of varying width, the quantity to be paid will be plan quantity, in square yards, completed and accepted.

520-12 Basis of Payment. 520-12.1 General: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section. 520-12.2 Excavation: Excavation will be paid for as roadway excavation in accordance with 120-12.2. 520-12.3 Reinforcement: Reinforcing steel will not be paid for separately. The Contractor shall include the cost of the steel in the Contract unit price for the item in which the steel is placed. 520-12.4 Joint Materials: The Contractor shall include the cost of all joint materials in the Contract unit price for the item in which they are used. 520-12.5 Asphalt Curb Pad: When detailed in the Plans this material shall be included in the Contractors unit price for the item in which it is used. 520-12.6 Payment Items: Payment will be made under:

Item No. 520- 1- Concrete Curb and Gutter - per foot. Item No. 520- 2- Concrete Curb - per foot. Item No. 520- 3- Concrete Valley Gutter - per foot. Item No. 520- 4- Special Concrete Gutter - per foot. Item No. 520- 5- Concrete Traffic Separator - per foot. Item No. 520- 6- Concrete Shoulder Gutter - per foot. Item No. 520- 70- Concrete Traffic Separator - per square yard.

SECTION 536GUARDRAIL

536-1 Description. Construct metal guardrail on posts of timber, steel, or as specified in accordance with the Contract Documents and the Design Standards. Also, remove existing guardrail, construct guardrail anchorages, and replace guardrail posts, as specified in the Plans.

536-2 Materials. 536-2.1 Guardrail: Construct guardrail of the standard W-beam or thrie beam type. Use steel materials for the rail and rail elements meeting the steel requirements of 967-1. 536-2.2 Posts: 536-2.2.1 General: Unless the Contract Documents designate a particular type of post, the Contractor may choose the type of post to use. Use posts of either timber, or steel, and of the sizes and dimensions shown in the Plans. Use the particular type selected throughout a run of rail, except where special steel posts are required. 536-2.2.2 Timber Posts: Meet the requirements of the latest edition of the Southern Pine Inspection Bureau’s Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber, for No. 1 grade timber, and treat the posts in accordance with the requirements for posts in 955-5.3. Ensure that penetration of preservative is in accordance with requirements for round piles and fence posts in 955-6.2. Shape and drill the posts prior to treatment, and ensure that they do not vary more than 1 inch from the specified length. Dress all timber posts on all four sides (S4S). 536-2.2.3 Steel Posts: Use steel posts meeting the requirements of ASTM A36 steel. Galvanize the steel posts in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A123, with 2 oz/ft2

The Contractor may use steel guardrail posts of either a rolled section or a welded structural shape with nominal dimensions as shown in the Design Standards.

of zinc coating. Drill the steel posts prior to galvanizing.

For welded structural shapes, meet the following requirements: (1) Ensure that the design properties of the shape meet or exceed the design properties for a W 6 x 9 shape as contained in the AISC Manual of Steel Construction. (2) Weld in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A769. (3) After cutting steel posts to length, place a weld to seal the spaces between the web plate and flange plates. (4) Galvanize as specified above after completing all drilling and welding. 536-2.3 Anchor Blocks: Use anchor blocks of Class I concrete, and construct and place them in accordance with the requirements shown in the Plans or as directed by the Engineer. 536-2.4 Offset Blocks: Use guardrail offset blocks of either timber, steel, recycled plastic, or rubber, and of the sizes specified in the Design Standards. Treat timber blocks in accordance with the requirements for posts in 955-5.3. Ensure that penetration of preservative is in accordance with requirements for round piles and fence posts in 955-6.2. For timber offset blocks, meet the requirements of the latest edition of the Southern Pine Inspection Bureau’s Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber, for No. 1

grade timber. Dress all timber offset blocks on all four sides (S4S). Ensure that timber offset blocks do not vary more than 0.25 inch from the specified length. Use rubber or recycled plastic blocks that have a minimum Durometer hardness of 50 (ASTM D2240), show no cracking at the end of an ozone exposure of 100 plus or minus 10 pphm for 15 hours at 100ºF (ASTM D1149 mounting Type A), do not exceed 15 points change in Durometer hardness in oven ageing for 70 hours at 158ºF (ASTM D573), and show no cutting or tearing under a 6,500 lb load applied through a guardrail section. Ensure that the blocks present a neat appearance and have plane surfaces. Provide rubber or recycled plastic blocks that are 6 inches wide, 8 inches deep and 14 inches high. Allow dimensional tolerances of plus or minus 5/8 inch in height, plus or minus 3/8 inch in width, and plus or minus 3/8 inch in depth. Use recycled plastic offset blocks that meet the requirements of Section 972 and are listed on the Qualified Products List (QPL). Manufacturers seeking evaluation of their product shall submit an application in accordance with Section 6 and include certified test reports from an approved independent test laboratory that shows the material meets all the requirements of this Section and Section 972. Use steel offset blocks that meet the requirements of 536-2.2.3. 536-2.5 Reflector Elements: Mount reflectors onto the guardrail in accordance with the details shown in the Plans and the Design Standards. Provide reflectors that meet the requirements of 993-3. 536-2.6 Certification: Provide the Engineer a certification from the manufacturer confirming that all materials (timber posts, anchor and offset blocks, reflector elements, and all other accessories) meet the requirements of this Section, Section 6 and the Design Standards. Provide the Engineer a copy of the certification at least ten days prior to guardrail construction. For steel rail and rail elements, provide the Engineer with a certified mill analysis from the manufacturer meeting the requirements of Section 967. For steel posts and steel offset blocks furnish the Engineer a certified mill analysis from the manufacturer showing the physical and chemical properties of each heat meeting the requirements of ASTM A36, the amount of spelter coating, and galvanization meeting the requirements of ASTM A123. Also furnish the Engineer a Certificate of Compliance certifying that the guardrail system, materials and construction practices comply with applicable Design Standards and Specifications. Acceptance of furnished material will be based on the Certificate of Compliance, material certification and visual inspection by the Engineer.

536-3 Setting Posts. Set standard length posts vertically to the depth shown in the Design Standards. Set special length posts vertically to the depth shown in the Plans. Align and realign posts as necessary, until final acceptance. Where the posts are not set in concrete or mounted on structures, backfill the post holes with suitable thoroughly tamped material. As an alternate method, the Contractor may use a post-driving machine, meeting the approval of the Engineer and capable of driving the posts without damaging them. For guardrail post replacement, backfill and compact the existing hole prior to setting the new post.

If driving timber posts, the Contractor may either block out holes in the asphalt for the posts during the asphalt paving operation or cut holes through the asphalt mat prior to the post installation. Blocked out holes or cut holes in the asphalt pavement shall be at least 50% larger than the sectional area of the timber post. After completing driving of the posts patch the area of asphalt around each post with fresh hot bituminous mixture. If driving steel posts, drive the post directly through the asphalt mat. Fill depressions or cracks with fresh, hot bituminous mixture in a manner meeting the approval of the Engineer. For either timber or steel post locations, in which rock, concrete or asphalt thicker than 2 inches exist, remove such material and backfill with suitable material, thoroughly tamped as detailed in the Design Standards.

536-4 Erection of Rail. Erect the guardrail panels, supports, anchors, etc., as shown in the Design Standards.

536-5 Existing Guardrail. Stockpile guardrail, so specified, within the right-of-way at a location approved by the Engineer. Dispose of all remaining guardrail not specified for stockpiling.

536-6 Method of Measurement. 536-6.1 Guardrail: The quantity to be paid for will be the plan quantity, in feet, constructed, in place and accepted. The plan length of a run of guardrail will be the end to end measurement including panels (thrie-beam, nested, and W-thrie beam transition panels) directly associated with anchorage assemblies and guardrail transitions. 536-6.2 End Anchorage Assembly: The quantity to be paid for will be the number of each type as designated, constructed, in place and accepted. 536-6.3 Special Guardrail Post: The quantity to be paid for will be the number of each, constructed, in place and accepted. The designation “Special Guardrail Post” will include only such posts as require special fabrication, for installation at locations where the normal setting would conflict with concrete structures, such as approach slabs, culvert slabs, footings, inlets, etc. Special posts, however, will not include posts for double-face median guardrail, regardless of whether they are embedded in or attached to concrete. 536-6.4 Bridge Anchorage Assembly: The quantity to be paid for will be the number of each, constructed, in place and accepted. 536-6.5 Concrete Barrier Wall Anchorage Assembly: The quantity to be paid for will be the number of each, constructed, in place and accepted. 536-6.6 Guardrail Post Replacement: The quantity to be paid for will be the number of each, replaced. 536-6.7 Removal of Existing Guardrail: The quantity to be paid for will be the length, in feet, measured prior to removal. 536-6.8 Other Rail: 536-6.8.1 Rub Rail: The quantity to be paid for will be the plan quantity, in feet, constructed, in place and accepted. 536-6.8.2 Pipe Rail: The quantity to be paid for will be the plan quantity, in feet, constructed, in place and accepted.

536-7 Basis of Payment. 536-7.1 Guardrail: Price and payment will be full compensation for all work specified under this Section, including furnishing and installing acrylic plastic reflectors, posts, all panels, and all other materials as specified. Payment will be made under the items as follows: a. Where the Contractor furnishes all materials for the guardrail, and the Engineer does not require shop-bent rails, payment will be made under the basic item of guardrail. b. Where the radius of the guardrail installation is such as to require shop bending of the guardrail panels, payment will be made under the item of Guardrail (Shop-bent Panels). 536-7.2 End Anchorage Assembly: Price and payment will include furnishing and installing all components specified in the Plans and Design Standards. 536-7.3 Special Guardrail Post: Price and payment will include all costs for furnishing and installing the special posts that are over and above the costs for the normal posts, which are replaced by such special posts. 536-7.4 Bridge Anchorage Assembly: Price and payment will include furnishing and installing the special end shoes, wood blocks or retrofit wing posts, concrete anchor posts, thrie-beam terminal connectors, backup plates, filler plates, and other necessary hardware. 536-7.5 Concrete Barrier Wall Anchorage Assembly: Price and payment will include furnishing and installing connections to concrete barrier walls, as shown on the Design Standards, Index Nos. 400 and 410. 536-7.6 Guardrail Post Replacement: Price and payment will include all labor, materials, and equipment required for removal and disposal of existing posts in areas provided by the Contractor, backfilling and compacting existing holes, and replacement with new posts. 536-7.7 Removal of Existing Guardrail: Price and payment will include all labor and equipment required for removal and disposition of the existing guardrail, as specified in the Plans. No additional payment will be made for the removal of the back rail on double face guardrail, thrie beam guardrail, nested rail, safety pipe rail, rub rail or end anchorages. 536-7.8 Other Rail: 536-7.8.1 Rub Rail: Price and payment will include all components specified in the Plans and Design Standards, Index No. 400. 536-7.8.2 Pipe Rail: Price and payment will include all components specified in the Plans and Design Standards, Index No. 400. 536-7.9 Payment Items: Payment will be made under:

Item No. 536- 1- Guardrail - per foot. Item No. 536- 2- Guardrail (Shop-Bent Panels) - per foot. Item No. 536- 5- Rub Rail - per foot. Item No. 536- 6- Pipe Rail - per foot. Item No. 536- 7- Special Guardrail Post - each. Item No. 536- 8- Bridge Anchorage Assembly - each. Item No. 536- 73- Removal of Existing Guardrail - per foot. Item No. 536- 76- Special Length Guardrail Post - each. Item No. 536- 82- Concrete Barrier Wall Anchorage Assembly - each. Item No. 536- 83- Guardrail Post Replacement- each. Item No. 536- 85- End Anchorage Assembly - each.

SECTION 550FENCING

550-1 Description. Furnish, erect and reset metal fence of the type and at the locations shown in the Plans.

550-2 Types of Fence. The types of fence are designated as follows: Type A (Farm Fence). Type B (Chain-Link Fence). Type R (Chain-Link Fence for Pedestrian Overpass).

550-3 Materials. 550-3.1 Type A Fence (Farm Fence): Meet the requirements of Section 954 for timber posts and braces. For metal posts and braces, and for recycled plastic fence posts, meet the requirements of the Design Standards. For the fabric and all other accessories, meet the requirements of the Design Standards. 550-3.2 Type B Fence (Chain-Link): For the posts, braces, fabric and all accessories other than the concrete for bases, meet the requirements of the Design Standards. Use concrete as specified in Section 347, or a premix approved by the Engineer for bases. The requirements contained in 347-2.2, and 347-3 will not apply. 550-3.3 Type R Fence (Chain-Link for Pedestrian Overpass): Use the fabric and accessories specified in the Plans. 550-3.4 Resetting Fence: Use material from the existing fence. For any additional materials required, provide the same type of material as in the existing fence and as specified herein, including gates when applicable. 550-3.5 Optional Use of Materials: For Type A Fence, a combination of steel, aluminum, timber, recycled plastic or concrete posts may be used. Unless otherwise called for in the Plans, line posts of one material may be used with corner, pull and end post assemblies of a different material. The Engineer will permit the use of line posts of only one optional material and pull posts assemblies of only one optional material between corner and end post assemblies. Within individual corner and end post assemblies, the Engineer will allow the use of only one optional material. For Type B Fence, a combination of zinc-coated steel fence members, aluminum coated fence members and aluminum alloy fence members may be used. Unless otherwise indicated in the Plans, the Engineer will allow the use of only one type of fabric material, one type of line post material and one type of pull assembly material between corner and end post assemblies. 550-3.6 Certification: Provide the Engineer with certified test reports from the manufacturer confirming that all materials (posts, braces, fabric and all other accessories) conform to the requirements of this Section, Section 6 and the Design Standards. Provide the Engineer a copy of the certification at least ten days prior to fence construction. Also furnish the Engineer a Certificate of Compliance certifying that the fencing system, materials and construction practices comply with the applicable Design Standards and Specifications.

Acceptance of furnished material will be based on the Certificate of Compliance, accompanying test reports and visual inspection by the Engineer.

550-4 Construction Methods. 550-4.1 General: Install the fence in accordance with the specific requirements of this Article and with the details shown on the Design Standards for the particular type of fence called for, except for Type R Fence which shall be detailed in the Plans. Construct the fence in close proximity to the right of way line except as otherwise detailed in the Plans. Assume responsibility for obtaining satisfactory permits or permission from property owners for any encroachments required to perform the work, and for proper scheduling of the fence installation with the removal of existing fence where it is necessary to provide continuous security to adjacent areas already fenced. In order to meet this requirement, where necessary for maintaining security of livestock on adjacent property during construction of the new fence, the Engineer may require the erection and subsequent removal of temporary fencing. 550-4.2 Spacing of Posts: Space posts as shown in the Design Standards, within a tolerance of 12 inches, except where definite spotting of corner posts is required. Ensure that in any line of fence, the over-spacings and the under-spacings shall approximately compensate. Set additional line posts at abrupt changes in grade. 550-4.3 Clearing: Where the clearing and grubbing for the project includes the area occupied by the fence, clear the area to the limits shown in the Plans. If the limits are not shown in the Plans, clear the area at least 2 feet wide on each side of the fence line. The Engineer may direct that desirable trees be left in place and may restrict clearing where permission from the property owners cannot be obtained. 550-4.4 Construction Over Irregular Terrain and Other Obstructions: 550-4.4.1 Clearance of Bottom of Fence: Install the fence such that the bottom of the fence, in general, follows the contour of the ground. The fence is detailed in the Plans at approximately 3 inches above ground line. Over irregular ground, however, the Engineer will permit a minimum clearance of 1 inch and a maximum of 6 inches for a length not to exceed 8 feet, and, for Type A fence, with the barbed wire spaced midway between ground and bottom of fabric. 550-4.4.2 Grading: Where necessary to secure proper vertical alignment and to meet the clearance requirements, fill depressions (except where filling would obstruct proper drainage) and cut down knolls and ridges. Provide a substantial and permanent foundation for the fence. 550-4.4.3 Use of Extra-Length Posts. At locations where it is impracticable to adjust the ground level, the Engineer may require that posts of additional length be set and that the opening at the bottom be closed by additional barbed wire, stretched taut between poles, with no vertical distance between wires greater than 3 inches. For all such posts requiring a concrete base, extend the concrete downward to the bottom of the extra-length post. 550-4.5 Setting Posts: If rock occurs within the required depth of the post hole, or pavement which is to remain in place exists at the location of a post, drill a hole of a diameter slightly larger than the greatest dimension of the post or footing and grout in the post or footing. Set timber posts either by digging or by driving. Set recycled plastic fence posts in accordance with the Design Standards. 550-4.6 Placing Fabric: Do not place fabric and barbed wire until the posts have been permanently positioned and concrete foundations have attained adequate strength. Place the

fabric by securing one end and applying sufficient tension to remove all slack before making permanent attachments at intermediate points. Fasten the fabric to all end, corner and pull posts by approved means. Fasten the fabric using tools designed for the purpose, in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Apply the tension for stretching by mechanical fence stretchers or with single-wire stretchers designed for the purpose. 550-4.7 Electrical Grounds: Wherever a power line passes over the fence, install a ground directly below the point of crossing. Install a ground rod consisting of a galvanized rod with connection of similar metal if required, or of other appropriate material, 8 feet in length and at least 5/8 inch in diameter. Drive the rod vertically until the top of the rod is approximately 6 inches below the ground surface. Use a No. 6 conductor to connect the rod and all fence elements. Connect the conductor to each fence element and the ground rod by means of non-corrosive electrical-type clamps.

550-5 Method of Measurement. 550-5.1 General: The quantities to be paid for will be plan quantity for the number of gates and the length of each type of fence constructed and accepted. In addition, extra payment will be made, in accordance with 550-6.2, for additional lengths of post approved by the Engineer for the crossing of depressions in accordance with 550-4.4.3, muck areas, or other areas of inadequate support for a post of standard length. 550-5.2 Measurement of Fence Length, and Payment: The length of fence to be paid for will be plan quantity completed and accepted. Measurement for resetting fence will be the actual length of existing fence reset, including gates when applicable.

550-6 Basis of Payment. 550-6.1 Basic Items of Fencing: The Contract unit price per foot for the item of fencing, will be full compensation for all work and materials necessary for the complete installation, including line posts, corner, end, and pull posts. Such price and payment will include, but not be limited to, the following specific incidental work. (a) Any work required to level and prepare the terrain along the line of the fence. (b) Any additional clearing incidental to construction of the fence. (c) All preparation for post holes, in whatever type of material, as specified herein. (d) Any furnishing and installing of electrical grounds. (e) Any additional work or materials required for special construction over irregular terrain, or terrain of inadequate support for the posts, including the additional barbed wire, but not including the extra lengths of posts ordered by the Engineer. (f) Any cost of erection and removal of any temporary fencing, which may be necessary for maintaining security of livestock, etc., on adjacent property during construction of the new fence. 550-6.2 Payment Rates for Extra-Length Posts: Any extra length posts added to complete installation of the fence will require an invoice. The Contractor will be compensated for invoice price plus 10% as payment for any extra length posts. The standard length of steel, recycled plastic and aluminum posts will be the required length as indicated in the Plans or Design Standards for each type and case. The payment for additional length of post will include the cost of additional concrete to extend concrete bases, as applicable.

550-6.3 Gate Payment: The quantities to be paid for will be full compensation for all labor, materials, posts, and associated hardware for the complete installation of the type gate specified in the Plans, and accepted by the Engineer. 550-6.4 Payment Items: Payment shall be made under:

Item No. 550- 10- Fencing - per foot. Item No. 550- 60- Gates - each.

SECTION 570 PERFORMANCE TURF

570-1 Description. Establish a growing, healthy turf over all areas designated in the Plans. Use sod in areas designated in the Plans to be sodded. Use seed, hydroseed, bonded fiber matrix, or sod in all other areas. Maintain turf areas until final acceptance of all contract work in accordance with Section 5-11.

570-2 Materials. Meet the following requirements:

Turf Materials .................................................................Section 981 Fertilizer ..........................................................................Section 982 Water ...............................................................................Section 983

570-3 Construction Methods. 570-3.1 General: Incorporate turf installation into the project at the earliest practical

time. Shape the areas to be planted to the plan typical sections and lines and grade shown in the Contract Documents. Except in areas where the Contract Documents requires specific types of grass to match adjoining private property, any species of grass designated in Section 981 may be used. Use the methods and materials necessary to establish and maintain the initial grassing until acceptance of the Contract work in accordance with 5-11. All of the permanent grassing material shall be in place prior to final acceptance. The Department will only pay for replanting as necessary due to factors determined by the Engineer to be beyond control of the Contractor. Complete all grassing on shoulder areas prior to the placement of the friction course on adjacent pavement.

570-3.2 Seeding: At the Contractor’s option, wildflower seed may be included in the turf seeding operation or performed separately from the turf seeding. Use of compost meeting the requirements of Section 987 as mulch is acceptable unless otherwise specified.

570-3.3 Sod: Place the sod on the prepared surface, with edges in close contact. Do not use sod which has been cut for more than 48 hours. Place the sod to the edge of all landscape areas as shown in the Plans and as shown in the Design Standards. Peg sod at locations where the sod may slide. Drive pegs through sod blocks into firm earth, flush with the sod soil surface, at intervals approved by the Engineer. The work and materials for pegging of sod as directed by the Engineer will be paid for as Unforeseeable Work. Place rolled sod parallel with the roadway and cut any exposed netting even with the sod edge. Monitor placed sod for growth of pest plants and noxious weeds. If pest plants and/or noxious weeds manifest themselves within 30 days of placement of the sod during the months April through October, within 60 days of placement of the sod during the months of November through March treat affected areas by means acceptable to the Department at no

expense to the Department. If pest plants and/or noxious weeds manifest themselves after the time frames described above from date of placement of sod, the Engineer, at his sole option, will determine if treatment is required and whether or not the Contractor will be compensated for such treatment. If compensation is provided, payment will be made as Unforeseeable Work as described in 4-4. Remove and replace any sod as directed by the Engineer.

570-3.4 Hydroseeding: Use equipment specifically designed for mixing the mulch, seed, fertilizer, tackifier and dye, and applying the slurry uniformly over the areas to be hydroseeded. Use mulch that does not contain reprocessed wood or paper fibers. Ensure that 50% of the fibers will be retained on a twenty-five mesh screen. Mix fertilizer as required into the hydroseeding slurry. Ensure that the dye does not contain growth or germination inhibiting chemicals. When polyacrylamide is used as part of hydroseeding mix, only anionic polymer formulation with free acrylamide monomer residual content of less than 0.05% is allowed. Cationic polyacrylamide shall not be used in any concentration. Do not spray polyacrylamide containing mixtures onto pavement. These may include tackifiers, flocculants or moisture-holding compounds. 570-3.5 Bonded Fiber Matrix (BFM): Meet the minimum physical and performance criteria of this Specification for use of BFM in hydroseeding operations or temporary non-vegetative erosion and sediment control methods. Provide evidence of product performance testing, manufacturer’s certification of training and material samples to the Engineer at least 7 calendar days prior to installation. Provide documentation to the Engineer of manufacturer’s testing at an independent laboratory, demonstrating superior performance of BFM as measured by reduced water runoff, reduced soil loss and faster seed germination in comparison to erosion control blankets. Use only BFMs that contain all components pre-packaged by the manufacturer to assure material performance. Deliver materials in UV and weather resistant factory labeled packaging. Store and handle products in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s directions. When polyacrylamide is used as part of hydroseeding mix, only anionic polymer formulation with free acrylamide monomer residual content of less than 0.05% is allowed. Cationic polyacrylamide shall not be used in any concentration. Do not spray polyacrylamide containing mixtures onto pavement. These may include tackifiers, flocculants or moisture-holding compounds. Meet the following requirements after application of the formed matrix: Ensure that the tackifier does not dissolve or disperse upon re-wetting. Ensure that the matrix has no gaps between the product and the soil and that it provides 100% coverage of all disturbed soil areas after application. Ensure that the matrix has no germination or growth inhibiting properties and does not form a water-repelling crust. Ensure that the matrix is comprised of materials which are 100% biodegradable and 100% beneficial to plant growth. Mix and apply the BFM in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Apply the BFM to geotechnically stable slopes at the manufacturer’s recommended rates.

Degradation of BFM will occur naturally as a result of chemical and biological hydrolysis, UV exposure and temperature fluctuations. Re-application, as determined by the Engineer, will be required if BFM-treated soils are disturbed or water quality or turbidity tests show the need for an additional application. The work and materials for re-application, will be paid for as Unforeseeable Work.

570-3.6 Watering: Water all turf areas as necessary to produce a healthy and vigorous stand of turf. Ensure that the water used for turf irrigation meets the requirements of Section 983.

570-3.7 Fertilizing: Fertilize as necessary based on soil testing performed in accordance with Section 162. Refer to Section 982 for fertilizer rates. For bid purposes, base estimated quantities on an initial application of 265 lbs/acre and one subsequent application of 135 lbs/acre of 16-0-8.

570-4 Turf Establishment. Perform all work necessary, including watering and fertilizing, to sustain an established turf until final acceptance, at no additional expense to the Department. Provide the filling, leveling, and repairing of any washed or eroded areas, as may be necessary. Established turf is defined as follows: Established root system (leaf blades break before seedlings or sod can be pulled from the soil by hand). No bare spots larger than one square foot. No continuous streaks running perpendicular to the face of the slope. No bare areas comprising more than 1% of any given 1,000 square foot area. No deformation of the turf areas caused by mowing or other Contractor equipment. Monitor turf areas and remove all competing vegetation, pest plants, and noxious weeds (as listed by the Florida Exotic Pest Plant Council, Category I “List of Invasive Species”, Current Edition, http://www.fleppc.org). Remove such vegetation regularly by manual, mechanical, or chemical control means, as necessary. When selecting herbicides, pay particular attention to ensure use of chemicals that will not harm desired turf or wildflower species. Use herbicides in accordance with 7-1.7. If at the time that all other work on the project is completed, but all turf areas have not met the requirements for established turf set forth in 570-4, continuously maintain all turf areas until the requirements for established turf set forth in 570-4 have been met. During the entire establishment period and until turf is established in accordance with this specification, continue inspection and maintenance of erosion and sedimentation control items in accordance with Section 104. Take responsibility for the proper removal and disposal of all erosion and sedimentation control items after turf has been established. Notify the Engineer, with a minimum of seven calendar days advance notice, to conduct inspections of the turf at approximate 90-day intervals during the establishment period to determine establishment. Results of such inspections will be made available to the Contractor within seven calendar days of the date of inspection. Determination of an established turf will be based on the entire project and not in sections. Upon the determination by the Engineer that the requirements of 570-4 have been met and an established turf has been achieved and all erosion and sedimentation control items have been removed, the Engineer will release the Contractor from any further responsibility provided for in this Specification.

The Contractor’s establishment obligations of this specification will not apply to deficiencies due to the following factors, if found by the Engineer to be beyond the control of the Contractor, his subcontractors, vendors or suppliers: a. Determination that the deficiency was due to the failure of other features of the Contract. b. Determination that the deficiency was the responsibility of a third party performing work not included in the Contract or its actions. The Department will only pay for replanting as necessary due to factors determined by the Department to be beyond the control of the Contractor.

570-5 Responsible Party. For the purposes of this Specification, the Contractor shall be the responsible party throughout construction and establishment periods. Upon final acceptance of the Contract in accordance with 5-11, the Contractor’s responsibility for maintenance of all the work or facilities within the project limits of the Contract will terminate in accordance with 5-11; with the sole exception that the facilities damaged due to lack of established turf and the obligations set forth in this Specification forperformance turf shall continue thereafter to be responsibility of the Contractor as otherwise provided in this Section.

570-6 Disputes Resolution. The Contractor and the Department acknowledge that use of the Statewide Disputes Review Board is required and the determinations of the Statewide Disputes Review Board for disputes arising out of the performance turf specification will be binding on both the Contractor and the Department, with no right of appeal by either party, for the purposes of this Specification. Any and all Statewide Disputes Review Board meetings after final acceptance of the Contract in accordance with 5-11 shall be requested and paid for by the Contractor. The Department will reimburse the Contractor for all fees associated with meetings.

570-7 Failure to Perform. Should the Contractor fail to timely submit any dispute to the Statewide Disputes Review Board, refuse to submit any dispute to the Statewide Disputes Review Board, fail to provide an established turf in accordance with 570-4 within one year of final acceptance of the Contract in accordance with 5-11, or fail to compensate the Department for any remedial work performed by the Department in establishing a turf and other remedial work associated with lack of an established turf, including but not limited to, repair of shoulder or other areas due to erosion and removal of sediments deposited in roadside ditches and streams, as determined by the Statewide Disputes Review Board to be the Contractor’s responsibility, the Department shall suspend, revoke or deny the Contractor’s certificate of qualification under the terms of Section 337.16(d)(2), Florida Statutes, until the Contractor provides an established turf or makes full and complete payment for the remedial work performed by the Department. In no case shall the period of suspension, revocation, or denial of the Contractor’s certificate of qualification be less than six months. Should the Contractor choose to challenge the Department’s notification of intent for suspension, revocation or denial of qualification and the Department’s action is upheld, the Contractor shall have its qualification suspended for a minimum of six months or until the remedial action is satisfactorily performed, whichever is longer.

570-8 Method of Measurement. The quantities to be paid for will be plan quantity in square yards based on the area shown in the Plans, completed and accepted.

570-9 Basis of Payment. Prices and payments will be full compensation for all work and materials specified in this

Section. Payment will be made under:

Item No. 570- 1- Performance Turf - per square yard.

SIGNING, PAVEMENT MARKING AND LIGHTING

SECTION 700 HIGHWAY SIGNING

700-1 Description. Furnish and erect roadway signs, at the locations shown in the Plans, in accordance with the details shown in the Plans. All overhead cantilever and truss mounted signs are to be lighted and retroreflective unless otherwise noted in the Plans. The Department designates ground traffic signs as signs erected on the shoulders, slopes, or medians, but not extending over the traveled roadway. The Department designates signs erected partially or completely over the traveled roadway or mounted on bridges as overhead traffic signs, and may further classify some of these signs as overhead cantilever or span traffic signs. The Department designates signs that include certain electronic display components as Electronic Display Signs (EDS) and may further classify them as Electronic Warning Signs (EWS), Electronic Regulatory Signs (ERS), Electronic Speed Feedback Signs (ESFS), or Blank Out Signs (BOS). EDS may be erected on the shoulders, slopes, or in the medians, or installed on mast arms, monotube assemblies, or span wires.

Obtain multi-post and overhead sign structures from a fabrication facility that is listed on the Department’s list of metal producers with an accepted quality control program, meeting the requirements of 105-3.

700-2 Sign Assembly Design Requirements. 700-2.1 General: Sign assemblies as specified in the Plans fall into three general

categories: ground sign assemblies, overhead sign assemblies, and electronic display signs. 700-2.2 Sign Panels: All sign panels shall be aluminum. Fabricate standard sign panel

messages in accordance with details included in the Standard Highway Signs Manual published by the U.S. Department of Transportation. The Engineer will not require the submittal of shop drawings for these signs or for non-standard sign panels and messages fabricated in accordance with details shown in the Plans. Submit seven copies of shop drawings indicating detailed layout of the sign legend, spacing, and border for all other signs to the Engineer prior to fabrication. If the size of a sign is not specified in the Plans, provide the size sign for conventional roadways as shown in the MUTCD.

700-2.3 Breakaway Support Mechanisms for Ground Traffic Signs:700-2.3.1 Frangible Supports: Provide posts for all frangible sign assemblies

consisting of aluminum tubes up to 3 1/2 inches outside diameter with 3/16 inch wall thickness in accordance with the requirements in the Design Standards.

700-2.3.2 Slip Bases: For posts with slip base assemblies, use galvanized steel in accordance with the requirements in the Design Standards. 700-2.4 Overhead Sign Structures: 700-2.4.1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to the Department for approval as specified in Section 5. Prior to the submittal of the shop drawings, determine the actual length of support columns for all sign structures on the basis of existing field conditions and include these lengths on the shop drawings.

700-2.4.2 Installation: Install nuts on anchor bolts in accordance with 649-5 and 649-6. Use ASTM A325 bolt, nut and washer assemblies for all installations other than anchor bolts as follows. Use bolt, nut and washer assemblies that are free of rust and corrosion and that are lubricated properly as demonstrated by being able to easily hand turn the nut on the bolt thread for its entire length. Tighten nuts to the full effort of an ironworker using an ordinary spud wrench to bring the faying surfaces of the assembly into full contact which is referred to as snug tight condition. After bringing the faying surfaces of the assembly into full contact and to a snug tight condition, tighten nuts to achieve the minimum torque as specified in Table 700-1 unless the connection is an alternate splice connection of a span sign structure, in which case, tighten nuts in accordance with the turn-of-nut method of Table 460-7 of Section 460. Maintain uniform contact pressure on the faying surfaces during snugging and the subsequent final tightening process, by using a bolt tightening pattern that balances the clamping force of each bolt, as closely as possible, with the equal clamping force of a companion bolt. Within 24 hours after final tightening, the Engineer will witness a check of the minimum torque using a calibrated torque wrench for 3 bolts or a minimum of 10% of the bolts, whichever is greater, for each connection; however, do not perform this check on alternate splice connections of span sign structures.

Table 700-1 Bolt Diameter

(in.)Minimum Torque

(ft.-lbs.) 3/8 15 1/2 37 5/8 74 3/4 120 7/8 190 1 275

1 1/8 3751 1/4 525

700-2.5 Sign Retroreflective Sheeting: Meet the requirements of Section 994. Use Type III, VII or XI sheeting for background sheeting, white legends, borders and shields on all signs with the following exceptions: a. Use Type VII sheeting for STOP, DO NOT ENTER and WRONG WAY signs. b. Use Type III or greater prismatic material for white sheeting for overhead signs.Use Type III, VII or XI yellow-green fluorescent sheeting for S1-1 school advance signs and supplemental panels used with S1-1, S3-1 and S4-5 school signs. Do not mix signs having fluorescent yellow-green sheeting with signs having yellow retroreflective sheeting. Use fluorescent orange Type VI or VII for all orange work zone signs. Mesh signs shall meet the color, daytime luminance and nonreflective property requirements of Section 994, Type VI.

700-2.6 Breakaway Support Mechanisms for Electronic Display Signs: Provide posts or posts with slip bases as shown in the Plans.

700-3 Materials. 700-3.1 General: Meet the materials requirements shown below and any additional

requirements which the Plans might show. 700-3.2 Concrete: Use concrete meeting the requirements of Section 346. 700-3.3 Reinforcing Steel: For reinforcing steel in footings, meet the requirements of

Section 415. 700-3.4 Aluminum Materials:

700-3.4.1 General: For aluminum materials, meet the general provisions of 965-1.

700-3.4.2 Sheets and Plates: For aluminum sheets and plates for sign panels, meet the requirements of ASTM B 209, Aluminum Association Alloy 6061-T6, 5154-H38 or 5052-H38 and those shown in the Plans.

700-3.4.3 Extruded Tubing: For extruded aluminum tubing, meet the requirements shown in the Plans.

700-3.4.4 Castings: Provide aluminum castings of the alloys shown in the Plans. For aluminum alternates the Engineer will allow a cast base, provided the Contractor submits test reports giving evidence that the base to be used for each pole size is as strong as the pole with which it is to be used. Perform physical tests and submit certified reports for one base to be used with each pole size. Use Alloy A 356-T6 for the castings. Use aluminum bolts for connecting parts of the cast base.

700-3.4.5 Channels: For aluminum channels, meet the requirements of ASTM B 308 for the alloys shown in the Plans.

700-3.4.6 Bolts, Nuts, and Lockwashers: For aluminum bolts, nuts, and lockwashers, meet the requirements shown in the Plans. Ensure that finished bolts and washers are given an anodic coating of at least 0.0002 inch in thickness and are chromate-sealed.

700-3.5 Steel:700-3.5.1 General: Only use structural steel, including bolts, nuts, and washers,

that have been hot dip galvanized or metalized after fabrication. Perform hot dip galvanizing in accordance with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 and metalizing in accordance with Section 562. For galvanized steel members meet the general requirements of Section 962 and the specific requirements of 962-9.

700-3.5.2 Specific Uses of Aluminum and Galvanized Steel: Use aluminum bolts, nuts, and hardware to connect parts of the cast base. Use galvanized steel anchor bolts for anchoring base plates to concrete bases and for the nuts and washers. For all other metal parts of the cast base, the Engineer will allow galvanized steel as an alternate to aluminum.

700-3.6 Bearing Pads: For bearing pads, meet the requirements of 932-2. 700-3.7 Retroretroreflective Sheeting: All retroreflective sheeting must be listed on the

QPL and meet the retroreflective sheeting requirements of Section 994. 700-3.8 Process Colors: Use transparent and black opaque process colors listed on the

QPL meeting the requirements of 994-4 on retroreflective and nonreflective sheeting. 700-3.9 Electronic Display Signs: Use electronic display signs and mounting hardware

that meet the requirements of the MSTCSD and are listed on the Department’s Approved Products List. Use only new signs and mounting hardware.

Provide signs marked in accordance with Section 603 and ensure the markings are visible after installation. Provide installation guides and operator’s manuals for each EDS. Ensure the manuals include functional block diagrams and wiring diagrams; with information required to operate, maintain, troubleshoot, and repair the EDS; and with recommended maintenance and calibration procedures. Ensure signs have a manufacturer’s warranty covering defects in assembly, fabrication, and materials for a minimum of three years from the date of final acceptance in accordance with 5-11. Ensure Guaranties on EDS comply with Section 608.

700-4 Preparation of Sign Blanks. 700-4.1 De-greasing and Etching for Aluminum Sign Blanks:

700-4.1.1 General: Prior to the application of retroreflective sheeting, use any of the methods shown below to de-grease and etch the aluminum sign blanks.

700-4.1.2 Hand Method: Under this method, de-grease and etch the blanks in one operation, using steel wool (medium grade) with any of the following combinations of materials: (1) An abrasive cleanser of a commercial grade kitchen scouring powder. (2) Acid and a suitable detergent solution. (3) An alkaline solution. Thoroughly rinse the blanks with clean water following all hand de-greasing operations.

700-4.1.3 Power-Washer Method: Under this method, de-grease the blanks with an inhibited alkaline cleanser, by spraying for 90 seconds with the solution between 135 and 249ºF, the exact temperature to be as recommended by the manufacturer of the cleanser. After the spraying, rinse the blanks with clean water. Then etch the blanks by immersing them in a 6 to 8% solution of phosphoric acid at a temperature of 100 to 180ºF for 60 seconds. After immersion, rinse the blanks in clean water.

700-4.1.4 Immersion Method: Under this method, de-grease the blanks by immersing them in a solution of inhibited alkaline cleanser at a temperature between 160 and 180ºF for three to five minutes, and then rinsing with clean water. Then etch blanks by immersing them in a 6 to 8% solution of phosphoric acid at a temperature of 100ºF for three minutes. After immersion, rinse the blanks in clean water.

700-4.1.5 Vapor De-greasing Method: Under this method, de-grease the blanks by totally immersing them in a saturated vapor of trichloroethylene. Remove trademark printing with lacquer thinner or a controlled alkaline cleaning system.

700-4.1.6 Alkaline De-greasing Method: De-grease the blanks by totally immersing them in a tank containing an alkaline solution, controlled and titrated in accordance with the solution manufacturer’s directions. Adapt immersion time to the amount of soil present and the thickness of the metal. After immersion, thoroughly rinse the blanks with running water.

700-4.1.7 Etching Method when De-greasing is Separate Operation: If using either of the de-greasing methods described under 700-4.1.5 and 700-4.1.6, accomplish etching by one of the following alternate methods: (1) Acid Etch: Etch well in a 6 to 8% phosphoric acid solution at 100ºF, or in a proprietary acid etching solution. Rinse thoroughly with running cold water, which may be followed by a hot water rinse.

(2) Alkaline Etch: Etch aluminum surfaces in an alkaline etching material that is controlled by titration. Meet the time, temperature, and concentration requirements specified by the solution manufacturer. After completing etching is complete, rinse the panel thoroughly.

700-4.2 Drying: Dry the panels using a forced-air drier. Use a device or clean canvas gloves, to handle the material between all cleaning and etching operations and the application of retroreflective sheeting. Do not allow the metal to come in contact with greases, oils or other contaminants prior to the application of retroreflective sheeting.

700-4.3 Fabrication of Sign Blanks: Fabricate all metal parts to ensure a proper fit of all sign components. Complete all fabrication, with the exception of cutting and punching of holes, prior to metal de-greasing and applying the retroreflective sheeting. Cut metal panels to size and shape and keep free of buckles, warp, dents, burrs, and defects resulting from fabrication. Provide all sign panels with a flat surface.

700-5 Fabrication of Retroreflectorized Sign Faces. 700-5.1 Application of Sheeting: Apply retroreflective sheeting to the base panels with

mechanical equipment in a manner specified for the manufacture of traffic control signs by the sheeting manufacturer. Ensure that sheeting applied to extruded aluminum sections adheres over and around the side legs of all panels to a minimum distance of 1/16 inch beyond the radius of top edge. Match sign faces comprising two or more pieces of retroreflective sheeting for color and retroreflectivity at the time of sign fabrication. Reverse and apply consecutively alternate successive width sections of either sheeting or panels to ensure that corresponding edges of sheeting lie adjacent on the finished sign. The Engineer will not accept nonconformance that may result in non-uniform shading and an undesirable contrast between adjacent widths of applied sheeting.

700-5.2 Finish: Seal retroreflective sheeting splices and sign edges with materials the sheeting manufacturer supplies in a manner the sheeting manufacturer specifies for traffic control signs.

700-5.3 Screening-on Message: Screen message and borders on retroreflective sheeting in accordance with the recommendations of the ink or overlay manufacturer. Process either before or after applying the sheeting to the base panels.

700-5.4 Finished Sign Face: Provide finished signs with clean cut and sharp messages and borders. Ensure that finished background panels are essentially a plane surface.

700-5.5 Stenciling: For permanent roadway signs, mark the back of all finished panels at the bottom edge with “FDOT”, the date of fabrication, the date of installation, and the fabricator’s initials. Make the markings unobtrusive, but legible enough to be easily read by an observer on the ground when the sign is in its final position. Apply the markings in a manner that is at least as durable as the sign face.

700-6 Acceptance of Signs. 700-6.1 Manufacturer’s Certification and Recommendations: Ensure that the sign

manufacturer certifies that the delivered signs conform to this Section and provides recommendations for storing and repairing signs.

700-6.2 Packaging and Shipping: Have the manufacturer package and ship the signs in a manner which will minimize possible damage.

700-6.3 Storage of Signs: If signs are stored prior to installation, store them in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

700-6.4 Sign Inspection: Do not install signs until the Engineer inspects them for conformance with this Section. Provide all manufacturer certifications and recommendations prior to the Engineer’s inspection. The Engineer will inspect the signs upon delivery to the storage or project site and again at the final construction inspection. Repair and replace signs deemed unacceptable by the Engineer at no expense to the Department.

700-6.5 Imperfections and Repairs: Repair and replace signs containing imperfections or damage regardless of the kind, type, or cause of the imperfections or damage. Make repairs according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Ensure that completed repairs provide a level of quality necessary to maintain the service life warranty of the sign and are satisfactory in appearance to the Engineer.

700-6.6 Electronic Display Signs: In addition to the requirements of this Section, meet the requirements of Section 611.

700-7 Foundations. 700-7.1 Footings:

700-7.1.1Excavation and Backfilling: Perform excavation and backfilling for the footings in accordance with Section 125, with the exceptions that no specific density is required and that the backfill may be tamped in 4 inches maximum layers. Use material that is at near optimum moisture and neither dry or saturated, and tamp to the extent directed by the Engineer. The Department may require that the backfilling be done with poured concrete. Install spread footings which support sign structures overhanging the roadway as required in 455-25 through 455-37.

700-7.1.2 Mixing and Placing Concrete: For batching and mixing of concrete for footings, meet the requirements of Section 346, except that the Engineer will allow hand mixing by approved methods where the quantity to be mixed does not exceed 1/2 yd3. Use cast-in-place or precast concrete for the footings. Obtain precast concrete footings from a plant that is currently on the list of Producers with Accepted Quality Control Programs. Producers seeking inclusion on the list shall meet the requirements of 105-3.

700-7.1.3 Forms: The Engineer will not require forms when the ground is sufficiently firm, in which case, sufficiently moisten the adjacent earth to prevent it from absorbing the moisture from the concrete. Where forms are required and the soil is not moist, place sufficient water, as directed by the Engineer, in the hole, and pour the concrete as soon as the water has been absorbed. Place at least 4 inches of loose earth, free from clods or gravel, over the top of the footing to effect curing.

700-7.1.4 Finishing Concrete: Trowel the top of the concrete to a smooth finish. 700-7.2 Drilled Shafts: Meet the requirements of Section 455.

700-8 Erection of Signs and Sign Supports. Do not erect overhead sign supports until the concrete strength in the support footing is at least 2,500 psi. Determine concrete strength from tests on a minimum of two test cylinders sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM C 31 and ASTM C 39 and verifying test results have been provided to the Engineer. Erect the signs and sign structures in accordance with the details shown in the Plans. The Contractor may fabricate the structural steel sign trusses in sections that will fit into available

galvanizing vats. Prior to galvanizing, weld the joints as specified in 460-6 and in accordance with the details shown in the Plans. Re-galvanize damaged parts as specified in Section 562. Weld aluminum structures in accordance with 965-3. Attach electronic display signs to the supporting structure in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations using the mounting hardware provided by the manufacturer.

700-9 Removal or Relocation of Signs. Relocation of signs shall consist of removing the existing sign assembly and installing the sign on a new foundation. When the Plans call for existing ground-mounted signs to be relocated or removed, immediately remove supports and footings that project more than 6 inches above the ground surface after removing the sign panel from the assembly. Remove existing footings to a depth at least 12 inches below the ground surface. Restore the area of the sign removal or relocation to the condition of the adjacent area. The costs will be included in the Contract unit price of the item to which it is incidental. Notify the Engineer a minimum of 30 days prior to removal of existing Logo sign structures.

700-10 Overlay Existing Sign Panels. Use 0.040 inch thick aluminum sheeting for overlays larger than 3 square feet placed on a

sign panel. Replace hex head bolts on the sign surface using stainless steel flat head machine screws with nuts and lock washers to give a flat surface for the overlay panel. Install the overlay panels starting at the edge away from traffic. Place each panel against the sign using a clamp at the top to hold the panel in place. Drill 1/8 inch holes 1 inch inside the panel edge every 6 inches to 8 inches and install 1/4-inch to 3/8 inch length pop rivets. Install additional rivets along the outer edge 6 inches to 8 inches. Place the remaining panels using the same procedure with the overlap in the direction away from the traffic and with rivets along the overlap on 12 inch centers.

700- 11 Method of Measurement. The quantities to be paid for will be: (1) The number of ground traffic signs of each designated class of assembly, complete. (2) The number of lighted overhead traffic signs of each designated class of assembly, complete. (3) The number of existing signs removed, relocated, modified of each designated class of assembly, complete. (4) The number of overhead signs span wire mounted, bridge mounted, and lighted sequential, of each designated class of assembly, complete. (5) The number of electronic display signs, of each designated class of assembly, complete. (6) The number of flashing beacon signs, of each designated class of assembly, complete. For the purpose of payment, a sign assembly consists of all the signs mounted on a single structure (one, two or three posts, or overhead structure) or all the signs on a bridge mounted sign structure and the sign structure.

700-12 Basis of Payment. Price and payment will be full compensation for furnishing and installation of all materials necessary to complete the signs in accordance with the details shown in the Plans; including sign panels complete with sheeting, painting, and message; sign posts and supports, foundations, excavation, etc.; for lighted signs, include all costs of the electrical installation for lighting, up to the point of connection by others; for flashing beacon signs, include all costs of beacons, controllers, and electrical installation, up to the point of connection by others; and all other work specified in this Section, including all incidentals necessary for the complete item.

SECTION 710 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS

710-1 Description. Apply Painted Traffic Stripes and Markings, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

710-2 Materials. Use only materials listed on the Department’s Qualified Products List (QPL) meeting the following requirements:

Raised Retroreflective Pavement Markers and Bituminous Adhesive .............................................................Section 970 Standard Waterborne Fast Dry Traffic Paint ..................................................................... 971-1 and 971-3 Fast Dry Solvent Paint ................................ 971-1 and 971-4 Glass Spheres .............................................. 971-1 and 971-2

The Engineer will take random samples of all material in accordance with the Department’s Sampling, Testing and Reporting Guide schedule.

710-3 Equipment. Use equipment that will produce continuous uniform dimensions of pavement markings of varying widths and meet the following requirements: (a) Capable of traveling at a uniform, predetermined rate of speed, both uphill and downhill, in order to produce a uniform application of paint and capable of following straight lines and making normal curves in a true arc. (b) Capable of applying glass spheres to the surface of the completed stripe by an automatic sphere dispenser attached to the striping machine such that the glass spheres are dispensed closely behind the installed line. Use a glass spheres dispenser equipped with an automatic cut-off control that is synchronized with the cut-off of the traffic paint and applies the glass spheres in a manner such that the spheres appear uniform on the entire pavement markings surface with, 50 to 60% embedment. (c) Capable of spraying the paint to the required thickness and width without thinning of the paint. Equip the paint tank with nozzles equipped with cut-off valves, which will apply broken or skip lines automatically.

710-4 Application: 710-4.1 General: Remove existing pavement markings, such that scars or traces of

removed markings will not conflict with new pavement markings, by a method approved by the Engineer. Payment for marking removal will be in accordance with 102-5.8. Before applying traffic stripes and markings, remove any material by a method approved by the Engineer that would adversely affect the bond of the traffic stripes. Apply traffic stripes and markings only to dry surfaces, and when the ambient air and surface temperature is at least 40ºF and rising. Do not apply traffic stripes and markings when winds are sufficient to cause spray dust. Apply traffic stripes and markings, having well defined edges, over existing pavement markings such that not more than 2 inches on either end and not more than 1 inch on either side is visible.

Mix the paint thoroughly prior to pouring into the painting machine. Apply paint to the pavement by spray or other means approved by the Engineer. Conduct field testing in accordance with FM 5-541. Remove and replace traffic stripes and markings not meeting the requirements of this Section at no additional cost to the Department. Apply all pavement markings prior to opening the road to traffic. 710-4.1.1 Final Surface: Painted pavement markings (final surface) will include two applications of standard painted pavement markings and one application of retroreflective pavement markers applied to the final surface. Wait at least 14 days after the first application to apply the second application of painted pavement markings (final surface). Second application must be applied prior to final acceptance of the project. Apply all retroreflective pavement markers per the requirements of Section 706. 710-4.2 Thickness: Apply paint to attain a minimum wet film thickness in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 710-4.3 Retroreflectivity: Apply white and yellow standard pavement markings that will attain an initial retroreflectance of not less than 300 mcd/lx·m2 and not less than 250 mcd/lx·m2,respectively. Measure, record and certify on a Department approved form and submit to the Engineer, the retroreflectivity of white and yellow pavement markings in accordance with FM 5-541. The Department reserves the right to test the markings within 3 days of receipt of the Contractor’s certification. Failure to afford the Department opportunity to test the markings will result in non-payment. The test readings should be representative of the Contractor’s striping performance. If the retroreflectivity values measure below values shown above, reapply the striping at no additional cost to the Department. For standard pavement markings, ensure that the minimum retroreflectance of white and yellow pavement markings are not less than 150 mcd/lx m2. If the retroreflectivity values fall below the 150 mcd/lx m2 value within six months of initial application, the striping will be reapplied at the Contractor’s expense. 710-4.4 Color: Use paint material that meets the requirements of 971-1. 710-4.5 Glass Spheres: Apply glass spheres on all pavement markings immediately and uniformly following the paint application. The rate of application shall be based on the manufacturer’s recommendation.

710-5 Tolerances in Dimensions and in Alignment. Establish tack points at appropriate intervals for use in aligning stripes, and set a stringline from such points to achieve accuracy. 710-5.1 Dimensions:

710-5.1.1 Longitudinal Lines: Apply painted skip line segments with no more than plus or minus 12 inches variance, so that over-tolerance and under-tolerance lengths between skip line and the gap will approximately balance. Apply longitudinal lines at least 2 inches from construction joints of portland cement concrete pavement.

710-5.1.2 Transverse Markings, Gore Markings, Arrows, and Messages:Apply paint in multiple passes when the marking cannot be completed in one pass, with an overall line width allowable tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch.

710-5.1.3 Contrast Lines: Use black paint to provide contrast on concrete or light asphalt pavement, when specified by the Engineer. Apply black paint in 10 foot segments following each longitudinal skip line.

710-5.2 Alignment: Apply painted stripes that will not deviate more than 1 inch from the stringline on tangents and curves one degree or less. Apply painted stripes that will not deviate more than 2 inches from the stringline on curves greater than one degree. Apply painted edge stripes uniformly, not less than 2 inches or more than 4 inches from the edge of pavement, without noticeable breaks or deviations in alignment or width. Remove and replace at no additional cost to the Department, traffic stripes that deviate more than the above stated requirements. 710-5.3 Correction Rates: Make corrections of variations in width at a maximum rate of 10 feet for each 0.5 inches of correction. Make corrections of variations in alignment at a maximum rate of 25 feet for each 1 inch of correction, to return to the stringline.

710-6 Contractor’s Responsibility for Notification. Notify the Engineer prior to the placement of the materials. Furnish the Engineer with the manufacturer’s name and batch numbers of the materials and glass spheres to be used. Ensure that the approved batch numbers appear on the materials and glass spheres packages.

710-7 Protection of Newly Painted Pavement Markings. Do not allow traffic onto or permit vehicles to cross newly applied pavement markings until they are sufficiently dry. Remove and replace any portion of the pavement markings damaged by passing traffic or from any other cause, at no additional cost to the Department.

710-8 Corrections for Deficiencies to Applied Painted Pavement Markings. Reapply a 1.0 mile section centered around any deficiency, at no additional cost to the Department.

710-9 Submittals. 710-9.1 Submittal Instructions: Prepare a certification of quantities, using the Department’s current approved form, for each project in the Contract. Submit the certification of quantities and daily worksheets to the Engineer. The Department will not pay for any disputed items until the Engineer approves the certification of quantities. 710-9.2 Contractor’s Certification of Quantities: Request payment by submitting a certification of quantities no later than Twelve O’clock noon Monday after the estimate cut-off date or as directed by the Engineer, based on the amount of work done or completed. Ensure the certification of quantities consists of the following: (a) Contract Number, FPID Number, Certification Number, Certification Date and the period that the certification represents. (b) The basis for arriving at the amount of the progress certification, less payments previously made and less any amount previously retained or withheld. The basis will include a detailed breakdown provided on the certification of items of payment.

710-10 Method of Measurement. The quantities to be paid for under this Section will be as follows: (a) The length, in net miles, of 6 inch solid traffic stripe, authorized and acceptably applied.

(b) The total traversed distance in gross miles of 10-30 or 3-9 skip line. The actual applied line is 25% of the traverse distance for a 1:3 ratio. This equates to 1,320 feet of marking per mile of single line. (c) The net length, in feet, of each of all other types of lines and stripes, authorized and acceptably applied. (d) The number of pavement messages, symbols and directional arrows, authorized and acceptably applied. (e) Lump Sum, as specified in 710-4.1.1 when the item for painted pavement markings (final surface) is included in the proposal. The net length, in feet of dotted and skip stripes other than 10-30 and 3-9 will be measured as the distance from the beginning of the first painted stripe to the end of the last painted stripe with proper deductions made for unpainted intervals as determined by plan dimensions or stations, subject to 9-1.3. Unpainted intervals will not be included in pay quantity. The gross-mile measurement of 10-30 and 3-9 skip traffic stripes will be taken as the distance from the beginning of the first painted stripe to the end of the last painted stripe, and will include the unpainted intervals. It will not include any lengths of unpainted intervals which, by design or by other intent of the Department, are greater than 30 feet. Final measurement will be determined by plan dimensions or stations, subject to 9-1.3.1.

710-11 Basis of Payment. 710-11.1 General: Prices and payments will be full compensation for all work specified

in this Section, including, all cleaning and preparing of surfaces, furnishing of all materials, application, curing and protection of all items, protection of traffic, furnishing of all tools, machines and equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Final payment will be withheld until all deficiencies are corrected. 710-11.2 Lump Sum Payment: When the item for painted pavement markings (final surface) is included in the proposal, prices and payments will be full compensation for two applications of all painted pavement markings applied to the final surface, and one application of retroreflective pavement markers applied to the final surface in accordance with Section 706. Payment will be made under:

Item No. 710 Painted Pavement Markings. Traffic Stripes, Solid - per net mile. Traffic Stripes, Solid - per foot. Traffic Stripes, Skip - per gross mile. Traffic Stripes, Skip - per foot. Dotted/Guideline - per foot. Messages -each. Arrows - each. Yield Markings - per foot. Item No. 710-90 Painted Pavement Markings (Final Surface) - lump sum.

SECTION 711 THERMOPLASTIC TRAFFIC STRIPES AND MARKINGS

711-1 Description. Apply new thermoplastic traffic stripes and markings, or refurbish existing thermoplastic traffic stripes and markings, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

711-2 Materials. 711-2.1 Thermoplastic: Use only thermoplastic materials listed on the QPL. The

Engineer will take random samples of all material in accordance with the Department’s Sampling, Testing and Reporting Guide schedule.

711-2.1.1 Initial or Recapped Stripes and Markings: Use materials meeting the requirements of 971-1 and 971-5.

711-2.1.2 Refurbishing Existing Stripes and Markings: Use materials meeting the requirements of 971-1 and 971-5.

711-2.1.3 Preformed Stripes and Markings: Use Materials meeting the requirements of 971-1 and 971-6.

711-2.2 Glass Spheres: Use only glass spheres listed on the QPL, meeting the requirements of 971-1 and 971-2. The Engineer will take random samples of all glass spheres in accordance with ASTM D1214 and the Department’s Sampling, Testing and Reporting Guide schedule.

711-2.3 Sand: Use materials meeting the requirements of 971-5.4.

711-3 Equipment. Use equipment capable of providing continuous uniform heating of striping materials to temperatures exceeding 390ºF, mixing and agitation of the material reservoir to provide a homogeneous mixture without segregation. Use equipment that will maintain the striping material in a plastic state, in all mixing and conveying parts, including the line dispensing device until applied. Use equipment which can produce varying width traffic stripes and which meets the following requirements: (a) capable of traveling at a uniform, predetermined rate of speed, both uphill and downhill, in order to produce a uniform application of striping material and capable of following straight lines and making normal curves in a true arc. (b) is capable of applying glass spheres to the surface of the completed stripe by a double drop application for initial traffic striping and marking and a single drop application for recapping and refurbishing. The bead dispenser for the first bead drop shall be attached to the striping machine in such a manner that the beads are dispensed closely behind with the thermoplastic material. The second bead dispenser bead shall be attached to the striping machine in such a manner that the beads are dispensed immediately after the first bead drop application. Glass spheres dispensers shall be equipped with an automatic cut-off control that is synchronized with the cut-off of the thermoplastic material and applies the glass spheres in a manner such that the spheres appear uniform on the entire traffic stripes and markings surface with, 50 to 60% embedment. (c) equipped with a special kettle for uniformly heating and melting the striping material. The kettle must be equipped with an automatic temperature control device and material

thermometer for positive temperature control and to prevent overheating or scorching of the thermoplastic material. (d) meet the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association, state, and local authorities.

711-4 Application. 711-4.1 General: Remove existing pavement markings such that scars or traces of

removed markings will not conflict with new stripes and markings by a method approved by the Engineer. Cost for removing conflicting pavement markings during maintenance of traffic operations to be included in Maintenance of Traffic, Lump Sum. Before applying traffic stripes and markings, remove any material by a method approved by the Engineer that would adversely affect the bond of the traffic stripes. Before applying traffic stripes to any portland cement concrete surface, apply a primer, sealer or surface preparation adhesive of the type recommended by the manufacturer. Offset longitudinal lines at least 2 inches from any longitudinal joints of portland cement concrete pavement. Apply traffic stripes or markings only to dry surfaces, and when the ambient air and surface temperature is at least 50ºF and rising for asphalt surfaces and 60°F and rising for concrete surfaces. Apply striping to the same tolerances in dimensions and in alignment specified in 710-5. When applying traffic stripes and markings over existing markings, ensure that no more than 2 inches on either end and not more than 1 inch on either side of the existing line is visible. Apply thermoplastic material to the pavement either by spray, extrusion or other means approved by the Engineer. Conduct field tests in accordance with FM 5-541.Take test readings representative of the striping performance. Remove and replace traffic stripes and markings not meeting the requirements of this Section at no additional cost to the Department. Apply all final pavement markings prior to opening the road to traffic.

711-4.1.1 Preformed Thermoplastic: Apply markings only to dry surfaces and when ambient air temperature is at least 32°F. Prior to installation, follow the manufacturer’s recommendations for pre-heating. 711-4.2 Thickness:

711-4.2.1 Initial or Recapped Stripes and Markings: Apply or recap traffic stripes or markings such that all lane lines, center lines, transverse markings and traffic stripes and markings within traffic wearing areas, will have a thickness of 0.10 to 0.15 inch when measured above the pavement surface. Also, all gore, island, and diagonal stripe markings, bike lane symbols and messages, wherever located, will have a thickness of 0.09 to 0.12 inch when measured above the pavement surface. Measure, record and certify on Department approved form and submit to the Engineer, the thickness of white and yellow pavement markings in accordance with FM 5-541. 711-4.2.2 Refurbishing Existing Traffic Stripes and Markings: Apply a minimum of 0.06 inch of thermoplastic material. Ensure that the combination of the existing stripe and the overlay after application of glass spheres does not exceed the maximum thickness of 0.150 inch for all lines.

711-4.3 Retroreflectivity: Apply white and yellow traffic stripes and markings that will attain an initial retroreflectivity of not less than 450 mcd/lx·m2 and not less than 350 mcd/lx·m2,

respectively for all longitudinal lines. All transverse lines, messages and arrows will attain an initial retroreflectivity of not less than 300 mcd/lx·m2 and 250 mcd/lx·m2 for white and yellow respectively. All pedestrian crosswalks, bike lane symbols or messages in a proposed bike lane shall attain an initial retroreflectivity of not less than 275 mcd/lx·m2. Measure, record and certify on Department approved form and submit to the Engineer, the retroreflectivity of white and yellow pavement markings in accordance with FM 5-541.

711-4.4 Glass Spheres: 711-4.4.1 Longitudinal Lines: For initial traffic striping and marking, apply the first drop of Type 4 or larger glass spheres immediately followed by the second drop of Type 1 glass spheres. For refurbishing, apply a single drop of Type 3 glass spheres. Apply reflective glass spheres to all markings at the rates determined by the manufacturer’s recommendations.

711-4.4.2 Transverse Stripes and Markings: Apply a single drop of Type 1 glass spheres. Apply reflective glass spheres to all markings at the rates determined by the manufacturer’s recommendations. Apply a mixture consisting of 50% glass spheres and 50% sharp silica sand to all thermoplastic pedestrian crosswalk lines and bike lane symbols at the rates determined by the manufacturer’s recommendations.

711-4.4.3 Preformed Markings: These markings are factory supplied with glass spheres and skid resistant material. No additional glass spheres or skid resistant material should be applied during installation.

711-5 Contractor’s Responsibility for Notification. Notify the Engineer prior to the placement of the thermoplastic materials. Furnish the Engineer with the manufacturer’s name and batch numbers of the thermoplastic materials and glass spheres to be used. Ensure that the approved batch numbers appear on the thermoplastic materials and glass spheres packages.

711-6 Protection of Newly Applied Traffic Stripes and Markings. Do not allow traffic onto or permit vehicles to cross newly applied pavement markings until they are sufficiently dry. Remove and replace any portion of the pavement markings damaged by passing traffic or from any other cause, at no additional cost to the Department

711-7 Observation Period. Longitudinal pavement markings are subject to a 180 day observation period under normal traffic. The observation period shall begin with the satisfactory completion and acceptance of the work. The longitudinal pavement markings shall show no signs of failure due to blistering, excessive cracking, chipping, discoloration, poor adhesion to the pavement, loss of reflectivity or vehicular damage. The retroreflectivity shall meet the initial requirements of 711-4.3. The Department reserves the right to check the color and retroreflectivity any time prior to the end of the observation period. Replace, at no additional expense to the Department, any longitudinal pavement markings that do not perform satisfactorily under traffic during the 180 day observation period.

711-8 Corrections for Deficiencies. Recapping applies to conditions where additional striping material is applied to new or refurbished traffic stripes or markings to correct a deficiency. Recap a 1.0 mile section centered around the deficiency with additional striping material or by complete removal and reapplication at no additional cost to the Department. If recapping will result in a thickness exceeding the maximum allowed, the traffic stripes or markings will be removed and reapplied.

711-9 Submittals. 711-9.1 Submittal Instructions: Prepare a certification of quantities, using the

Department’s current approved form, for each project in the Contract. Submit the certification of quantities and daily worksheets to the Engineer. The Department will not pay for any disputed items until the Engineer approves the certification of quantities.

711-9.2 Contractor’s Certification of Quantities: Request payment by submitting a certification of quantities no later than Twelve O clock noon Monday after the estimate cut-off date or as directed by the Engineer, based on the amount of work done or completed. Ensure the certification of quantities consists of the following: (a) Contract Number, FPID Number, Certification Number, Certification Date and the period that the certification represents. (b) The basis for arriving at the amount of the progress certification, less payments previously made and less any amount previously retained or withheld. The basis will include a detailed breakdown provided on the certification of items of payment.

711-10 Method of Measurement. The quantities to be paid for under this Section will be as follows: (a) The length, in net miles, of 6 inch solid traffic stripe, authorized and acceptably applied. (b) The total traversed distance in gross miles of 10-30 or 3-9 skip line. The actual applied line is 25% of the traverse distance, for a 1:3 ratio. This equates to 1,320 feet of marking per mile of single line. (c) The net length, in feet, of all other types of lines and stripes, authorized and acceptably applied. (d) The area, in square feet, of removal of existing pavement markings, acceptably removed. (e) The number of pavement messages, symbols and directional arrows, authorized and acceptably applied.

711-11 Basis of Payment. Prices and payments will be full compensation for all work specified in this Section, including, all cleaning and preparing of surfaces, furnishing of all materials, application, curing and protection of all items, protection of traffic, furnishing of all tools, machines and equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Final payment will be withheld until all deficiencies are corrected. Payment will be made under:

Item No. 711- Thermoplastic Traffic Stripes, Solid - per net mile. Traffic Stripes, Solid - per foot.

Traffic Stripes, Skip - per gross mile. Dotted/Guideline - per foot. Messages - each. Arrows - each. Yield Markings - per foot. Thermoplastic, Remove - per square foot.